NT 5000-5-35 Instructor Manual Eng - MPDF

NAVI-TRAINER PROFESSIONAL 5000
(VERSION 5.35)
INSTRUCTOR MANUAL
Issue date: October, 2014

Copyright © 1993–2014 Transas MIP Ltd. All rights reserved.
The information contained herein is proprietary to Transas MIP Ltd. and shall not be duplicated in
whole or in part. The technical details contained in this manual are the best that are available at the
date of issue but are subject to change without notice.
Transas MIP Ltd. pursues the policy of continuous development. This may lead to the product
described in this manual being different from the product delivered after its publication.
The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
NVIDIA ® and PhysX ® are registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation and are used under license.
CONTENTS
Introduction 11
Annotation 13
Printing House Conventions 14
General 15
Chapter 1. Arrangement of Instructor Workplace 17
Starting Navi-Trainer Instructor 19
Description of Main Window 20
Menu Bar 21
Toolbars 21
Customising Menu Bar and Toolbars 22
Chart Window 29
Status Bar 31
Instructor Workplace Configuration 32
Saving Workplace Configuration 32
Loading Configuration 33
Default Configuration 33
Autosaving Configuration 33
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise 35
Selection of Training Area 39
Information on Training Area 40
Chart Setup 41
Chart Centering 41
Zooming Chart Fragment 41
Changing Chart Scale 42
Canceling Operations with Charts 42
Loading and Unloading Area Charts 43
Information on Chart 43
Measuring Bearing and Range 44
Setting Reference Point 44
Changing Window Orientation 44
Display of Auxiliary Elements (Overlays) 45
Depth Section 47
Changing Color Palette 48
Selecting Motion Display Modes 48
Operations with Objects 49
Object Categories 49
Adding New Object to Exercise 54
Selecting Object on Chart 56
Opening Object’s Context Menu 56
3
Navi-Trainer Professional 5000 (Version 5.35) • Instructor Manual
Moving Object 56
Rotating Object 56
Renaming Object 57
Setting Ship Tactical Image 57
Opening Object’s Properties Panel 58
Deleting Object 59
Objects Panel 59
Readonly Mode 61
Selection of Measurement Units 62
General Exercise Settings 63
Displaying Ship Track as Series of Dots 64
Displaying Ship Track as Series of Ship Contours 65
Displaying Speed Vectors 66
Enabling/Disabling Automatic Sound Signals 68
Miscellaneous Settings 69
Setting Environmental Sailing Conditions 71
Environment Settings 72
Creating Environment Conditions Template 81
Overall Environmental Conditions 83
Local Environmental Conditions 91
Importing Tides and Currents 99
Creating Vector Field of Current 103
Setting of Clouds 106
Setting Atmosphere Fronts 107
Editing Wave Spectrums 109
Ship Setup 112
Own Ship Setup 112
Ship-Target Setup 114
Data on Ships 116
Setting Ship Properties 117
General Ship Properties 119
Setting Ship Position 119
Autopilot Settings 120
Navigational Equipment Initial Settings 121
UAIS Initial Settings 125
Setting of Navigational Signals 126
Setting Options 128
Contours Settings 130
Fenders Settings 131
Route Planning 132
Plotting Route on Chart 132
Assigning Object to Route 133
General Route Settings 134
Editing Route on Chart 135
Setting Route Properties 136
Route Tabular Form 139
Conditions for Following on Route 141
Route Export and Import 141
Setting Procedural Alarms 143
Creating Procedural Alarms 143
4
Contents
Template of Procedural Alarms 145

Switching On/Off Procedural Alarms 146
Setting Synchronization with External GPS Source 147
Magnetic Deviation 148
Setting Magnetic Deviation 148
Magnetic Deviation Template 148
Ship Equipment Fault Scenarios 150
Creating Fault Scenarios 150
Editing Fault Scenarios 153
List of Device Faults 155
Aid-to-Navigation Objects (Buoys) 158
Land Objects 159
Setting Land Objects 159
Tidal Stream Signal Station 159
Traffic Control Signal Station 160
Floating Objects 161
Setting Floating Objects 161
Designation Floating Objects on Chart 162
AIS AtoN 164
Setup of Exchange Recording 167
Setup of Video Log File Recording 168
Using Templates 169
Template of Single Object 169
Template of Group of Objects 170
Creating Comments on Exercise 173
Adding User Information to Chart 174
Pre-playing of Exercise 176
Saving and Loading Exercise 177
Saving Exercise 177
Loading Exercise 178
Loading of NT 3000 Exercises 179
Chapter 3. Simulator Session 181
Opening Simulator Session 183
Types of Training Scenario 183
Distribution of Tasks 183
Starting Exercise 186
Pausing Exercise 186
Session Overloading 186
Possible Operations During Simulator Session 188
Control of Ships 189
Control of Own Ships and Target Ships (Advanced Models) 189
Control of Targets Ships (Simplified Models) 189
Giving Sound Signals 191
Giving Sound Signals by Target Ships 191
Giving Siren Signals 192
Control of Autopilot 193
Motion Data Display 195
Fire Detection Alarm 196
Control of Navigation Signals 197
Selecting Signals Preset Combination 197
5
Setting Lights 198

Setting Shapes 199
Change of Lights and Shapes 200
Flashing Light Signaling 201
Setting Malfunctions on Ship's Properties Panel 202
Setting Radar Faults 202
Setting Loran-С Faults 203
Setting Propulsion Plant Faults 204
Setting Steering System Faults 206
UAIS Message Exchange 208
Message Reply 208
Monitoring of UAIS Messages 209
Setting Options During Simulator Session 210
Using Virtual Force 211
Setting Virtual Force 211
Changing Virtual Force 212
Setting Virtual Force Properties 212
Ship Information Panel 213
Events Panel 214
Monitoring of Dangerous Targets 217
CPA/TCPA Monitoring Panel 217
General CPA/TCPA Settings 217
Graphic Presentation of СРА/ТСРА Data 218
Diagrams of Ship Motion Parameters 220
Ship Diagram Window 220
Selecting Monitored Parameters 223
Setting Parameter Properties 225
Diagram Settings Template 226
Export Diagram Data to CSV-Format 227
Diagram Printout 227
Instructor Visualization 229
Setting Camera 229
Instructor Visualization Control Panel 232
Creating Visualization Screenshots 236
Loading Visual Profile on Bridge 237
Visual Settings 238
Setting Radar 240
Loading ECDIS Data 241
Transmitting NAVTEX Messages 242
VHF Playback 245
Control of Auxiliary Machinery 247
Control of Remote Sensors 249
Creation of Log Scripts 251
LogScript Panel 251
Saving Current Log Script 251
Recording Log Script 252
Editing Log Script 254
Closing Simulator Session 256
Saving Current State of Exercise 256
Stop Exercise 256
6
Contents
Chapter 4. Debriefing 257

General 259
Loading Log File 260
Log Playback 261
Log Script Playback 262
Main Exercise Window Printout 264
Playback of Audio Log Files 266
Playback of Video Log Files 267
Report Generation 268
Report Generator Wizard 270
Chapter 5. Special Exercises 275
Mooring Operations 277
Mooring Walls 277
Characteristics of Mechanical and Hydrodynamic Interaction 280
Points on Ship Contour 281
Operations with Tow/Mooring Lines 282
Control of Mooring Winches 285
Setting Mooring Objects 287
Work with Balloon Mooring Fenders 295
Operations with Anchors 297
Setting Anchor Parameters 297
Selecting Seabed Type 299
On-Chart Control of Anchors 300
Control of Anchor Winches during Exercise 302
Towing Operations 304
Setting Bridle 304
Creating Barge Tow 306
Operations with Tow Winches 307
Operations with Automatic Tugs 314
Automatic Tugs General Settings 315
Reserving and Releasing of Tug 315
Basic Operations 316
Automatic Tug Control Page 323
Navigation in Ice Conditions 324
Work with Ice Zone 324
Setting Ship Ice Class 329
Setting Ice Repulsion 330
Setting Ice Accretion 331
Operations with Icebergs 331
Operations with Ice Breaker 334
Monitoring Trainee Performance 337
Fishing Operations 338
Shoal Objects 338
Selecting Vertical Sonic Speed Distribution 341
Pinnacle Objects 342
Fishing Buoys 343
Setting Bottom and Pelagic Trawl 344
Setting Purse Seine 347
Setting Long Line 350
Watching Trainee Performance 352
7
Search and Rescue Operations 354

SAR Objects 354
Signaling in Accordance with ICS 365
Giving Distress Signals 369
Use of Rescue Boat 370
Operations with Helicopters and Aircrafts 374
Operations with Helicopter Objects 374
Operations with Aircraft Objects 376
Deck Helicopters 377
Underway Replenishment Operations 382
Setting Underway Replenishment Criteria 382
Underway Replenishment Control Panel 383
P&D Line and Span Wire Rendering/Heaving 384
Joint Ship Maneuvering in Formations 387
Creating Fleet Formation 387
Control of Fleet Formation 390
Passing of Locks 392
Setting Lock Initial Properties 392
Control of Lock 393
Monitoring Fulfilment of Exercise with Locks 397
Control of Semaphores 398
Ro-Ro Operations 400
ECDIS Training 404
Ordering Charts, Chart Update and Weather Forecasts 404
Order Processing 407
Operations with Submarine 409
Pirates Attacks Control 411
Control of Motion Platform 412
Chapter 6. Ship Communication Aids 415
Intercom 417
Telephone Communication with Subscribers 417
Playback of Radiotelephone Communications 419
VHF Communication 420
Radio Traffic Monitoring 420
Keeping of Listening Watch 421
Chapter 7. Joint Operation of NTPRO with Other Simulators 425
Joint Exercises on NTPRO and VTMS Simulator 427
Creating NTPRO Exercise 427
Creating VTMS Configuration 431
Joint Exercises on NTPRO and ERS/TechSim Simulators 447
Preparation of Joint Exercises 447
Establishing Connection with ERS/TechSim Simulator 450
Running Joint Exercises 451
Joint Exercises on NTPRO and TGS Simulators 453
Establishing Connection with TGS Simulator 453
Chapter 8. Transas Evaluation and Assessment System 455
General 457
System Overview 457
8
Contents
Principles of Instructor Work with TEAS 458

Rule Editor 459
Competency Assessment Scenario 459
Description of Operations, Parameters, and Constants 460
Rule Editor's Toolbar Buttons 470
Rule Editor's Context Menu 471
Formation of Assessment Rules 472
Grading Panel 482
Training Report 483
Trainee Registration 483
Log Playback and Data Export to Training Report 484
Proficiency Growth Assessment 485
Annex 1 487
Navi-Trainer Instructor Menu Description 489
Annex 2 497
Parameters Monitored for Detecting Violations 499
9
INTRODUCTION
Annotation 13
Printing House Conventions 14
General 15
11
Introduction • Annotation
ANNOTATION
This Manual is intended for use by the Instructor of the navigational simulator Navi-Trainer
Professional 5000 (NTPRO 5000).
The Manual consists of eight chapters and two annexes. Each of the chapters has its own list of contents.
For work with the Manual you may need the following additional documentation:
l Navi-Trainer 5000 Professional (v. 5.35). Technical Description and Installation Manual ;
l Navi-Trainer Professional 5000 (v. 5.35). Navigational Bridge.
Information in this document is subject to change in order to improve simulator reliability, design, or
function without prior notification.
13
PRINTING HOUSE CONVENTIONS

Table 1. Printing House Conventions in Manual
Sample of notation Usage comments
Setup.exe Messages, commands, files, folders and other Windows OS info
<Enter> Keyboard key names
Menu Menu items
Interface Windows names, tabs, icons, checkboxes, radio buttons and text
box captions, and other interface elements
Note, Warning, Caution Notes, warnings, cautions
Document Document names
NTPRO_5000\Exercise Path to a file, folder
Page 1 Cross reference
http://www.transas.com URL
14
Introduction • General
GENERAL
The instructor workplace in NTPRO 5000 navigation simulator is based on Navi-Trainer Instructor
application intended for:
l Creation and editing of exercise scenarios;
l Starting and conducting simulator session;
l Debriefing.
An “exercise scenario” or an “exercise” is understood as a description of location and motion of objects
within the scene space.
An “exercise scene” or a “scene” is understood as a model or actual geographic area.
The scene is an aggregate of:

l The terrain spatial model (submerged and surface part);
l Spatial models of coastal structures (buildings, bridges, berths, etc.);
l Spatial models of aids to navigation (lighthouses, buoys, etc.).
Scenes of different geographic areas of the earth are supplied together
with the simulator.
Exercise objects include:

l Ships (own and targets);
l Tugboats (own and targets);
l Barges (targets);
l Helicopters (targets, “deck helicopters”);
l Aircrafts (targets);
l Mooring objects (CALM, SALM, bollard, etc.);
l Fishing objects (shoal, pinnacle, buoys);
l Objects of search and rescue operations (SART, man over board, damaged tanker, oil slick, etc.);
l Environment objects (composite condition zone, ice, cloud, current field, etc.);
l Land objects (tidal stream signal station, traffic control signal station, watch tower, etc.);
l Floating objects (buoys, containers, trunk, etc.);
l Scene objects (visual camera, routes, AtoN station, ERBL, etc.);
l VTS radar towers;
l Acoustic transponder;
l Creature and transport animated objects;
l User objects (ellipse, line, text, zone);
l TEAS objects.
15
The exercise scenario creation procedure implies:

l Selection of a geographic area;
l Setting environment sailing conditions;
l Setting of the initial object positions;
l Setting of the objects’ speed and routes;
l Setting of characteristics and faults of the navigational equipment.
The simulator session procedure includes the following main stages:
l Exercise assignment to bridge and starting;
l Exercise monitoring and control.
Exercise debriefing implies:
l Log playback;
l Report generation.
16
CHAPTER 1.
ARRANGEMENT OF INSTRUCTOR
WORKPLACE
This chapter contains:
Starting Navi-Trainer Instructor 19

Description of Main Window 20
Menu Bar 21
Toolbars 21
Customising Menu Bar and Toolbars 22
Chart Window 29
Status Bar 31
Instructor Workplace Configuration 32
Saving Workplace Configuration 32
Loading Configuration 33
Default Configuration 33
Autosaving Configuration 33
17
Chapter 1. Arrangement of Instructor Workplace • Starting Navi-Trainer Instructor
STARTING NAVI-TRAINER INSTRUCTOR

Usually, “Navi-Trainer instructor” application is added to simulator configuration and started automatically
after simulator start.
However, application (nti.exe) can be started from command line:
nti.exe – SERVER: name – LANG: language,
where:
l name – Trainer Server name;
l language – language code (9 – English, 25 – Russian).
In this case, the application can only be used for creating an exercise and debriefing on the instructor
workplace.
19
DESCRIPTION OF MAIN WINDOW

After the application start, the screen displays the program’s main window named Navi-Trainer instructor.
The main window contains:

l menu bar (see on page 21);
l toolbars (see on page 21);
l sailing area chart window (see on page 29);
l status bar (see on page 31).
Note: The Instructor can customize the menu bar and toolbars (see "Customising Menu Bar and Toolbars"
on page 22).
20
Chapter 1. Arrangement of Instructor Workplace • Description of Main Window
Menu Bar
Menu bar contains the following menu commands:
l File – handling exercise files;
l Edit – creating and editing exercises;
l Chart – handling charts;
l View – setting the instructor station elements for the display;
l Window – handling windows;
l Help – calling context help and obtaining additional information.
Note: For more information, see "Navi-Trainer Instructor Menu Description " on page 489.
To change the arrangement of the menu bar, left-click the sign in the left-hand part of the menu bar,
holding the mouse button drag the menu bar to the desired position on the tool ribbon. When a menu bar is
dragged beyond the tool ribbon, the menu bar assumes the form of a window.
Toolbars
Main window has several toolbars, such as:
l Chart – main chart operation commands;
l Control – exercise control functions;
l Bridge select – selecting the active bridge;
l Editor – main functions of exercise editor:
l External connections – setting of parameters and status of an external connections;
l Loading ECDIS data;
l Main – main exercise handling tools;
l Panels – to call information and control panels;
l Plotting – control of on-chart object display settings;
21
l Reference point – to set a reference point on the chart;
l Viewpoint – to control the visualisation camera and the radar.
To change the arrangement of the toolbar, left-click the sign in the left-hand part of the toolbar, holding
the mouse button drag the toolbar to the desired position on the tool ribbon. When a toolbar is dragged
beyond the tool ribbon, the toolbar assumes the form of a window.
Customising Menu Bar and Toolbars

Instructor can customize the menu bar and toolbars on the Customize panel (the View\Customize… menu
item).
The Customize panel contains the following pages:

l Toolbars – operation with default toolbars (showing, hiding, restoring) and custom toolbars (creating,
renaming, showing, hiding, deleting);
l Commands – changing the contents of the menu bar and toolbars;
l Appearance – changing the interface colour palette and design.
22
Changing Contents of Toolbars and Menu Bar

To change the contents of the toolbars and menu bar, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Customize... menu item or click the mouse on the button with a double arrow in the
right-hand part of any toolbar on the ribbon.
2. Select the Commands page of the Customize panel.
3. From the Toolbar drop-down list, select the name of the toolbar (or Menu for the menu bar) which should
be changed.
Note: The list of tools and commands of the selected toolbar/menu will be displayed under the Toolbar
drop-down list at the right part of the Customize panel.
23
4. To add the tool or command to the selected toolbar/menu bar:

a. In the Categories list, select the required functional group of tools.
b. From the Commands list, select the required tool or command.
c. Click the button. The tool or command will be added to the list of tools and commands of the
selected toolbar at the right part of the Customize panel.
5. To add a separating line to the selected toolbar/menu bar:
a. In the list of tools at the right part of the panel, select the tool before which the separating line
should be added.
b. Click the button.

6. To delete the tool/command/ separate line from the selected toolbar/menu bar,
a. Select the tool/command/ separate line in the list of tools at the right part of the panel.
b. Click the button.

7. To change the position of a tool/command/ separate line on the toolbar/menu bar:
a. Select the tool/command/ separate line in the list of tools at the right part of the panel.
b. To move up, click the Up button the required number of times.
c. To move down, click the Down the required number of times.
To restore the toolbar/menu bar, choose one of ways:
l Select the Commands page of the Customize panel. From the Toolbar drop-down list select the name
of the toolbar (or Menu for a menu bar), which the default settings should be restored for and click the
Reset button.
Or
l Select the Toolbars page of the Customize panel. Click the name of the toolbar which the default
settings should be restored for (except for menu and custom toolbars) and click the Reset button.
To close the Customize window, click the Close button.
Showing and Hiding the Toolbars

To hide/show the toolbar in the main window, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Customize... menu item or click the button in the right-hand part of any toolbar.
2. Select the Toolbars page.
3. Check/clear the name of the toolbar which should be shown/hidden. The toolbar will appear/disappear
in/from the main window of the Navi-Trainer Instructor application.
To close the Customize window, click the Close button.
Note: All the toolbars can be hidden, except for the menu bar.
Creating Custom Toolbars

To create custom toolbar, use the following procedure:
2. Open the Toolbars page.
24
3. Click the New... button. The Toolbar name box will appear.
4. Type the toolbar name and click the ОK button. The Toolbar name box closes down. The name of the
new custom toolbar will appear on the list of toolbars on Toolbars page.
25
Custom toolbar will appear in the top left corner of the screen in the form of an empty window .
Note: To form the composition of custom toolbar, see "Changing Contents of Toolbars and Menu Bar" on
page 23.
5. To place the custom toolbar, click the left mouse button on the toolbar heading and, keeping the button
depressed, drag the toolbar to the desired position on the tool ribbon.
To rename the custom toolbar, use the following procedure:
1. On the Toolbars page of the Customize window, select required custom toolbar from the list.
2. Click the Rename button. The Toolbar name box will appear.
3. Type the new toolbar name and click the ОK button.

To delete a custom toolbar, use the following procedure:
1. On the Toolbars page of the Customize window, select the custom toolbar from the list.
2. Click the Delete button.
3. Click the ОK button.
26
Changing Interface Appearance

To change the interface colour palette, use the following procedure:
2. Select the Appearance page.
3. Click the Сolor button.
4. In the Basic colors group box, select the necessary design colour and click the ОK button.
27
If the Basic colors group box does not contain the necessary colour, to select the required hue, use the
following procedure:
1. Click the Define Custom Colors>> button.
2. By moving the sliders along the colour field and the brightness scale in the right-hand part of the Color
window, select the necessary colour and its saturation, or set the colour coordinates: Hue, Sat, Lum,
Red, Green, Blue.
3. Click the Add to Custom Colors button. The selected colour will appear in the Custom colors group
box.
4. Click the ОK button.

To change the interface design, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Customize... menu item or click the button in the right-hand part of any toolbar on the
ribbon.
2. Select the Appearance page.
3. Select the interface design option from the Filling type drop-down list.
28
4. Clear/check the Flat buttons checkbox if the toolbar buttons should be shown convex/flat (the
checkbox is checked by default).
5. To close the Customize panel, click the Close button.
Chart Window
At the initial stage of work, it is necessary to create a window with a chart of the future area (see "Selection
of Training Area" on page 39) or to open a saved exercise (File\Open… menu item).
29
The chart window can be expanded to the width of the main window , returned to the initial state ,
collapsed or closed .
It is possible to open several windows for each exercise:
1. Choose Window\New Window menu item.
2. For window arrangement on the screen, use the following Window menu items:
o Cascade;
o Tile Horizontally;
o Tile Vertically.
3. To switch from one window to another, use the list of open windows in the Window menu.
Note: Parameters and scale can be set for each window individually.
At the left bottom corner under the chart there is the drop-down list for selecting the chart scale (see
"Changing Chart Scale" on page 42).
After the exercise has been assigned to the simulator bridges, in the left bottom corner under the chart will
also display tabs which have the names of simulator bridges. Each tab contains a chart of the gaming area
centred in the own ship assigned to the relevant bridge.
If log-file is running, a control tool for log playback will display at the bottom of the chart (see "Log Playback"
on page 261).
30
Status Bar
After the chart window has been opened, the bottom part of the screen will display a status bar which will
show:
l depth in the chart point where the mouse cursor is placed;

l wind velocity in the chart point where the mouse cursor is placed;
l current speed in the chart point where the mouse cursor is placed;
l bearing and distance from the reference point to the point where the mouse cursor is placed;
l absolute position of a chart point where the mouse cursor is placed;
l current chart display scale;
l window orientation (North up by default. 000.0 – Nord Up);
l absolute or relative time of the exercise beginning (absolute time of 12:00:00 by default).
Note: The measurement units are set on the Unit settings panel (see "Selection of Measurement Units" on
page 62).
31
INSTRUCTOR WORKPLACE CONFIGURATION

Under the term a “workplace configuration” is understood an arrangement of windows, panels and toolbars
of “Navi-Trainer instructor” application as well as names of the loaded exercises and initial parameters
settings.
“Navi-Trainer instructor” application allows storing any number of the user workplace configurations
in files, for their future use.
Saving Workplace Configuration

To save a configuration, use the following procedure:
1. As the workplace configuration is comleted, select File\Configuration\ Save As... menu item.
2. Type configuration name in Name field and click OK button.
32
Chapter 1. Arrangement of Instructor Workplace • Instructor Workplace Configuration
To save changes in the current configuration, use the following procedure:

1. Choose the File\Configuration\Save menu item.
2. To rewrite the configuration, click Yes. All the changes you have made will be saved in the current
configuration.
3. To cancel the saving of changed in the configuration, click No.
Loading Configuration
After the Instructor workplace configuration has been saved, it can be loaded for further work.
To do this, use the following procedure:

1. Choose File\Configuration\Open... menu item. The Open configuration panel with the list of available
configurations appears.
2. Select the required configuration from the list and click OK button. The Instructor workplace will be
arranged in accordance with the selected configuration.
Default Configuration
To set default configuration, select File\Configuration\Set as Default menu item. The selected configuration
will be loaded automatically every time the Instructor workplace is run.
Autosaving Configuration
The configuration autosaving proceeds only if the “Navi-Trainer Instructor” task is closed correctly.
To automatically save the changes in the current configuration choose the File\Configuration\Auto Save
configuration menu item.
To cancel the autosaving of the configuration clear the checkbox in the File\Configuration\Auto Save
configuration menu.
33
CHAPTER 2.
CREATING AND EDITING EXERCISE
Selection of Training Area 39

Information on Training Area 40
Chart Setup 41
Chart Centering 41
Zooming Chart Fragment 41
Changing Chart Scale 42
Canceling Operations with Charts 42
Loading and Unloading Area Charts 43
Information on Chart 43
Measuring Bearing and Range 44
Setting Reference Point 44
Changing Window Orientation 44
Display of Auxiliary Elements (Overlays) 45
Depth Section 47
Changing Color Palette 48
Selecting Motion Display Modes 48
Operations with Objects 49
Object Categories 49
Adding New Object to Exercise 54
Selecting Object on Chart 56
Opening Object’s Context Menu 56
Moving Object 56
Rotating Object 56
Renaming Object 57
Setting Ship Tactical Image 57
Opening Object’s Properties Panel 58
Deleting Object 59
Objects Panel 59
35
Readonly Mode 61
Selection of Measurement Units 62
General Exercise Settings 63
Displaying Ship Track as Series of Dots 64
Displaying Ship Track as Series of Ship Contours 65
Displaying Speed Vectors 66
Enabling/Disabling Automatic Sound Signals 68
Miscellaneous Settings 69
Setting Environmental Sailing Conditions 71
Environment Settings 72
Creating Environment Conditions Template 81
Overall Environmental Conditions 83
Local Environmental Conditions 91
Importing Tides and Currents 99
Creating Vector Field of Current 103
Setting of Clouds 106
Setting Atmosphere Fronts 107
Editing Wave Spectrums 109
Ship Setup 112
Own Ship Setup 112
Ship-Target Setup 114
Data on Ships 116
Setting Ship Properties 117
General Ship Properties 119
Setting Ship Position 119
Autopilot Settings 120
Navigational Equipment Initial Settings 121
UAIS Initial Settings 125
Setting of Navigational Signals 126
Setting Options 128
Contours Settings 130
Fenders Settings 131
Route Planning 132
Plotting Route on Chart 132
Assigning Object to Route 133
General Route Settings 134
Editing Route on Chart 135
Setting Route Properties 136
Route Tabular Form 139
Conditions for Following on Route 141
Route Export and Import 141
Setting Procedural Alarms 143
36
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise •
Creating Procedural Alarms 143

Template of Procedural Alarms 145
Switching On/Off Procedural Alarms 146
Setting Synchronization with External GPS Source 147
Magnetic Deviation 148
Setting Magnetic Deviation 148
Magnetic Deviation Template 148
Ship Equipment Fault Scenarios 150
Creating Fault Scenarios 150
Editing Fault Scenarios 153
List of Device Faults 155
Aid-to-Navigation Objects (Buoys) 158
Land Objects 159
Setting Land Objects 159
Tidal Stream Signal Station 159
Traffic Control Signal Station 160
Floating Objects 161
Setting Floating Objects 161
Designation Floating Objects on Chart 162
AIS AtoN 164
Setup of Exchange Recording 167
Setup of Video Log File Recording 168
Using Templates 169
Template of Single Object 169
Template of Group of Objects 170
Creating Comments on Exercise 173
Adding User Information to Chart 174
Pre-playing of Exercise 176
Saving and Loading Exercise 177
Saving Exercise 177
Loading Exercise 178
Loading of NT 3000 Exercises 179
37
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Selection of Training Area
SELECTION OF TRAINING AREA

Creation of exercise is started from selection of the exercise area scene. To select an area scene, use the
1. Choose File\New… menu item, or press button on the toolbar, or press <Ctrl>+<N> key
combination. The screen will display Select area window containing a list of all the available
geographic areas.
2. Click the area name. The green marker will show up the selected area on the chart.
3. Press OK button. The screen will display a window showing the charts covering the scene area.
Note: The chart display scale is selected so that the entire scene area should fit in the program window.
39
INFORMATION ON TRAINING AREA

To obtain information on the training area, select Help\Area... menu item. The Database window will display
main data, the charts of the area (with zones of recommended sailing tracks, piers for mooring operations
and zones with high/low/medium level of detail) and some pictures of the area.
For some areas, you can obtain a larger scale of zones with a high level of detail:
1. Position the cursor on the red bound of zone.
2. Click the left mouse button. The screen will display a chart of the zone with a high level of detail,
showing the borders (in the red colour) and piers for performing mooring operations (magenta).
3. To view some fragment of the scene, click the sign on the chart.
40
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Chart Setup
CHART SETUP
Chart Centering
For chart centering with respect to the selected point, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Centre menu item, or press button on the toolbar, or press <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<C> key
combination. The cursor will be switched to the chart centering mode .
2. Position the cursor on the required place on the chart and click the left mouse button, or press one of
the following key combinations:
o move to the left – <Shift>+<←>;
o move to the right – <Shift>+<→>;
o move up – <Shift>+<↑>;
o move down – <Shift>+<↓>.
Note: The selected point will be displayed in the centre of the window. The screen centre shifts to a
distance equal to 1/1000 of the current display scale.
3. To return to the default cursor mode, click the right mouse button.
Zooming Chart Fragment

A place on the chart can also be chosen by selecting rectangular chart fragment. To zoom a rectangular
chart fragment, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Zoom Area menu item, or press button on the toolbar, or press <Ctrl>+<Z> key
combination. The mouse cursor will be switched to a zoom mode .
2. Position the cursor in the top left corner of the chart fragment and press the left mouse button. Holding
the mouse button, move the cursor to the right bottom corner of this fragment.
3. Release the button. The selected chart fragment will be zoomed to the entire window size.
41
Changing Chart Scale

The chart scale is shown in the status bar at the bottom of the screen, and on the graduated scale to the
left on the chart.
Select the scale from the drop-down list in the left bottom corner under the chart.
The scale of chart display can be changed from 1:10 000 000 till 1:100.
Besides, the scale can be changed in several ways (see Table 2).
Table 2. Ways to increase or decrease the scale of the chart
Increase scale Decrease scale
Choose Chart\Increase Scale menu item Choose Chart\Decrease Scale menu item
Press button on the toolbar Press button on the toolbar
Press <Ctrl>+<↑> key combination Press <Ctrl>+ <↓> key combination
Press <+> key on the digital keyboard Press <–> key on the digital keyboard
Rotate the mouse scroll wheel backward (toward). Rotate the mouse scroll wheel forward (away from)
In this case, the chart will be centered in the cursor rotation. In this case, the chart will be centered in the
position cursor position
Canceling Operations with Charts

To cancel operations performed with the charts (scaling, shift, etc.), select Chart\Undo Area main menu
item, or press button on the toolbar, or press <Ctrl>+<Backspace> key combination.
42
Loading and Unloading Area Charts

Usually, all the Area charts are displayed on the screen. Any chart can be removed from display as
required. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Unload Chart menu item, or press button on the toolbar, or press
<Ctrl>+<Shift>+<L> key combination. The mouse cursor will be switched to the chart unloading mode
.
2. Point the cursor on the boundary of the chart required to be unloaded, and click the left mouse button.
The chart will disappear, and its boundary will be shown as a thin line.
To return the excluded chart or to display a loaded chart on top of other charts, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Load Chart menu item, or press button on the toolbar, or press <Ctrl>+<L> key
combination. The mouse cursor will be switched to the chart loading mode .
2. Position the cursor on the boundary of the chart which should be loaded or shown on top of other, and
click the left mouse button.The selected chart will appear or will be displayed on top of the other charts.
The chart boundary will be shown in the bold line.
Information on Chart
The instructor can obtain general information on any chart fragment. To do this, use the following
procedure:
1. Choose the Chart\Chart Info menu item, or press the toolbar button, or press the <Ctrl>+<I> key
combination. The cursor will switch to the chart fragment selection mode .
2. By moving the cursor, select the chart fragment which the information should be obtained on, and click
the left mouse button. The screen will display the Chart Info window containing information on the
selected chart fragment.
43
Measuring Bearing and Range

The bearing and range can be measured by using the electronic range and bearing line (ERBL). To do this,
use the following procedure:
1. In the menu, select Chart\ERBL item, or press button on the toolbar, or <Ctrl>+<E> key
combination. The mouse cursor will be switched to the ERBL mode .
2. Position the cursor on the chart point, which the measurements are made relative to, and click the left
button. ERBL origin will appear on the chart.
3. Moving cursor, read off bearing and range values.

Setting Reference Point

When creating or editing an exercise, it is useful to know the bearing and range relative to reference point.
The program has a capability to set a reference point on the chart.
1. Choose Chart\Reference Point menu item, or press button on the toolbar, or press
<Ctrl>+<Shift>+<C> key combination. The mouse cursor will be switched to the reference setting
mode .
2. Position the cursor in the point on the chart where the reference point is required to be set, and click the
left mouse button. The chart will display a cross standing for the position of the reference point,
whereas coordinates of this point will appear on the toolbar:
Note: By moving the cursor on the chart, the instructor can get readings of the bearing and distance from
the reference point to the cursor in the status bar.
Changing Window Orientation

By default, the window is oriented North Up.
To rotate the window clockwise, press <Ctrl>+<→> key combination, to rotate it counter clockwise, press
<Ctrl>+<←>. The window orientation will be changing with a step of 15 degrees.
Note: The orientation angle will be shown in the status bar.
44
Display of Auxiliary Elements (Overlays)

It is possible to show and hide on the chart the following auxiliary elements:
l chart borders, grid and range rings;
l TХ–97 chart elements;
l DCW converted chart elements;
l depth contours on the S-57 charts;
l user information (line, zone, text, ellipsis).
Display of Chart Borders, Grid and Range Rings

To show/hide chart borders, grid and range rings, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Overlays menu item.
2. Check/clear the required chart element in the submenu: Borders, Grid, Rings.
Note:The range rings have an origin in a reference point.
Display of TХ–97 Chart Elements

To show/hide the display of TХ–97 chart elements, perform the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Overlays\TХ–97 menu item.
2. In the Overlays box check/clear check boxes next to relative items.
45
3. Press the OK button.
Display of DCW Converted Chart Elements

To show/hide the display of DCW converted chart elements, perform the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Overlays\DCW converted menu item.
2. Check/clear the check boxes next to relative items.

Display of Depth Contours on S-57 Charts

To show/hide the depth contours on the S-57 charts, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Overlays\S57 v3 menu item.
2. In the Dialog window, set the depth in meters to display Shallow contour, Safety contour and Deep
contour on the chart. Press the OK button.
46
Display of User Information

To show/hide user information on the chart, perform the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Overlays\User Info menu item.
2. Check/clear check boxes next to relative items.

Depth Section
To select chart fragments where the depth values are equal to or smaller than the set value, use the
1. Choose View\Panels\Depth section menu item or press the toolbar button. The Depth section
window will appear.
2. Check the Show section check box.

3. Enter the depth level (m) in the Section depth field.
4. Press the Set button.
47
Changing Color Palette

The color palette of the Instructor display can be selected to suit the current illumination. To set the palette,
select the View\Palettes menu and check the required menu item:
l Day;
l Twilight;
l Dusk;
l Night.
To cancel the selection, clear the menu item.
Selecting Motion Display Modes

Chart display may be turned into one of the following modes:
l TM ‘Follow Up’ – true motion, Follow Up chart orientation (set by default);
l RM ‘Nord Up’ – relative motion, Nord Up chart orientation;
l RM ‘Head Up’ – relative motion, Head Up chart orientation;
l RM ‘Fixed Heading’ – relative motion, fixed heading (the ship with selected heading is displayed at the
center of the screen).
To select true motion mode, check View\Regimes\TM ‘Follow Up’ menu item, or press , or press
<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<F> key combination.
To select relative motion mode:

1. On exercise chart, select the reference vessel.
2. To select RM ‘Nord Up’ mode, check View\Regimes\ RM ‘Nord Up’ menu item, or press toolbar
button, or press <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<N> key combination.
3. To select ‘RM Head Up’ mode, check View\Regimes\ RM ‘Head Up’ menu item, or press toolbar
button, or press <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<H> key combination.
4. To select RM ‘Fixed Heading’ mode, check View\Regimes\RM ‘Fixed Heading’ menu item, or press
toolbar button, or press <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<X> key combination.
48
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Operations with Objects
OPERATIONS WITH OBJECTS

Object Categories
Exercise objects are categorized according to their functionality. For more information about categories of
the objects, see Table 3.
Table 3. Description of object's categories
Category Description
Aircraft The category includes a collection of aircraft models which can be used in an exercise as
target aircraft
Barge The category contains a barge models, which could be used as targets in exercise
Creature The category includes a set of animated objects which can be used in exercises for creating
the environment. All the objects of this category can be seen both, visually and on the radar
Device The category contains Radar object type
Environment This category contains:
l Cloud – simulation of rain clutter on the radar;

l Composite condition zone – setting environmental conditions within a certain area of the
exercise scene;
l Current field – description of local current (speed and direction);
l Ice – setting ice properties in a certain area of the exercise scene;
l Tides & currents, Tides & currents DB, TotalTide, External currents DB set the tide and
current allocation from hydrological databases to the exercise;
l Warm front, Cold front – setting zones of cold and warm fronts
Fishing Objects of this category can be used in training of fishing operations. The category contains
the following object types:
l Fishing Buoy Line;

l Fishing Buoy Single;
l Fishing Buoy Zone;
l Pinnacle;
l Shoal
Floating Objects of this category are used in exercises for developing skills of timely detection
objects of floating objects, for preventing collisions with them. This category contains:
l Buoys (9 types);
l Container 20/40 ft;
l Floating mine;
l Trunk
49
Table 3. Description of object's categories (continued)
Helicopter The category contains a simple helicopter models, which could be used as targets and deck
helicopters in exercise
Land object The category includes a set of 3D objects which can be added to a simulator scene as visual
or radar landmarks:
l Barrack;
l Cistern;
l Coast crane;
l 35 mm Gun;
l Hangar;
l Radar gun;
l Radar station;
l Rocket gun;
l Tidal stream signal station (7 types);
l Traffic control signal station;
l Watch tower object.
For the Tidal stream signal station and Traffic control signal station objects, it is possible to set
visual signals warning the ships about streams and traffic
50
Mooring Objects of this category can be used in training of mooring operations. The category contains
the following object types:
l Boat landing;
l Bollard;
l Bridge Position Sign;
l CALM – catenary anchor leg mooring;
l Fender zone;
l Floating dock;
l Floating fender (2 types);
l FPSO;
l Jack-up rig;
l Laser Docking System;
l LNG terminal;
l Oil Platform (three types);
l SALM – single anchor leg mooring;
l Semi-Submersible rig;
l Shallow water platform (three types);
l SPM – simple point mooring (2 types);
l Terminal Manager Truck;
l Wooden Pier (2 types)
Oil spill The category contains the objects which could be used in operations of the collection and
pumping of oil in the areas of oil spills on a water surface, for more information see NTPRO Oil
Spillage Functionality (v.5.35).
Reference The category contains the objects which can be used in exercises with DP system: Acoustic
transponder, Acoustic transponder array, ROV.
Also the category contains the Remote sensor object, which is used to monitor the movement
parameters of a remote object
51
Rescue Objects of this category can be used in the object search training. The category contains the
following objects:
l Buoyant smoke;
l Chemical cloud;
l Damaged fish boat;
l Damaged tanker;
l Dye marker;
l EPIRB – emergency position indicating radio beacon;
l Fire;
l Floating garbage – shipwreck debris;
l Ice explosion;
l Life buoy;
l Life raft;
l Man over board;
l Oil slick;
l SAR expanded square search;
l SAR parallel sweep search;
l SAR sector search;
l SAR track line search;
l SART – search and rescue transponder;
l Spline Boom.
All the objects can be seen visually, and part of objects are seen on the radar
Scene The category includes the following objects:
l AtoN station;
l Barge fleet – intended for the visual presentation of a group of barges (3 types);
l Camera – to set the position and orientation of the instructor visual observation camera;
l ERBL;
l Route – to assign own ships or target ships to a route;
l Wind turbine – for the visual presentation of a wind turbine (2 types)
Ship The category contains a ship models, which could be used as own ship on bridge
Ship target The category contains a ship models, which could be used as ship-targets in exercise
52
TEAS This category contains the following objects, which can be used for creation the rules for
trainee competence assessment:
l Alarm zone;
l Bearing line;
l Reference point (it may be stationary or moving with any ship from the exercise)
Transport The category includes a set of vehicles in the form of animated objects which can be used in
exercises for creating the environment. All the objects of this category can be seen both,
visually and on the radar
Tug The category contains a tug models, which could be used as own tug on bridge
Tug target The category contains a tug models, which could be used as tug-targets in exercise
User objects The category is intended for adding user information to the chart. This category includes the
following objects:
l User Line – to display lines on the chart;

l User Text – to display the text on the chart;
l User Ellipse – to display the ellipse on the chart;
l User Zone – to display the zone on the chart
VTS This category contains:
l VTMS station object – is used for setting the position of the VTMS radar and UAIS base
station in the exercise scene;
l VTMS remote site object
53
Adding New Object to Exercise

To add new object to the exercise, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Edit\New Object… menu item, or click button on the toolbar, or press
<Ctrl>+<Shift>+<Ins> key combination. The Object Name and Category window appears.
Note: You can also open the Object Name and Category window from the Objects panel (for more
information, see "Objects Panel" on page 59).
2. Make sure the Native objects option is selected.

3. In the left-hand part of the window, click the mouse to select the object category. The right-hand part of
the window will display a list of the selected category objects.
54
Note: The symbol * shows that the object model should be reinstalled (see description of the installation of
objects under Navi-Trainer Professional 5000 (v. 5. 35). Technical Description and Installation
Manual).
4. Select the required object from the list. The default object name will be displayed in the Name field. You
can type any other object name (if the name is entered incorrectly, it is highlighted in red and the further
object setting will be impossible).
5. To show more information about the object, select Show object information check box. To close
information window, click .
6. Click the Next button.

7. In General window, enter the initial object parameters. If the object parameters have been entered
correctly, Finish button of the dialogue window will be enabled. If it is necessary to return to the
previous page, click Back button.
8. Click Finish button. Object’s contour will appear on the chart.
9. Move the cursor to the required place on the chart and click the left mouse button. The object’s contour
and its name will be fixed on the chart.
10. Point the cursor on the object contour. In a second, the screen will display a prompt containing
the object type.
55
Selecting Object on Chart

To perform any operations with the object (move, rotate, rename, delete, set the properties, etc.), it should
be made active, i.e. selected on the chart.
To do this, point the cursor on the object contour and click the left mouse button. The object contour will be
shown in the orange color.
Opening Object’s Context Menu

A context menu drops down when user right-click on an object. The menu contains the list of operations
which can be carried out with this object.
To close the object’s context menu, point the cursor beyond the object contour and click the left mouse
button.
Moving Object
The selected object can be moved to another place on the chart. To do this:
1. Open the object's context menu and select Move item. The object contour will be moving on the chart
together with the cursor.
2. Move the cursor to a new place and click the left mouse button.
Rotating Object
To rotate the object, use the following procedure:
1. Open the object’s context menu and select Rotate item. The object contour will be turning together with
the cursor on the chart.
2. By rotating the cursor, set the object’s direction on the chart.
3. Press the left mouse button.
56
Renaming Object
To rename an object, use the following procedure:
1. Open the object context menu and select Rename item.
2. In the Rename object window type a new object name and press OK button.
Setting Ship Tactical Image

For own ship and ship-targets, it is possible to set a tactical presentation on the chart. To do this, use the
1. Open the object context menu and choose the Tactical image menu item. The Tactical image dialogue
box appears.
2. To load the image, click the Open file... button. In the Open window, select the required file (jpg, png
or bmp format) and click Open button.
Note: The quality of the tactical image will be lower than initial image.
3. To create the tactical image in the internal editor:

a. In the Tactical image dialogue box, click the Editor… button.The Image Editor window appears.
b. On the white field, use the buttons to draw the object’s tactical image.
c. Choose File\Save As… menu) to save the image.
57
d. Close the Image Editor window.

4. In the Tactical image dialogue box, select the image from the Tactical image drop-down list.
Note: If the <Plane view> option is selected, the chart will display the object’s default image.
5. Click Color button to select the colour of the image.

6. Click OK button.
Opening Object’s Properties Panel

The object’s properties panel contains the tabs for setting object properties.
58
To open the object’s properties panel, use the following procedure:

1. Select the object on the exercise chart.
2. Use one of the following ways:
o Open the object’s context menu and choose General properties menu item.
Note: The properties panel of route waypoints, segments, and line fastening points is opened by choosing
the Properties menu item of the object context menu.
o Choose Edit\Object properties… menu item.
o Press the toolbar button.

o Use the Objects panel (for more information, see "Objects Panel" on page 59).
Note: The view of the object properties panel at the exercise creation stage may be different from that after
the start of the simulator session (for more information about the ship properties, see "Setting Ship
Properties" on page 117).
Deleting Object
To delete the object, use the following procedure:
1. Select the object on the exercise chart.
2. Use one of the following ways:
o Open the object’s context menu and choose the Delete Object item.
o Press button on the toolbar.

o Choose Edit\Delete Object menu item.
o Press <Ctrl>+<Shift>+<Del> key combination.
o Use the Objects panel (for more information, see "Objects Panel" on page 59).
3. To confirm the object deletion, press the OK button.
Objects Panel
The Objects panel contains a list of all objects of the exercise.
To use the panel, perform the following operations:
1. Choose View\Panels\Objects…menu item, or press the toolbar button. The Objects panel appears on
the screen. The panel displays the categories, names and types of objects added to the chart.
59
2. Select the category of the object in the left part of the window. A list of objects of this category is
displayed in the right part of the window.
3. It is possible to sort the objects by by the name and the type. To do this, click on the respective
headers of the table.
4. To quickly find an object or an object category on the Objects panel, enter the full or the partial name of
the object or the category in the search line . To clear the search line, press .
5. To call the context menu of the object, double-right-click the name of the object.
60
6. To add new object to the exercise, press button. The Object Name and Category window appears
on the screen (for more information, see "Adding New Object to Exercise" on page 54).
7. To delete an object: select the name of the object in the table, press button and click OK.
8. To open the object properties panel: select the name of the object in the table and press the button.
9. To display the object at the center of the chart, double-left click on the object name in the table.
Readonly Mode
Readonly mode is used to prevent accidental editing of such objects as zones, routes, lines, points on the
chart.
To switch on/off the Readonly mode, select/deselect Edit\Readonly Mode menu item or press the
toolbar button.
After the mode is switched on, the limits, dimensions and position of chart objects cannot be changed.
Note: This mode can be switched on/off anytime, independently of the exercise status.
61
SELECTION OF MEASUREMENT UNITS

To select the measurement units in the exercise, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Edit\Units Settings… menu item. The window with list of all measurement units in the exercise
will be displayed.
2. To show in the window only selectable measurement units, select Show only selectable check box.
3. To change the measurement unit, click on it value in the Unit column and select the required value from
the drop-down list.Click the Apply button.
4. To close the window, click .
62
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • General Exercise Settings
GENERAL EXERCISE SETTINGS

The Settings panel is used for adjusting the general exercise settings, such as:
l Plotting – displaying ship track as a series of dots on the chart (see "Displaying Ship Track as Series of
Dots" on page 64);
l Contours – displaying ship track as a series of ship contours on the chart (see "Displaying Ship Track as
Series of Ship Contours" on page 65);
l Vectors – displaying speed vectors on the chart (see "Displaying Speed Vectors" on page 66);
l Routes – routes settings (see "General Route Settings" on page 134);
l Auto sounds – enabling/disabling automatic sound signals (see "Enabling/Disabling Automatic Sound
Signals" on page 68);
l CPA/TCPA – CPA/TCPA settings (see "General CPA/TCPA Settings" on page 217);

l UNREP Criteria – underwater replenishment criteria (see "Setting Underway Replenishment Criteria" on
page 382);
l Current Field – current field settings (see "Current Field General Settings" on page 103);
l Autotugs – auto tugs settings (see "Automatic Tugs General Settings" on page 315);
l Misc – miscellaneous settings (see "Miscellaneous Settings" on page 69).
63
Displaying Ship Track as Series of Dots

The ship track can be shown as a series of dots (ship centre positions).
To show the ship track as a series of dots, use the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Settings… menu item or press , or press <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<S> key combination.

2. Open Plotting tab on the Settings panel.
3. Set the following parameters:

o Duration – the history length (maximum 120 min);
o Period – the plot interval (maximum 240 s);
o Time stamp – the time tag interval (0, 1.5, 10 min).
4. Press OK button.
64
Displaying Ship Track as Series of Ship Contours

The ship track can be shown as a series of the ship contours, like:
l tracks – the contours show the ship track:
l trends – the contours show the estimated ship track:
The display of contours can be adjusted both for all ships (global settings) and a single ship (local settings).
To adjust the global settings of the contours display, use the following procedure:

2. Open Contours tab on the Settings panel.
3. In the Track group box:

a. Set the contour display interval from the Period drop-down list, sec.
b. Set the track length in the Duration field, min.
c. To display contours, check the Visible check box, or press the toolbar button.
d. To disable local settings, press the Disable local settings button (if it is required).
65
4. In the Trend group box:

a. Set the contour display interval from the Period drop-down list, sec.
b. Set the track length in the Duration field, min.
c. To display contours, check the Visible check box, or press the toolbar button.
d. To disable local settings, press the Disable local settings button (if it is required).
5. Select the minimum contour display scale from the Smallest scale for contours drop-down list. If the
scale is less, than set value, the ship contours assume the form of a dot.
6. Select color of the contours from the Track/trend color drop-down list (Grey – as default).
Note: For more information about local settings of the contours display, see "Contours Settings" on page 130.
Displaying Speed Vectors

To set ship’s speed vector parameters, use the following procedure:

2. Open the Vectors tab on the Settings panel.

o Duration – vector length;
o Marks – the time marks interval.

To switch on the display of absolute speed vectors, select View\Vectors\Absolute menu item, or press
<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<A> key combination, or press the toolbar button. The absolute speed vectors will be
displayed on the chart in blue.
66
To switch on the display of relative speed vectors, do the following:

1. On exercise chart, select the reference vessel.
2. Choose View\Vectors\Relative menu item, or press <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<R> key combination, or press the
toolbar button. The relative speed vectors will be displayed on the chart in green.
It is possible to display absolute and relative vectors simultaneously.
To switch off the display of speed vectors, clear the Absolute and Relative menu item, or press the and
toolbar button again.
67
Enabling/Disabling Automatic Sound Signals

During a simulator session a ship-target automatically produces sound signals in low visibility (fog)
independently of the daytime.
To disable/enable of the automatic sound signals, use the following procedure:

2. Open the Auto sounds tab on the Settings panel. Checkboxes mark the ships-targets which are
allowed to make automatic sound signals.
3. To disable/enable automatic sound signaling by a ship-target, clear/check the checkbox opposite its
name and press the OK button.
4. To disable automatic sound signals for all ships-targets, press the Disable All button and press the OK
button.
5. To enable automatic sound signaling for all ships-targets, press the Enable All button and press the OK
button.
68
Miscellaneous Settings
To set miscellaneous settings, use the following procedure:

2. Open the Misc tab on the Settings panel.
3. From the Text size drop-down list select the text size on the chart: small, medium, large, very large.
4. In the Largest scale for tactical image field, set the maximum scale for the tactical image. On chart
scales larger than the selected value, the ship contours assume a standard view.
5. In the Smallest scale for tactical image field set the minimum scale for the tactical image. On chart
scales smaller than the selected value, the ship contours assume the form of a dot.
6. In the Light switching on visibility field, set the visibility range value. If the visibility range is smaller
than the set value, signal lights are automatically turned on; if it is larger than the set value, signals are
given with the aid of shapes.
7. To confirm Navi-Trainer Instructor application closing, check the Confirm application close check box.
When you are closing the application, in the dialogue box which will appear, press the button Yes to
exit the program or No to return to the work with the application.
8. To set the display of visual direction on the bridge, check the Show visual direction check box. After
the simulation session start, an arrow on the chart will show the visual direction on the bridge.
69
Note: The visual direction is displayed if the ShowDirection visualization parameter is specified in the
Configuration Editor (see Navi-Trainer Professional 5000 (v. 5.35). Technical Description and
Installation Manual).
9. To set the display ship name on shipboards, check the Show ship names on shipboards check box.
10. To trigger the damaged or wrecked state for the vessels after serious impact, check the Simulate
damaged state after collision checkbox.
70
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Setting Environmental Sailing Conditions
SETTING ENVIRONMENTAL SAILING CONDITIONS

Environmental sailing conditions can be set for the entire exercise scene or within a certain zone on the
exercise chart.
Instructor can set the following environmental conditions:

l Environment settings: date and time, weather type, colour of water, season, etc. (see "Environment
Settings" on page 72).
l Environment conditions template (see "Creating Environment Conditions Template" on page 81).
l Overall environmental conditions: current, wind, wave, visibility, sky, tide, etc. (see "Overall
Environmental Conditions" on page 83).
l Local environmental conditions which are set in the composite condition zone, such as: current, depth,
fog, muddy strata, sky, tide, wind, etc. (see "Local Environmental Conditions" on page 91).
l Tides and currents from the common databases (see "Importing Tides and Currents" on page 99).
l Vector field of currents (see "Creating Vector Field of Current" on page 103).
l Clouds (see "Setting of Clouds" on page 106).
l Atmosphere fronts (see "Setting Atmosphere Fronts" on page 107).
l Wave spectrums (see "Editing Wave Spectrums" on page 109).
l Ice zones (see "Creation of Ice Zone" on page 324).
71
Environment Settings
The environment settings are set for the entire sailing area in the Environment settings window
(Edit\Environment settings... menu item) before starting the exercise and during the simulator session.
In the Environment settings window the following environmental conditions can be set:
l exercise date and time (see on page 73);
l weather type (see on page 74);
l colour of water (see on page 77);
l season (see on page 78);
l sun and moon position (see on page 78);
l wind and wave direction (see on page 80);
l precipitations (see on page 80);
l thunderstorm conditions (see on page 80);
l sea visual presentation (see on page 80);
l scene sounds (see on page 81);
72
l constellation display (see on page 81);

l additional visual effects: advanced wind shading and bow waves (see on page 81).
Note: To view information about setting overall conditions, see "Overall Environmental Conditions" on page
83. To view information about saving the environment conditions template, see "Creating Environment
Conditions Template" on page 81
Setting Exercise Date and Time

Exercise start date and time in combination with the area latitude and longitude determine angular
positions of heavenly bodies (sun, moon, stars) and, accordingly, exercise scene illumination. Besides,
the exercise start date and time affect the time dependent hydrometeorological data values (e.g., tides and
currents).
Instructor can select exercise date and time only before the exercise start.
Setting Exercise Date

To set exercise start date, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Edit\Environment Settings… menu item, or press the toolbar button.

2. In the Date field, set exercise date and press the Apply button.
Setting Exercise Time

To set exercise start time, use the following procedure:

2. In the Time field, set time of the exercise start (12.00.00 is a default time).
3. In the UTC Offset drop-down list, select UTC offset (the symbol * marks the UTC offset for current
sailing area).
4. Press the Apply button.
There are two types of time reading: absolute or relative. The absolute time is the time of the day; relative
time is the time from the exercise start. You can turn on the display of absolute or relative time. To do this:
1. Click the right mouse button on the time reading in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.
2. Left click to select absolute or relative time from the menu.
Depending on the selected time type, current exercise time is shown:

l in the chart window (absolute time only).
l in the status bar:

o absolute time with OTC offset.
73
o relative time.
l on the time display panel (View\Panels\Time Display…):

o absolute time with OTC offset:
o relative time:
Setting Weather Type

To select the weather type, use the following procedure:

2. In the Environment settings box, select the necessary type of weather conditions (see Table 4) from
the Weather type list box.
Note: In the centre of the Environment settings window there will be a sample of the selected weather
condition presentation on visualization screen. Value of the main parameters will be under the picture:
wind speed , wave height , visibility.
74
Table 4. Weather condition types

Weather type (wind force) Parameters View
Calm Cloud layer: Cirrus
(force 0) Wind speed (knt): 0
Wave height (m): 0
Sky clarity (%): 100
Visibility (nm): 10
Very Light Cloud layer: Cirrus
Wave height (m) : 0.1
Visibility (nm): 9.0
Light Breeze Cloud Layer: Altocumulus
Wave height (m): 0.4
Gentle Breeze Cloud Layer: Cirrocumulus
Visibility (nm): 10
Moderate Breeze Cloud Layer: Cumulus mediocris
Sky clarity (%): 70
75
Table 4. Weather condition types (continued)

Fresh Breeze Cloud Layer: Cirrostratus
Sky clarity (%): 70
Visibility (nm): 10
Strong Breeze Cloud Layer: Stratocumulus
Sky clarity (%): 70
Visibility (nm): 10
Near Gale Cloud Layer: Stratus with lighting
Sky clarity (%): 50
Visibility (nm): 10
Gale (force 8) Cloud Layer: Stratus
Wind speed (knt): 37
Sky clarity (%): 40
Strong Gale Cloud layer: –
Sky clarity (%): 10
76
Table 4. Weather condition types (continued)

Storm Cloud layer: –
Sky clarity (%): 0
Violent storm Cloud layer: –
Sky clarity (%): 0
Setting Color of Water

The simulator offers a capability to select the water color for the exercise scene. Color hues are
represented by the geographic area names.
To set the color of water, use the following procedure:

2. Select the necessary color of water from the Water color drop-down list and press the Apply button.
The color of the water will be changed only on visualization screen.
To create exercises in the specific areas, the Instructor can create the required color of water. To do this,
1. From the Water color list box, select Custom.
2. Press the button. The Color window will appear.
3. Select the required water colour from the Basic colors group box.
77
4. If the Basic colors group does not contain the required water colour, to select the required water hue
a. Press the Define Custom Colors>> button.
b. By moving the sliders along the colour field and the brightness scale in the right-hand part of
the Color window, select the colour and its saturation, or set the colour coordinates: Hue, Sat,
Lum, Red, Green, Blue.
c. Press the Add to Custom Colors button. The selected colour will appear in the Custom colors
group.
d. Press the ОK button.
Setting Season
To set a season, use the following procedure:

2. From the Season drop-down list select the season:
o Default – spring and summer time;
o Winter – winter time.

Setting Sun and Moon Position

The instructor can set positions of celestial bodies (the Sun and the Moon). The Sun and Moon settings
affect the exercise scene illumination and, accordingly, the turning on of the navigational lights at the dark
time of the day. In this case, the exercise date and time remain unchanged.
Note: The Sun and Moon positions are set relative to the training area centre.
To set the Sun position, use the following procedure:

2. Press the Sun & moon... button. The Sun & Moon settings window will appear.
3. Check the Set sun position check box.
4. Set an angle between the horizon and position of the Sun disk by moving the slider along the Elevation
scale (90° corresponds to the summer solstice point, 0° – to the sun position on the horizon).
78
5. Set the azimuth to the Sun position by moving the slider along the Azimuth scale.
6. Press the Close button in the Sun & Moon settings window.
7. Press the Apply button in the Environment settings window.
Note: For reference, in the Environment settings window near the Sun & moon... button specifies the
Sunrise and Sunset time as of the set exercise fulfilment date.
To set the Moon position, use the following procedure:

2. Press the Sun & moon... button. The Sun & Moon settings window will appear.
3. Check the Set moon position check box.
4. Set an angle between the horizon and position of the Moon by moving the slider along the Elevation
scale (0° corresponds to the moon position on the horizon).
5. Set the azimuth to the Moon position by moving the slider along the Azimuth scale.
6. Use the Angle size field to enter the moon disk aperture angle (0°–15°).
7. From the Phase drop-down list select the required moon phase.
8. Press the Close button in the Sun & Moon settings window.
9. Press the Apply button in the Environment settings window.
79
Setting Wind and Wave Direction

To set wind and wave direction, use the following procedure:

2. In the Wind field, set the wind direction.
3. In the Wave field, set the wave direction, or check Same direction check box to set the wave direction
identical to that of the wind.
Setting Precipitations
To set the precipitations, use the following procedure:

2. Check Rain or Snow check box.
3. Select precipitation intensity from the list (low, medium, high).
Setting Thunderstorm Conditions

To set the thunderstorm conditions, use the following procedure:

2. Check Enable check box.
3. Enter thunderstorm time interval (s).
4. Enter minimal and maximal distance from the ship to lightning displaying (nm).
Setting Sea Visual Presentation

To set the sea visual presentation, use the following procedure:

2. In the Sea group box check the parameters which should be displayed on the visualization monitor:
o Witecaps – appearance of whitecaps on sea surface;
o Foam – appearance of foam on sea surface;
o Visual seabed – detailed seabed;
o Drops on glass – drops on cabin glass.

3. Set the values of parameters:
o Reflection – reflection of the ship (clouds etc.) in the water surface;
o Water clarity – range of visibility under water;
o Underwater visibility – water translucency.
80
Scene Sound Switch On/Off

The scene sounds can be switched on/off for some areas. To do this, use the following procedure:

2. Check/clear the Scene sound checkbox.
Setting Constellation Display

To display constellation on the visualization screen, use the following procedure:

2. Check Show constellations check box.
3. Enter star scale (1–5).
Setting Additional Visual Effects

To set additional visual effects, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the Edit\Environment Settings… menu item, or press the toolbar button.
2. To set the advanced wind shading effect, select the Advanced wind shading check box.
Note: The wind shading enables considering of correct wind shadow, created by both exercise and scene
objects. The wind shading can be used only if the Seagull6000/Wind Shading support option is selected in
the process of installation of simulator areas and objects.
3. To set simulation of the bow waves, select Bow waves check box.
4. Click the Apply button.
Creating Environment Conditions Template

The Instructor can save and load in any exercise the environment conditions template made in advance.
To create an environment conditions template:
1. Choose the Edit\Environment Settings... menu item.
2. In the Environment settings window, set the required parameters and press the Apply button (for more
information see "Environment Settings" on page 72).
3. Press the Overall Conditions button and set overall conditions parameters in the Overall Condition
Manager window. Press the Apply and Close buttons (for more information see "Overall Environmental
Conditions" on page 83).
4. In the Environment settings window, press the Save… button.
81
5. In the File name window type the template file name and press the Save button. By default, the file with
the environment settings template will be saved to the \Nti\Templates folder with the *.envtmpl
extension.
6. In the Environment settings window, press the Close button.
Note: The environment conditions template does not save the exercise start date or time.
To load a template in an exercise, use the following procedure:

1. Choose the Edit\Environment Settings... menu item.
2. In the Environment settings window, press the Load... button.
3. In the Open window select the required template.
82
4. Press the Open button.

5. In the Environment settings window, press the Close button.
Note: If no changes should be subsequently made in the environment conditions template, check the Open
as read-only check box in the Open window.
Overall Environmental Conditions

Overall environmental conditions are set for the entire sailing area in the Overall Condition Manager
window.
To open the Overall Condition Manager window, use the following procedure:
2. In the Environment settings window, press the button.
The Overall Condition Manager window contains pages with overall condition parameters.
Note: Values of some weather conditions previously set in Environment settings window (see
"Environment Settings" on page 72), are passed automatically to the relevant pages of Overall Condition
Manager panel.
Setting Current Parameters

1. In the Overall Condition Manager window, open the Current tab.
2. In the Current column, enter the current velocity value in knots.
3. In the Direction column, enter current direction (deg).
4. To add the parameter changing in the specified time (within the 24 hours):
a. Check the Absolute time check box if it is necessary to set the absolute time.
b. Make a double left-click on the <Add new> line.
c. In the line which will appear, enter the parameter initial time (time is counted from the exercise start
moment) and set the parameter values.
d. Use a similar procedure to add any number of lines. To delete a line, press the <Delete> key.
83
Setting Wind Parameters

Before starting the exercise do the following:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager dialog box open the Wind tab.
2. In the Wind column enter the wind speed.
3. In the Direction column enter the wind direction.
4. In the Squall column open the list and select Yes if you need to set the squall effect.
Note: The squally wind model is determined by the maximum wind speed and its effect duration. The
maximum speed of the squally wind may be approximately twice the average wind speed. Changes in the
squally wind speed and its direction are synchronized and randomized.
a. Check the Absolute time check box if it is required to set the absolute time.
After starting the exercise do the following:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager box open the Wind tab. The Predefined and Manual buttons will be
activated.
84
2. If you need to change the wind speed and direction shortly, use the manual control:
a. Press the Manual button: the wind speed and direction control will appear on the panel (all wind
settings, pre-set in the table, will be saved).
b. Set the wind speed, moving the scroll box on the logarithmic scale of arrow indicator. The set wind
speed will be displayed in the Wind speed field and used immediately.
c. Set the wind direction by clicking the compass scale and rotating the arrow indicator. The set wind
direction will be displayed in the Direction field and used immediately.
3. To edit wind parameters in the table, press the Predefined button (all the settings performed manually
are not saved).
4. To close the Overall Condition Manager window, press Close button.
Setting Wave Parameters

On the Wave page of the Overall Condition Manager window instructor can set:
l Wind wave parameters;
l Swell parameters.
Setting Wind Wave Parameters

To set the wind wave parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager window, open the Wave page.
2. In the Wind wave group box, in the Significant height column enter the wind wave significant height in
meters.
3. In the Direction column enter wind wave direction in degrees.
4. From drop-down list in the Spectrum column select the required wave spectrum.
85
Note: The user can create and edit wave spectrums on the Spectrum Editor panel (see "Editing Wave
Spectrums" on page 109).
5. To add the wind wave changing in the specified time (within the 24 hours):
d. Use the similar procedure to add any number of lines. To delete a line, press the <Delete> key.
Setting Swell Parameters

To set swell parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager window, open the Wave page.
2. In the Swell group box, in the Swell height enter the swell height in meters.
3. In the Swell period column enter swell period in seconds.
4. In the Swell direction column enter swell direction in degrees.
86
5. To add the swell changing in the specified time (within the 24 hours):
Setting Visibility Parameters

To set the visibility parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager window, open the Visibility tab.
2. In the Visibility column, enter the visibility range (nm).
3. In the Precipitation column, enter intensity of precipitation (%).
4. In the Rain/Snow column, from the drop-down list box, select the type of precipitation: Rain, Snow,
None.
87
5. In the Color column, from the dropdown list box, select the parameter to reduce the visibility: Fog or
Dust.
Setting Sky Parameters

To set the sky parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager window, open the Sky tab.
2. In the Clarity column, enter the sky clarity (%).
88
Setting Tide Parameters

To set the tide parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager window, open the Tide tab.
2. In the Tide column, enter the tide height (m).
Setting Clouds Parameters

To set the clouds parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager box, open the Clouds tab.
2. By using the sliders, set amount of clouds for required cloud type.
3. To select stratocumulus cloud layer, set Stratocumulus check box.

4. Press the Apply and Close buttons.
89
Setting Sonic Speed Parameters

To set the sonic speed parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager window, open the Sonic speed tab.
2. Enter the temperature (Temperature column) and/or salinity (Salinity column) for any selected depth
level. With the input of temperature and/or salinity, the corresponding sonic speed will be re-calculated
automatically.
3. Or select one of standard vertical sonic speed distribution (VSSD) from the Type list:
o Negative refraction;
o Positive refraction;
o Channel;
o Thermocline.
Note: The parameters set on the Sonic speed page have an effect on fish-finding and hydroacoustic
devices only.
Setting Northern Lights Parameters

To set the northern lights parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager window, open the Northern lights page.
2. Check the Show northern lights check box, to display the northern lights on the visualization screen.
3. In the Direction field, set the northern lights direction (0–359.9 degrees).
4. In the Height field, set an angle between the horizon and the bottom limit of the northern light display on
the visualization screen (0–60 degrees).
90
Setting Seabed Parameters

Setting of seabed parameters is described in Chapter 5, see "Selecting Seabed Type" on page 299.
Setting Atmosphere Parameters

To set the atmosphere parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Overall Condition Manager box, open the Atmosphere tab.
2. In the Temperature column, enter the atmospheric temperature.
3. In the Pressure column, enter the atmospheric pressure.
4. In the Humidity column, enter relative humidity.
Local Environmental Conditions

Setting of environmental conditions within a certain zone is made by using Composite condition zone
object belonging to Environment category.
Note: Local conditions (determined within zone) are always superseding overall conditions and parameters
of "Tides and Currents" database.
Building Composite Zone with Environment Parameters

To select the environment parameters of a composite condition zone and build a zone on the chart, use the
1. Choose the Edit\New Object… menu item, or press the toolbar button.
2. In the Environment category, select Composite condition zone object and press the Next button.
3. Check the checkboxes opposite the parameters which should be included in the composite zone and
press the Finish button.
91
4. Position the cursor on the point, where the beginning zone node will be set, and click the left mouse
button. The point will be fixed.
5. Position the cursor on the second point and click the left mouse button again. The second node of the
zone and the line segment connecting the two nodes will be fixed on the chart.
6. Repeat the procedure the required number of times and fix the last node by pressing the right mouse
button. The last point will be connected with the first point, and a polygon delimiting the area will appear
on the chart.
7. Position the cursor on the zone bound. In a second, the screen will display a prompt containing
the zone information.
To move a zone node, use the following procedure:

1. Position the cursor on the required zone node, press the left mouse button and move the cursor in the
selected direction on the chart. The zone node will be moving together with the cursor.
2. Press the left mouse button. The zone node will be fixed in a new position.
92
To add a node, use the following procedure:

1. Position the cursor on the boundary of the zone where a new node is required to be added, and press
the left mouse button. The new zone node will appear at the end of the cursor, dividing the segment into
two parts.
2. Holding the left mouse button pressed, move the cursor with a new point to the required place on the
chart. The node and the zone boundary will be moving together with the cursor.
3. Release the left mouse button. The new zone node will be fixed on the chart.
To delete a zone node, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Edit\Delete Point menu item, or press button on the toolbar, or press the <Ctrl>+<Del> key
combination.
2. Position the cursor on the zone node which is required to be deleted,
and press the left mouse button.
Note: Applicable to the local area are all the operations performed on the exercise objects: move, rotate,
rename, delete.
Setting Properties of Composite Zone

To open the properties panel of a composite condition zone:
1. Position the cursor over the zone bound and right-click.
2. Choose the General properties item. The Composite condition zone window appears on the screen.
To include/exclude the environment parameter to/from the composite condition zone:
1. Open the Composite zone tab of the Composite condition zone window.
2. Check the parameters which you want to include in the composite zone.
3. Clear the checkboxes of parameters which you want to exclude from the composite zone.
93
To change presentation of the zone bound:

1. Open the Bound tab of the Composite condition zone window..
2. From the Color drop-down list, select the bound line colour. The color of the zone bound is visible if the
zone is not selected on the chart (inactive).
3. From the Line drop-down list, select the bound line type.
4. From the Thickness drop-down list, select the bound line thickness.
5. Clear the Hide on scale decrease check box if the display of the zone is not required to be hidden.
To set the parameter values:
1. In the Composite condition zone window open a tab with the name of required zone parameter.
2. Enter parameter values.

Instructor can set the following environmental condition parameters within a zone:
l Atmosphere – atmospheric temperature, pressure, relative timidity (the parameter is set in the same
way as for overall environmental conditions, see "Setting Atmosphere Parameters" on page 91);
l Current – velocity and direction of current (see "Setting Parameters of Current in Composite Zone" on
page 95);
l Fog – fog height and visibility range (see "Setting Fog Parameters in Composite Zone" on page 96);
l Seabed – seabed type (see "Selecting Seabed Type" on page 299);
l Muddy Strata – thickness and density of muddy strata (see "Setting Muddy Strata Parameters in
Composite Zone" on page 96);
94
l Depth (see "Setting Depth Parameters in Composite Zone" on page 97);

l Sky – sky clarity (the parameter is set in the same way as for overall environmental conditions, see
"Setting Sky Parameters" on page 88);
l Sonic speed – speed of sound distribution in the water (the parameter is set in the same way as for
overall environmental conditions, see "Setting Sonic Speed Parameters" on page 90);
l Tide – tidal height (the parameter is set in the same way as for overall environmental conditions, see
"Setting Tide Parameters" on page 89);
l Visibility – visibility range, precipitation intensity, rain/snow, fog/mist (the parameter is set in the same
way as for overall environmental conditions, see "Setting Visibility Parameters" on page 87);
l Wave – wind wave, swell (the parameter is set in the same way as for overall environmental
conditions, see "Setting Wave Parameters" on page 85);
l Wind – wind speed, direction, and squall (the parameter is set in the same way as for overall
environmental conditions, see "Setting Wind Parameters" on page 84).
Setting Parameters of Current in Composite Zone

There is a capability to create multi-level currents. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. In the Composite condition zone window, open the Current tab.
2. In the left-hand part of the Current tab press the Add button to add a current level.
3. Double left click to select a value which will appear in the Depth column. Enter the necessary depth
value.
4. In the right-hand part of the page enter the current velocity and direction for the given current level.
5. To add the changing the velocity and direction of current in the specified time (within the 24 hours):
95
b. Make a double left-click on the <Add new> line in the right part of window.
c. In the line which will appear, enter the initial time (time is counted from the exercise start moment)
and set the parameters values.
To delete a current level, select the necessary depth in the Depth column, press the Del button and press
the Apply button.
Setting Muddy Strata Parameters in Composite Zone

To set the of the muddy strata parameters, use the following procedure:
1. In the Composite condition zone window, open the Muddy Strata tab.
2. To add a muddy stratum, press the Add button.
3. Enter the thickness (m) and density (kg/cum) of the muddy stratum above the bottom.
To delete a muddy stratum, click on the it line and press the Delete button.
Setting Fog Parameters in Composite Zone

To set the values of the Fog parameter, use the following procedure:
1. In the Composite condition zone window, open the Fog tab.
2. In the Height field, enter the height of fog propagation.
3. In the Visibility field, enter the range of visibility in fog.
4. If necessary, set the changing of fog parameters in time.
96
Setting Depth Parameters in Composite Zone

To set the values of the Depth parameter, use the following procedure:
1. In the Composite condition zone window, open the Depth tab.
2. In the Depth column, enter the depth value (m).
Setting Priority of Composite Condition Zones

As two or more composite condition zones are overlapping, it is possible to set a priority in the use of
parameters in the overlapping area. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Panels\Objects… menu item, or press the toolbar button.

2. On the Objects panel select Environment category at the left part of the panel.
3. Select Priority Manager object at the right part of the panel.
4. Press the button. The screen will display a window with Priority tab.
97
5. In the window list, select the required environmental condition by clicking the left mouse button on +
sign next to its name. The screen will display a list of weather zones within which this parameter is set.
6. Position the cursor on the zone which condition should have a higher priority, and press the left mouse
button. A dividing horizontal line will appear over the zone name.
7. Without releasing the left mouse button, drag the zone name on top of other zones on the list. The
name of the selected zone will be the first on the list.
8. Repeat the procedure for other parameters and press Apply button.
Note: As the ship gets into the overlapping area, conditions of the zone will be taken from the zone, which
is the first in the list.
98
Importing Tides and Currents

To import tides and currents to the exercise, Instructor can use the following databases:
l “Tides and Currents” world database;
l “Total Tide” database of tides and tidal currents;
l “Sabine” and “Cardinal” current databases;
l Databases of currents in xml-format.
Important: It is not recommended to simultaneously set tides and currents by using different tools:
databases of tides and currents, Overall condition manager, Composite condition zone, etc.
Tides and Currents World Database

Tide and surface current distribution can be specified in entire area with the use of “Tides and Currents”
world database.
Tide and currents are imported in accordance with: area coordinates, date and time of exercise. Tide and
current data is updated automatically in the course of exercise.
Actual values of tide and current in any geographic point of area are calculated by interpolation of three
closest points from database.
To import tides and currents to the exercise, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Edit\New object… menu item or press the button on the toolbar.

2. Select Tides & currents object from the Environment category.
3. Press Finish button. Tide and current data will be displayed on screen.
4. Position the cursor on the tide mark on the chart. In a second, the screen will display a prompt
containing the tide height.
5. Position the cursor on the current mark on the chart. In a second, the screen will display a prompt
containing the current speed and direction.
99
6. Position the cursor on the current or tide mark on the chart and call context menu. In context menu,
select type of data, which you want to be displayed on chart.
Total Tide Database

The Instructor can use the “Total Tide” automatically updated database of tides and tidal currents.
Note: The “TotalTide” database is available if the licensed “Admiralty TotalTide” application is installed at
the Instructor workstation, and the TotalTide Server task is run in the configurator (see Navi-Trainer 5000
Professional (v. 5.35). Technical Description and Installation Manual).
To import the database:

2. Select the TotalTide object from the Environment category
3. Press Finish button.
Sabine and Cardinal Databases

To import “Cardinal” current database, use the following procedure:
1. In the Edit menu, select the Import Current Database… item.
2. In the Open window do the following:
a. From the Files of type field drop-down list select Current Database Files (*.txt).
b. Specify the path to the database files: Navi-Trainer Professional 5000\ConditionDP, by default.
c. Press the Open button.
3. In the Current database name window enter the database name and press the OK button.
Note: “Sabine” database is imported to the certain areas by default.
To load database:

2. Select Tides & currents DB object from the Environment category.
3. In the General window select database type: Imported DB ("Sabine" database) or Cardinal DB "
(Cardinal" database).
100
4. Set the check box near the database name and press the Finish button. The imported data on currents
will be displayed on the exercise chart.
Databases of Currents in Xml Format

A database of currents in xml-format can be imported for certain areas. To do this, use the following
procedure:
1. In the Edit menu, select the Import Current Database item.
2. In the Open window do the following:
a. From the Files of type field drop-down list select Current XML-Database Files (*.xml).
b. Specify the path to the database files: Navi-Trainer Professional 5000\ConditionDP, by default.
c. Press the Open button.
3. In the Current database name window enter the database name and press the OK button.
101
To load database:

2. Select External currents DB object from the Environment category. Press the OK button. The General
window appears.
3. Select the necessary database in the list.

4. In the Time offset field, set the time offset. The time offset allows using the database at any time of the
exercise.
Note: For example, the lifetime of the currents database from 16:00 till 18:00, the start time of the exercise
is 12.00. After the exercise start the currents will be enabled only in four hours. To activate the currents just
after the exercise start, set the time offset from four to six hours.
5. In the Draw at depth field, set the depth (the level at which the currents data will be displayed).
6. In the Interpolation radius field, set the radius of action of one current point.
7. Check the Looped checkbox if it is necessary to re-use the current database in the exercise after the
database expiration.
8. Check the Show grid checkbox if it is necessary to draw a grid of currents vectors on the Instructor’s
chart.
9. Press the Finish button.
102
Creating Vector Field of Current

To create a vector field of current, use the Current field object.
There are two ways to set a vector field of current:

l Set the surface current direction and velocity in an isolated point in the space. Several Current field
objects will determine a field of current in a certain zone on the exercise chart. The actual value of the
current speed and direction in the ship position will be calculated from the closest points by the
interpolation method.
l Set the surface current direction and velocity in a circular area (Range). This method allows models of
currents in the river areas or in the narrow straits to be created effectively. In the places where the
objects’ circular areas intersect each other, data on current will be calculated by the interpolation.
Note: The vector field of current can be used in combination with the field of currents loaded from the Tides
and Currents database.
Current Field General Settings

To set the range of the Current Field objects, use the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Settings… menu and open the Current Field tab.
2. Check the Enable ranges check box.
3. Set the object default range in the Default range field.
4. To hide the range circles on the chart, remove the Draw range circles check box.

To disable ranges, remove the Enable ranges check box, and press the OK button.
103
Setting Current Field on Chart

To set the Current Field object on the chart, use the following procedure:

2. Select Current field object from the Environment category and press Finish button.
3. Position cursor on selected point on chart. Click the left mouse button. Current vector origin will be
fixed on the chart.
4. By moving the cursor, set the direction and speed of current. The end of the speed vector will be
moving together with the cursor, and the speed value will be shown near.
5. Click the left mouse button again. The end of the vector will be fixed on the chart.
6. Position the cursor on the object’s image. A second later a hint specifying the object properties will
appear.
Changing Current Field Properties

To change the Current field properties, open its context menu and select the Properties item:
1. On the General page set the object range.
2. On the Current tab set the values of the current speed and direction.
3. If it is required, set the changing of these parameters in time:
104
For fast search object on the chart:

1. Open the context menu of any Current field object and select the General Properties command.
2. Make a double mouse click to select the required object from the list. The object will be centred on a
chart, and the object properties panel will be displayed.
For current speed scaling-up:
1. Open the context menu of any Current field object and select the General Properties command.
2. Check Use speed scale factor check box.
3. Set the scaling-up coefficient.
105
Setting of Clouds
The Cloud object can be seen visually and is shown on the radar. To set the object, use the following
procedure:

2. Select Cloud object in Environment category and press Next button.
3. Select cloud type.

4. Enter course, speed of the cloud motion, and precipitation intensity.
6. Position the cursor in the required chart point and press the left mouse button.
106
Setting Atmosphere Fronts

To set up atmosphere fronts, use the following procedure:

2. In the Environment category, select Cold front or Warm front object.
3. Press the Next button. The General window appears.
4. In the upper part of the window, set the front parameters:

o Speed – speed of front;
o Pressure – atmosphere pressure in extreme points of the front line, mbar.
5. In the tables, set front zones parameters:
o Width – width of the front zone;
o Types of clouds in the front zone: Ci, Cs, Ns; St; Ac; Cb (set up by using checkboxes);
o Rain/Snow – precipitations in the front zone (rain, snow). Select from the drop-down list: None, Rain,
Snow;
o Intensity – intensity of precipitation in the front zone, %;
o Temp. – temperature in the front zone, ºС.
Note: The upper table is designed for setting up parameters in zones behind of the front line, the bottom
table – for setting up parameters in zones before the front line.
6. To create new front zone, press the Add button. In the added table row, set the parameters of a new
zone.
7. To delete a front zone, click on the table row with zone parameters and press the Delete button.
8. Press the Finish button. The cursor switches to the drawing mode to draw the front line on the chart.
107
9. Set the front line position on the chart:

a. Place the cursor in the location of the first extreme point of the front line and left-lick.
b. Move the cursor to the location of the second extreme point and left-click.
On the chart, a graphic display of the front zone appears:
l The cold front line is marked with blue and blackened triangles, directed to the front advance:
l The warm front line is marked with red and blackened semicircles, directed to the front advance:
To extend or shorten the front line:

1. Left-click on the extreme point of the front line.
2. Move the cursor to another point and left click.
To move the image of the front:
1. Position the cursor on the front line and right-click. The context menu of the front appears on the
screen.
2. Choose the Move menu item.

3. Move the cursor to the necessary point and left-click.
To edit properties of the front:
1. Choose the General properties menu item.
2. In the General window set the properties of the front (see the description above).
Note: Creating an atmospheric front and editing its properties is possible before starting the exercise on
the bridge. Only deleting an atmospheric front is possible after starting the exercise.
108
Editing Wave Spectrums

The Spectrum Editor panel is used for editing the parameters of wave spectrums.
To open the panel, select View\Panel\Spectrum Editor... menu item or press the toolbar button.
Selecting Wave Spectrum

To select the required wave spectrum:
1. On the Spectrum Editor panel from the Spectra type drop-down list select required spectrum type (four
standard wave spectrums are available for editing).
2. From the Wave force drop-down list select wave force (0–12). The table shows the values of
parameters for each harmonic of wave spectrum.
In addition, the instructor has the ability to create a new wave spectrum:
1. Press the New spectrum button on the Spectrum Editor panel.
2. In the Create new spectrum dialogue box enter the name of spectrum and press OK button.
Parameters of Wave Spectrum

On the Spectrum Editor panel in the table it is possible to edit the following parameters of a wave
spectrum:
l Height – wave height: the difference between the elevations of a crest and a neighbouring trough, in
meters.
l Length – wavelength: distance between consecutive corresponding points of the same phase, such as
crests or troughs, in meters.
l Phase – phase offset, in meters.
l Direction – wave direction: from north, clockwise, in degrees; 0 – corresponds to head sea, ±90 –
corresponds to beam sea, 180 – corresponds to following sea.
l V (Sharp) – parameter in range of [0…1] that modifies wave shape from sine wave (V=1) to triangle
wave (V=0).
l W (Duty cycle) – parameter in range of [1…5] that indicates the slope of the wave crest, the higher the
value, the sharper the crest of a wave.
l K (Shift) – parameter in range of [0.5…1] that indicates wave crest shift due to the wind and/or shallow
water, larger means that wave crest will be shifted more to the forward direction.
109
l Rhomb modulation – parameter in range of [0…1000] that indicates the wave packet factor. “1000”
means that there is no packet factor and “0” means that every N-th wave will have largest amplitude.
l Rhomb direction– direction from which wave packets are coming. In general, it should coincide with
wave direction or be very close to it..
l Rhomb relative length – parameter indicates, how many wave crests make a wave packet. In general,
this should be between 5 and 15.
l Displacement – parameter in range of [0…1], does not affect wave shape. It indicates that visualization
should draw wave crests sharper and move texture in wave trough faster. In general, it should be close
to 0.1.
Setting Spectrum Values

To change the value of the parameter on the Spectrum Editor panel, double left-click on the table cell and
enter the new value.
To add a new harmonic of wave spectrum, double left-click on the <Add harmonic> row of the table. The
new harmonic will contain default parameter's values. Enter new parameter's values, if it is required.
Note: If the values of the parameters are set incorrectly, they will be marked in red. When you hover cursor
over these values, the pop-up message appears.
To delete the harmonic from the table, right-click on the required row and select Delete menu item.
Saving and Loading of Wave Spectrum

The specified values of the wave spectrum can be saved in a file in xml-format. To do this:
1. On the Spectrum Editor panel press Save As button, if it is required to save the file under a new name.
Note: All standard spectra can be saved only under a new name if edited .
2. In the Save As window select a folder, enter the file name and press the Save button.
In the future, to save the changes, you can use the Save button.
To load wave spectrum:

1. Press the Load button on the Spectrum Editor panel.
2. In the Open window select the required file and press the Open button.
Scaling Wave Spectrum

In the Scale Tools group box of the Spectrum Editor panel it is possible to set the scaling for all harmonics
of the wave spectrum at the same time.
For scaling the following tools are used:

l Zero level – shift zero level, in metres;
l Rescale – multiplier of wave height;
l Stretch – multiplier of wavelength;
l Wide – multiplier of range of a wave direction;
l Rotate – rotation the spectrum by specified angle;
l Freq – frequency range.
110
To scale the wave spectrum, enter the required value and press the corresponding button, for example:
Wave Heights Map

On the right part of the Spectrum Editor panel is the map of wave heights showing the animated example of
how the selected spectrum looks like:
Below the wave heights map are the following controls:

l X0, Y0 – the coordinates of the bottom-left corner of the map, in meters.
l Size – the size of a map, in meters.
l Buttons to control the animation of wave heights map:
o – start animation;
o – pausing animation;
o – stop animation.
l Time – time of the animation, in seconds.
To the right of the map displays the graphic scale of the heights of the wave.
111
SHIP SETUP
Own Ship Setup
To add own ship or tug object to the exercise, use the following procedure:

2. Select Ship or Tug category from the category list. The window will display a list of objects of this
category.
3. Select the ship model from the list.

4. In the Name field type the ship name (by default, the object is given the “OS”/“Tug” name and the
number).
5. Press the Next button.
6. Set initial speed in the Speed field (it is advisable to select its values from the drop-down list
corresponding to the discrete telegraph positions).
112
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Ship Setup
7. Set initial course in the Course field.

8. For some models of ships, set draft/trim in the Draft/Trim field.
9. For some models of ships fitted out with controllable pitch propellers (CPP), turn on the “Combinator”
mode by checking the Combinator checkbox.
Note: When “Combinator” mode is turned on, the Instructor can use another telegraph table for setting the
initial speeds. In this case, an appropriate indicator (Combinator) lights up on the trainee bridge, and RPM
and PITCH values change.

and its name will be fixed on the chart:
Note: Changes in the initial ship parameters are made on General page of the object properties panel (see
"General Ship Properties" on page 119).
113
Ship-Target Setup
To add ship-target or tug-target object to the exercise, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Edit\New object… menu item, or press the button on the toolbar.
2. Select Ship target or Tug target category from the category list:
3. Select the ship model from the list of objects.

4. In the Name field type the ship-target name (by default, the object is given the number and name “TG” –
for target ship and “TT” – for target tug).
6. Set initial speed in the Speed field (it is advisable to select its values from the drop-down list
corresponding to the discrete telegraph positions).
114
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Ship Setup
7. Set initial course in the Course field.

8. Select time when the ship-target should be created on the chart:
o Start delay – time interval after that the ship-target should be created;
o Creation time – creation time of the ship-target (12.00.00 by default).
9. If it is required to create simplified ship motion model:
a. For some models check Pitch and roll check box, to simulate the pitch and roll.
b. Press the Finish button.
10. If it is required to create advanced ship motion model (in this case the target ship’s modeling level will
correspond to the level of the own ship motion model):
a. Check the 6 Dof model check box.
b. For some models set Draft/Trim, if it is required;
c. For models with CPP turn on/off the “Combinator” mode , if it is required;
e. Press the Finish button.
and its name will be fixed on the chart:
Note: Changes in the initial ship parameters are made on General page of the object properties panel (see
"General Ship Properties" on page 119).
115
DATA ON SHIPS
You can obtain information on any ship in the Ships Data window. To do this:
1. Choose the Help\Ships... menu item. The screen will display the Ships Data window with list of all the
ship models in the simulator.
2. To view the ship Pilot Card, click on the Pilot Card link.
3. To view a table of the ship manoeuvring characteristics, click on the Wheelhouse Poster link.
4. To view information about all changes made with this ship model, click on the Change log link.
Note: If it is necessary to inform the Transas about the incorrect model performance, specify in the e-mail
message the number of the current version of the ship model (number of version you can see between the
Wheelhouse Poster and Change log links).
5. To return to the previous page, press .

6. To turn to the following page, press .
7. To print out a page, press .
8. To close the window, press .
116
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Setting Ship Properties
SETTING SHIP PROPERTIES

The ship properties can be set on the ship’s properties panel.
To open the panel, select the ship on the exercise chart, right click and select General properties menu item.
The properties panel contains the tabs for setting the different properties of the own ship or target ship.
Each ship model can have various set of the specified parameters.
There is the most common set of the own ship properties:

l General – setting initial ship's speed and course before the exercise start (see "General Ship Properties"
on page 119);
l Control – control of the own and target (6 DoF) ships during the exercise (see "Control of Own Ships and
Target Ships (Advanced Models) " on page 189)
l Position – setting ship position (see "Setting Ship Position" on page 119);
l Auto – setting autopilot parameters (see "Own Ship Autopilot" on page 120);
l Gyro – setting gyro malfunctions (see "Gyro Malfunctions" on page 123);
l Log – setting log malfunctions (see "Log Malfunctions" on page 123);
l Echo – setting echo-sounder parameters and malfunctions (see "Echo-Sounder Parameters and
Malfunctions" on page 124);
l GPS – setting GPS parameters and malfunctions (see "GPS Parameters and Malfunctions" on page 124);
117
l Radar – setting radar parameters and malfunctions before the exercise start (see "Radar Parameters
and Malfunctions" on page 122) and during the exercise (see "Setting Radar Faults" on page 202);
l UAIS – setting UAIS parameters (see "UAIS Initial Settings" on page 125);
l Signal – setting navigational signals (see "Setting of Navigational Signals" on page 126);
l Options – setting options: before the exercise start (see "Setting Options" on page 128) and during the
exercise (see "Setting Options During Simulator Session" on page 210);
l Motion – displaying current ship data (see "Motion Data Display" on page 195);
l Lines – setting initial state of the winch before the exercise start and control the mooring winches
during the exercise (see "Control of Mooring Winches" on page 285);
l Engine – setting propulsion plant faults during the exercise (see "Setting Propulsion Plant Faults" on page
204);
l Steer – setting steering system faults during the exercise(see "Setting Steering System Faults" on page
206);
l Bridles – displaying bridle parameters (see "Setting Bridle" on page 304);
l Anchor – setting anchor properties (see "Setting Anchor Parameters" on page 297);
l Contours – setting display of the ship contours (tracks and trends), display of wind and current
diagrams, display of rotation centre and pivot point (see "Contours Settings" on page 130);
l Fenders – setting fenders parameters (see "Fenders Settings" on page 131);
l Ice Class – setting ship ice class (see "Setting Ship Ice Class" on page 329);
l Ice accretion – setting ice accretion parameters (see "Setting Ice Accretion" on page 331);
l UREP Criteria – setting underway replenishment criteria (see "Setting Underway Replenishment Criteria"
on page 382);
l Fire – control fire detection alarm system during the exercise (see "Fire Detection Alarm" on page 196);
l Distress signals – giving distress signals (see "Giving Distress Signals" on page 369);
l Davit – setting davit parameters (see "Use of Rescue Boat" on page 370);
l Visual Scripts – selecting ship visual script;
l View – ship view.
118
General Ship Properties

The main characteristics of the own ship (target ship) are displayed on the General page of the object
properties panel. To change values of the main parameters, use the following procedure:
1. Before the exercise start, open the own ship or ship-target properties panel and open the General page.
2. Select the recommended ship speed value from the list, or enter an own value.
3. Set the own ship (target ship) course by using the arrow buttons, or enter an own value.
4. For the own ship (target ship) with the variable pitch propeller, check Combinator check box if it is
required.
5. For the target ships:
a. Set the creation time or time interval whereupon the ship is required to be created;
b. Check the Pitch and roll option, if it is required (for Simplified models only);
c. Turn on the 6-DoF model mode, if it is required.
Setting Ship Position

The ship or ship-target position can be set in absolute geographic coordinates or relative the reference
point.
To enter object position in absolute geographic coordinates:

1. Open ship properties panel and select Position page.
2. Select the Absolute position option.
119
3. Enter object Latitude and Longitude.

To enter object position relative to reference point:
1. Open ship properties panel and select Position page.
2. Select the Relative position option.
3. In the Distance field, enter object distance from reference point.
4. In the Bearing field, enter object bearing on reference point.
5. To set relative object position by bearing from reference point, select the Back bearing option.
Note: Press Refresh button each time you change the position of reference point.
Autopilot Settings
Own Ship Autopilot
Autopilot of an own ship can be switched on before start of exercise. For the installation of initial values of
the autopilot, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship’s properties panel and select Auto page.
2. To switch on the Autopilot, press the Auto button. On default, the autopilot will be operating in the
Course Control mode (the top indicator is lighted).
120
3. To switch over the autopilot to the Track Control mode, press the Course/Track button. In the Track
Control mode, the bottom indicator is lighted.
Note: The autopilot will operate in Track Control mode only if the own ship assigned to a route.
4. To enter the autopilot failure, press the Defect button. On the Trainee Bridge, the autopilot failure alarm
will be generated.
5. Press the Apply and Close buttons. After the exercise has been started, the ship will be controlled by
the autopilot in the selected mode.
Note: The autopilot will operate only at speed more than 4 knots.
Autopilot of Ship-Target
The autopilot of ship-targets is operating in Track Control mode only. The mode is switched on
automatically after exercise has been started if the ship-target has route and its speed is greater than 0
knots.
Navigational Equipment Initial Settings

Each vessel model may have the individual configuration of positioning systems and navigational sensors.
However, a minimum compulsory set (see Table 5) is present on each model.
Table 5. Navigational equipment
Id Name Measured values
GP1 GPS (DGPS) receiver Latitude, Longitude, COG, SOG
LC Loran C receiver Latitude, Longitude
VD1 Doppler log STW, SOG, (bow, stern)
HE1 Gyro Heading
HC1 Magnetic compass Heading
WI1 Anemometer Relative wind speed and direction
SD1 Echo sounder DBT
VRU1 Vertical reference unit Roll, pitch
RA1 Radar
Besides the compulsory set, some vessel models may carry additional set of positioning systems and
sensors: two additional GPS receivers (GP2, GP3), two additional Gyros (HE2, HE3), two additional
anemometers (WI2, WI3), second echo sounder (SD2), second Radar antenna (RA2), two additional VRU
(VRU2, VRU3).
Parameters and malfunctions for each sensor individually may be set in the properties panel of own ship.
121
Radar Parameters and Malfunctions

To set radar parameters and malfunctions, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship’s properties panel and select Radar page.
2. Select the radar model from the Model drop-down list:

o Bridge Master;
o Bridge Master E;
o Bridge Master E Tactical;
o Furuno;
o Nucleus;
o BPS15.
3. Check Transmit check box, to switch radar on.
4. Set the parameters of radar:
o RPM – antenna revolution rate (revolution per minute);
o PRF – pulse repetition frequency (the pulse length value will change depending on chosen PRF
value);
o Power – transmitter power, kW;
o H – horizontal beam width, deg;
o V – vertical beam width, deg;
o T – tilt, deg;
o X-band/S-band – frequency band;
o Blind Sectors – direction and size of the blind sectors.
5. Set the malfunctions of radar, if it is required:
o No signal – receiver fault;
o ARPA failure ;
o Interference – signals from external radars;

o Noise – receiver extra noise.
122
Note: Setting of radar parameter and malfunctions during the session is described in the Chapter 3, To
view information about the settngs of radar parameter and malfunctions during the session see "Setting
Radar Faults" on page 202.
Gyro Malfunctions
To set gyro malfunctions, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship’s properties panel and select Gyro page.
2. Set malfunctions primary and secondary gyrocompass:

a. In the Error field set the systematic gyro reading error in degrees.
b. In the Failure field set the rate of growth of the relative azimuth measurement error (degrees/min)
and time interval (min). Upon the expiry of the set interval, the gyro failure occurs.
c. To turn off the automatic gyro correction, check the Auto Correction Off check box. The Auto
button on the trainee bridge will be disabled.
Log Malfunctions
To set log malfunctions, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship’s properties panel and select Log page.
2. Select the following log faults:

o Defect – log power off;
123
o Error – systematic log reading error, %.

GPS Parameters and Malfunctions

To set GPS parameters and malfunctions, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship’s properties panel and select GPS page.
2. Press Power to switch receiver on (by default, the receiver is switch on).
3. Select the following GPS faults:
o Defect – GPS power supply error;
o No position – position could not be found, No Fix appears at the GPS display;
o 2-D fix /3-D fix – to determine the positioning method;
o DGPS error – the receiver imitates operation in the non-differential mode only;
o Precision – to determine the potential measurement precision.
Echo-Sounder Parameters and Malfunctions

To set echo-sounder parameters and malfunctions, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship’s properties panel and select Echo page.
2. Press the Power button to turn on the echo sounder power supply (by default, the echo-sounder is
turned on).
3. In the Actual sound speed field enter the actual sonic speed.
4. In the Unit sound speed enter the sonic speed which will be set in the sounder by default.
124
Note: On the Echo page of the Conning Display the trainee can set the sonic speed in the sounder. If the
actual sonic speed does not match the sonic speed in the sounder, depth values will have a systematic
error.
5. If it is required, check the Preset draft and trim check box. The Draft and Trim values will be
automatically set on the Echo page of the trainee Conning Display.
Note: If the Preset draft and trim check box is removed, the trainee set the Draft and Trim values
him/herself.
6. Set the echo-sounder fault in the Faults column; to do this, select the check box next to the sounder
name.
UAIS Initial Settings

The NTPRO 5000 simulator imitates a message exchange between Universal Automatic Identification
Systems of own and target ships, and VTS stations. The information, required for Position Report, Static
and Voyage Ship data, should be specified preliminarily by Instructor.
UAIS initial parameters can be set from UAIS page of properties panel. To do this, use the following
procedure.
1. Open the ship’s properties panel and select UAIS tab.
2. Select the type of AIS-station in the drop-down list: UAIS, IAIS (Inland AIS).
Note: After starting the exercise the AIS type can be changed only for ships-targets. The transponder
should be switched off.
3. In the right column of the table, enter the necessary data or select the data from the drop-down list.
125

5. To switch on transponder (by default, the transponder is turned on), press the Power and Apply
buttons. After the exercise start, the transponder will be ready for sending and receiving text messages
(see "Message Reply" on page 208).
6. To set transponder malfunction, check the Fault check box and press the Apply button. The
transponder will not be replied on any incoming text messages.
7. To close the window, press the Close button.
Setting of Navigational Signals

Navigational signals (lights, shapes) can be specified for any own and target ship (tug). Specified lights
combination is switched on automatically at dark time or in low visibility.
All own or target ships are carrying the combination of navigational lights and shapes in accordance with
vessel navigational status. To select vessel navigational status, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship’s properties panel and select Signal tab.
2. Select the navigational situation from the list (the list of navigational situations may differ depending on
type of the vessel). The appropriate light will be turned on the mnemonic diagram on the right.
Note: If, during a simulator session, the Trainee switches on/off other navigational lights, the Custom type
is highlighted on the Signal tab of the ship properties panel, on the Instructor Workstation.
126
For river/sea ships:

2. Select the navigational situation from the list.
3. Switch on/off passing side indicating signals by clicking on four lights symbols (at right part of tab).
For barges, which can be used in combination tow:
3. Switch on/off single lights by clicking on lights symbols

(at right part of tab).
4. Press the Apply and Close buttons
For fishing vessels, Instructor can switch on/off the port or starboard search light. Searchlight imitates fish
attracting process by using the bright lights:
127
3. To switch on the search light, press the PS (port) or SB (starboard) button at right part of tab. To switch
off the search light, click the button again.
Setting Options
Setting options for the own ship or the target ship (6-DoF) is performed on the Options page of the object
properties panel.
Note: The sets of options before and after the simulation session start differ (see "Setting Options During
Simulator Session" on page 210).
Before the simulator session start, the Instructor can set the following options:
1. Open the ship properties panel and select the Options tab.
2. Set the mechanical interaction properties: Dangerous bump speed and Collision speed and values of
the hydrodynamic and aerodynamic effects. Press the Apply button or the Defaults button if you want
to keep the values set by default.
Note: For more information, see "Characteristics of Mechanical and Hydrodynamic Interaction" on page 280.
3. To display the name on shipboard on the visualization screen:
128
a. Remove the Use global settings check box (if you want to switch off the display of other ships’
names).
b. Check the Visible check box.
c. Press the Apply button.
4. For the tug, tug-target objects which have winch points:
a. Check the Colored check box, to display the colour lines on the visualization screen;
b. Check the Limited length check box, to fix the line length.
5. To monitor the data on ship stability, check the Use ship stability data check box and press the Apply
button.
Note: The option is licensed and set only for the own ships. In the Configurations Editor, add the Ship
Stability System Interface task. In the task properties, specify the path to the xml-file which contains the
following data: draft, trim, heel. For detailed description, see Navi-Trainer Professional 5000
(v. 5.35).Technical Description and Installation Manual.
6. To display a flock of birds over the ship, check the Birds over the vessel check box and press the
Apply button.
7. To hide the ecology panel on the Trainee’s bridge, check the Disable ecology panel checkbox and
press the Apply button. Indicators of eco parameters are not displayed on the ECO page of the Conning
Display.
8. To display the wave shading effect, check the Wave shading check box. In this case, the ship hull will
dump the wave and create the wave shadow behind itself.
129
Contours Settings
On the Contours page of the ship’s properties panel Instructor can do the following:
l set Track and Trend parameters for displaying the contours of the ship track and estimated ship track;
l show/hide diagrams (the curves of the wind and current effect on the ship hull);
l show/hide ship’s centre of rotation and its projection on the centreline plane (pivot point).
To set Track and Trend parameters, use the following procedure:
1. Open Contours page on the ship properties panel.

2. Clear Use global settings check box.
3. Set the Track and Trend parameters : Period (interval of the contour display), Duration (track length).
4. Check Visible check box.
To show the curves of the wind and current effect on the ship hull:
2. Check Show wind check box, to show relative wind velocity and course on the chart.
3. Check Show current check box, to show relative current velocity and course on the chart.
4. Press the Apply button. On the exercise chart, blue will be used for displaying the diagram of the wind
aerodynamic effect forces, green for the diagram of the current hydrodynamic effect forces on the ship
hull.
To show the ship’s centre of rotation and its projection on the centreline plane (pivot point):
2. Check the Show rotation centre and pivot point check box.
130
3. Press the Apply button. During the ship’s curvilinear motion, the following points will appear on the
chart:
o RC – centre of rotation;
o PP – pivot point.
Fenders Settings
To set the fenders properties, use the following procedure:
1. Open the Fenders page on the ship properties panel.
2. Select Use instructor setting check box.
3. Set the rigidity level of mooring fenders by using the slider. The Energy and Reaction fields will be
automatically updated as per current rigidity level.
131
ROUTE PLANNING
The route consists of the set of waypoints and segments, connecting two neighboring waypoints.
The routes can be plotted for the own ships (tugs), ship targets (tug targets), Shoal, Ice zone, Helicopter,
Aircraft, Creature, Reference and Transport objects. For some objects you can set route properties which
are determined by properties of route waypoints and segments.
Assigned to a route can be one or several objects.
The route is initially set graphically on the instructor chart. The route can be subsequently edited in the
tabular form.
Sailing is along the rhumb line.
Plotting Route on Chart

1. To begin a route creating, use one of the following ways:
o Select the object on the chart and call it context menu by right clicking. Choose the Begin route item.
The cursor will switch to the route plotting mode for the selected object. The object is automatically
assigned to the route.
o Select the Route object from Scene category (menu Edit\New object) and press the Finish button.
The cursor will switch to the route plotting mode.
2. Position the cursor on the chart and click the left mouse button. The first waypoint will appear on the
chart.
3. Position the cursor on the next place on the chart and click the left mouse button. Second waypoint will
appear on the chart. Segment line will connect first and second waypoints.
Note: In the plotting of long route segment, it is recommended to press <+> or <–> key simultaneously with
the mouse motion, thus changing the chart scale.
4. Repeat the previous operation for other waypoints. The chart will display an route line connecting the
waypoints.
Note: If the cursor reaches the chart screen boundary during the plotting, after short delay it will assume a
form of a large white arrow. Press the left mouse button as many times as necessary to shift the chart
fragment to the number of steps you wish.
5. In the terminal point of the route, click the right mouse button. The plotting of a route will be completed.
Numbers of all the waypoints (WP) will be displayed on the chart. As the cursor is positioned on any
route point or segment, the prompt window will display the name of the route.
132
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Route Planning
Assigning Object to Route

The object can be assigned to any route plotted on the chart. To do this:
1. Open the object context menu.
2. Choose the Assign to route item.

3. Click the left mouse button on the route.
Note: After the exercise start, the own ship will not proceed along the route unless the autopilot is switched
to the Track Control mode. For the target ships, the Track Control mode is turned on automatically.
To set or view properties of objects assigned to the route:

1. Open the route context menu and select the Objects’ properties item.
2. Select the necessary object from the submenu. The panel with properties of the selected object will be
displayed.
To cancel the assigning of the object to the route:
1. Open the object context menu.
2. Choose the Unassign from route item.
133
General Route Settings

To change the general route settings, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Settings... menu item and open the Routes tab. The page contains a list of routes with
objects assigned to them:
2. To show/hide the route on the chart, check/clear the necessary route in the list and click OK.
3. To show/hide all the routes on the chart, press the Show All/Hide All button and click OK, or press the
toolbar button.
Note: The route will be displayed in either case, if it is selected on the chart, or an object assigned to this
route is selected.
4. In the Turn radius field set the turn radius of the ship and press the OK button.
5. In the Port XTE, Stb XTE fields set cross track error (for own ships only) and press the OK button.
6. To allow setting the own ship’s speed on the route segments, select Allow setting route segment
speed for own ships option and press the OK button.
Note: If this option is selected, the autopilot will operate in Track Control mode even at ship speed less
than 4 knots.
If select the own ship assigned to the route, the chart will display the turn start and end points (WOP’s),
turn curve and cross track error lines (red for Port XTE and green for Stb XTE). If due to its manoeuvring
characteristics, the ship cannot proceed using the set turn radius, the turn curve is not drawn on the chart,
whereas in the table this point is marked.
134
Editing Route on Chart

To shift a route waypoint, use the following procedure:
1. Position the cursor on the required waypoint and press the left mouse button. The waypoint will be
moving together with the cursor.
2. Move the cursor to a new position on the chart and press the left mouse button again. The waypoint will
be fixed on a new position.
To add a new waypoint in the middle of the route, use the following procedure:
1. Position the cursor on any place of the route segment and press the left mouse button. A new waypoint
will appear at the cursor end, dividing the selected segment into two parts.
2. Move the cursor to the required position on the chart and release the left mouse button. The point will
be fixed on the chart.
To add a new waypoint to the end or beginning of the route, use the following procedure:
1. Position the cursor on the last (first) waypoint of the route and select it by clicking the left mouse
button. The selected waypoint will be shown in a bold.
2. In main menu, select Edit\Append point item or press button on the toolbar.
3. Position the cursor on the selected waypoint and press the left mouse button. A new waypoint will
appear at the cursor pointer.
4. Move the cursor with the new waypoint to the required position on the chart and release the left mouse
button. The waypoint will be fixed on the chart.
To delete a waypoint, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Edit\Delete point menu item or press button on the toolbar.

2. Position the cursor on the waypoint you want to delete, and press the left mouse button.
To delete an entire route, use the following procedure:
1. Open the context menu of the route, and select Delete object item. The screen will display the object
deleting confirmation window:
135
2. Press the OK button. The ship route will disappear from the chart.
Setting Route Properties

Route properties allow programming the behavior of an object as it proceeds along the route, and are
determined by the properties of waypoints and segments (segment is a line between two waypoints).
Waypoint properties determine behavior of an object as it approaches this waypoint. Waypoint properties

can be set for ship-target, tug-target, Aircraft, Helicopter, Acoustic transponder objects.
Route segment properties determine speed of the objects as it is proceeding from one waypoint to the
other. Route segment properties can be set for ship-target, tug-target, Helicopter, Acoustic transponder
objects and for own ships (if the Allow setting route speed for own ships option is selected in the general
route settings).
Setting Route Waypoint Properties

To set the route waypoint properties for Aircraft and Helicopter category objects, use the following
procedure:
1. Open the route waypoint context menu and choose the Properties item. The screen will display a
window with the route waypoint properties. The window heading will specify the waypoint number.
2. Select the tab with the name of the necessary object.

3. Remove the By default check box.
4. In the Altitude field set the flight altitude.
5. For the Helicopter category object, set the time of delay in a waypoint if it is required.
Note: If the parameter value exceeds the permitted one, the screen will display a prompt specifying the
maximum parameter values.

To set the route waypoint properties for Ship target, Tug target and Acoustic transponder category objects,
1. Open the route waypoint context menu and select the Properties item. The screen will display a window
with the route waypoint properties. The window heading will specify the waypoint number.
136
2. Select the tab with the name of the necessary target ship.
3. Set the waypoint parameters (for simplified ship targets models see Table 6, for advanced ship targets
models see Table 7).
Note: If the parameter value exceeds the permitted one, the screen will display a prompt specifying the
maximum parameter values.
4. For Acoustic transponder category object:

a. To set the depth of immersion, remove from initial value check box and type the required value in
the Depth field.
b. To set selected depth of immersion to all waypoints, press the lower Till the end button.
Table 6. Waypoint parameters of a target ship (Simplified model)
Point Position Point Description Parameter

Type
Start and Turning The target continues proceeding along Turn radius
intermediate the route
points
Stand The target stops in the waypoint Duration – stop time
for some time
End point Disappear The target is deleted from the exercise

after passing the route’s end point
Follow After passing the end point, the target

continues its motion
Restart After passing the end point, the target

jumps to the route start
Follow Shuttle-like motion of the target ship Duration – the target stop time
back on the route is set before the U-turn in the route end
point
137
Table 7. Waypoint parameters of a target ship (Advanced model)
Point type Description Parameter
Turning The target continues its motion making a turn to the Turn radius
next route segment
Anchorage The target is going into anchor Braking – stopping speed during the
approach
to the waypoint (Dead, Slow, Half, or
Full).
Duration – time of staying at anchor
Adrift The target is heaving-to Braking – stopping speed (Dead, Slow,

Half, or Full).
Duration – time of staying adrift
By default, all the waypoints are set in the Turning mode.
As a Turning type point is selected, the following buttons are activated:

l Till the end button – to assign the set turn radius value to all waypoint on the route from current point to
the end of the route;
l Set turn radius button – to restore the default turn radius value in the current waypoint.
Setting Route Segment Properties

As the object’s route is plotted, the same speed equal to the initial object speed is set for each route
segment.
It is possible to set desired object’s speed on any route segment. It may be used for such objects as: ship-
target, tug-target, Helicopter, Acoustic transponder.
Also, you can set the speed of own ship on the route segment, if Allow setting route speed for own ships
option is selected in the general route settings (see "General Route Settings" on page 134).
To change the speed on route segment for such objects as: target ship/tug, own ship/tug and Acoustic
transponder, – use the following procedure:
1. Open the segment context menu and select Properties item. The screen will display a dialogue box with
the route segment properties.
3. Select the object speed on the route segment from the drop-down list.
138
4. Press the Till the end button as required. The object will be proceeding at the selected route segment
speed from the segment to the end of the route.
5. Press the Set ship speed button as required. The object will be proceeding along the segment at the
current speed.
Note: The speed of own ships on route segments can be set only before the exercise start.
To change the speed on route segment for Helicopter object, use the following procedure:
1. Open the segment context menu and select Properties item. The screen will display a dialogue box with
the route segment properties. The segment number will be specified in the heading.
3. Clear the By default check box.

4. Select the object speed on the route segment from the drop-down list.
5. Press Apply and Close buttons. The object will be proceeding along the route segment at the selected
speed.
Route Tabular Form

The route tabular form is created automatically after the route has been plotted on the chart.
The Route planning panel (the View\Panels\Route planning... menu item) is intended
for editing the route parameter values in the tabular form.
139
The panel consists of:

l The Route drop-down list for selecting the route plotted on the chart;
l The Ship drop-down list which contains all the ships assigned to this route;
l Route parameter table.
The route parameter table contains the following information on each route segment:
l WP – waypoint number;
l Name – waypoint name (optional);
l Latitude and Longitude – waypoint coordinates;
l Speed – ship speed on the given route segment (used for target ships and own ships if Allow setting
route speed for own ships option is selected in the general route settings);
l Course – direction to the given point;
l Distance – distance between the previous and current waypoint

(current route segment);
l Port XTE and Stb XTE – cross track error value on the given route segment (used for own ships only);
l Turn radius – turn radius in the waypoint;
l Stay type – stay type (optional parameter used for target ships only);
l Stay time – stay time (optional parameter, set for target ships only in selecting the stay type:
Anchorage, Adrift, Stand, Follow back;
l ETA – estimated time of arrival in the given point (used for target ships only);
l Total time – summary estimated time of arrival in the given point
(used for target ships only);
l Total distance – summary distance of route segments to the given point;
l Altitude – altitude applies only to Aircraft and Helicopter category objects;

l Depth – depth applies only to Acoustic transponder category objects.
Fields available for editing: Name, Latitude, Longitude, Distance, Course, Port XTE, Stb XTE, Turn radius,
Stay type, Stay time, Speed, Altitude, Depth.
Fields filled in automatically: Total distance, ETA, and Total time.
In the case of automatic re-calculation of the route segment, the following conditions are fulfilled:
l with the change of coordinates, the distance and direction are re-calculated;
l with the change of distance, point coordinates are re-calculated;
l with the change of direction, point coordinates are re-calculated.
To set and edit parameters in the tabular form, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Route planning... menu item, or press the toolbar button.
2. From the Routedrop-down list select the necessary route.
3. From the Ship drop-down list, select the necessary ship (target ship) assigned to the route.
4. Make a double mouse click in the WP field, to select the waypoint number.
5. Click the mouse to select a field for editing.
6. Enter a new value.
140
7. Press <Enter> or click on any other table row.
Note: Red is used for marking off incorrect parameter values. For the ship not to deviate from the route, it
is advisable to set other parameter values.
Bold type is used for marking off parameter values different from the standard values set on the Routes
page (menu View\Settings…).
The current waypoint in whose direction the ship is proceeding, is marked with an asterisk.
Conditions for Following on Route

Route has the following limitations:
l Critical values of route parameters, indicated in red in the table on the Route planning panel, should be
replaced.
l The distance from the first waypoint to the ship should be not more than 0,33 n.m.
l The difference between the ships initial heading and the course on the first route segment should not be
more that 30 degrees.
l The ship autopilot is switched on, and the Track control mode is selected.
The ship speed should be 4 knots or more (except if the option Allow setting route speed for own ships
option is selected in the general route settings).
Route Export and Import

To export a route, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Route planning... menu item, or press the toolbar button.
2. From the Route and Ship drop-down lists, select the necessary route and the ship assigned to it.
3. Press the Export... button. The screen will display the Route planning panel.
4. In the Area name field, type the name of the area where the route will be saved.
5. In the Route name field, type the name of the route file.
6. In the Comments field type comments as required.
Note: All the files with routes are stored in the Routes directory and have the *rt3 extension.
141
To import a route, use the following procedure:

1. Choose the Edit\Import Route… menu item or press the <Ctrl>+<Shift>+<R> key combination.
2. Open the Routes folder and folder of area that contains the file with the route you want to open:
3. Click the file name. The bottom part of the window will contain comments:
o the ship assigned to the route;
o file creation and modification dates;
o information added by the Instructor.
4. Press the Open button.
Note: Route referencing is made by the geometric position of points on the chart.
142
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Setting Procedural Alarms
SETTING PROCEDURAL ALARMS

Procedural alarms are custom alarms that Instructor can specified for the own ship.
The procedural alarms can be created by two ways.

l By use of alarm.xml setup file which should be copied from the \Support\GeneralAlarm\alarms.xml
folder of the NTI 5000 distributive DVD to the simulator \Nti\Data folder. The instructor can edit the set
of signals contained in the file;
l By use of Procedural alarms panel in Navi-Trainer Instructor application.
Instructor can switch on/off procedural alarms in General Alarms tab of ship properties panel.
On the Conning Display, procedural alarm indicators are displayed on General Alarms page of Alarms
panel.
Creating Procedural Alarms

To create procedural alarms by use of Procedural alarms panel, perform the following operations:
1. Choose View\Panels\Procedural Alarms… menu item, or click toolbar button.
2. Double-click <Add> field. The <New fault> line appears.

3. Double-click <New fault> field, and type the name of procedural alarm.
143
4. Double-click UHI-variable value, and select UHI-variable in drop-down list.
5. Repeat the previous operations, to specify other procedural alarms.

6. To delete alarm from the list, click it, then click Delete button on the Procedural alarms panel.
7. In the Ship drop-down list, select the ship which procedural alarms are specified for.
144
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Setting Procedural Alarms
8. Click Apply button to save entry.
Template of Procedural Alarms

To define the specified set of procedural alarms as a template, perform the following operations:
1. Create procedural alarms on the Procedural alarms panel (see "Creating Procedural Alarms" on page
143).
2. Click Save as… on the Procedural alarms panel. The Save As window will appear.
145
3. Enter file name, and click Save button. The template file is saved under.*.procalarm extension.
To load the template:
1. From the Ship drop-down list of the Procedural alarms panel select the vessel for which the template is
defined.
2. Click Load… button on the Procedural alarms panel.
3. Select the appropriate template file in the Open window, and click Open button.
4. Click Apply button on Procedural alarms panel.
Switching On/Off Procedural Alarms

To switch on/off procedural alarm, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship properties panel and select the General alarms tab.
2. Check checkboxes to select the alarm signals and press the Apply and Close buttons.
On the Conning Display, a sound alarm is actuated, and the relevant indicators start flickering on the
General Alarms page (Alarms panel).
146
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Setting Synchronization with External GPS Source
SETTING SYNCHRONIZATION WITH EXTERNAL GPS SOURCE

To set up the initial position of a ship in accordance with an external source of GPS data, use the following
procedure:
1. Before starting the exercise, select View\Panels\GPS Synchronization menu item, or press the
toolbar button. The GPS Synchronization panel appears on the screen:
2. In the Ship drop-down list, select a ship (ship-target) for setting up the position.
3. In the COM field, enter the number of the COM-port, connected to the source of GPS data.
4. Press the Set button. The current data from the external GPS source are displayed in the GPS data
fields.
5. Press the Synchronize button. The position of the ship is set in accordance with the current data
received from the external GPS source.
147
MAGNETIC DEVIATION
Magnetic deviation is the magnetic compass error caused by magnetised iron within the structure of the
ship.
Setting Magnetic Deviation

Instructor can set the values of magnetic deviation for each model of the own ship. To do this, use the
1. Choose the View\Panels\Magnetic deviation menu or press the toolbar button.
2. From the Ship drop-down list, select the ship which deviation values you need to change.
3. Enter the changes in the deviation table.
4. Press the Apply button. The magnetic deviation table will be assigned for the selected ship.
To print diagram and table of the magnetic deviation, use the following procedure:
1. Open the Magnetic deviation panel (View\Panels\Magnetic deviation menu).
2. Press the Print… button.
3. In the Print dialog box choose the printer name and number of copies and press the OK button.
Magnetic Deviation Template

The Instructor can save the magnetic deviation table as a template. To do this, use the following
procedure:
1. Open the Magnetic deviation panel (View\Panels\Magnetic deviation menu).
2. Set the values of magnetic deviation in the table (see "Setting Magnetic Deviation" on page 148).
3. Press the Save as... button in the Magnetic deviation window. The Save as window will appear.
148
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Magnetic Deviation
4. In the Save as window set the template name and press the Save button.
By default, the magnetic deviation template is saved to the NTPRO_5000/Nti/Templates folder.
To load the magnetic deviation template, perform the following:

1. From the Ship drop-down list of the Magnetic deviation panel select the vessel for which the template is
defined.
2. Press the Load... button. The Open window will appear.
3. In the Open window select the required template and press the Open button.
4. Press the Apply button on the Magnetic deviation panel. The magnetic deviation table will be assigned
for the selected ship.
149
SHIP EQUIPMENT FAULT SCENARIOS

The Instructor can set ship equipment fault scenarios on the Fault scenarios panel (View\Panels\Fault
scenarios... menu).
Creating Fault Scenarios

To set the ship equipment faults, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Fault scenarios... menu item, or press the toolbar button. The Fault
scenarios panel will appear.
Note: The left-hand part of the panel is intended for the formation of the scenario tree. In the right-hand
part, select an object which can be added to the scenario. To select an object, make a double left click on
it, or use the button.
2. To add a scenario, press the button. In the Scenarios tree, a scenario branch number 0 will appear.
The right-hand part will display the Ships list of own ships (tugboats).
3. From the Ships list, select the ship. The left-hand part of the window will display a node with the name
of the selected ship.
150
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Ship Equipment Fault Scenarios
Note: To add other ships to the scenario, select the scenario branch and select a ship from the Ships list.
4. Select the node of the chosen ship. The Time list will appear in the right-hand part of the panel.
5. From the Time list select the absolute or relative time. The left-hand part of the panel will display a node
for setting the time. The right-hand part will display the Device list of ship devices.
6. Enter the fault occurrence start time in the left-hand part of the window. Press the <Enter> key (to edit
time, use the button).
151
7. In the right-hand part of the panel, select the necessary device from the Device list and press on to
open the list of its faults.
8. Select the device fault. A new node with the device name and a sub-node with the fault name will
appear in the scenario tree.
Note: To add other device faults, select the device node in the left-hand part of the panel and choose the
necessary fault in the right-hand part of the panel.
9. Press the button. From the list which will appear, select the fault parameter (in this example True –
the fault is enable).
10. You can use a similar procedure to set the device fault end time: add a new time node, select a device
and its fault from the Device list and set the False fault parameter (0 if numeric parameter is used).
152
11. Add other ships to the scenario as required and set the equipment faults for them (see steps 3–10).
12. To turn on the scenario, press the button. From the drop-down list, select the On state. To turn it off,
select Off.
13. Press the button to save the scenario.

Use a similar procedure to create new fault scenarios.
Editing Fault Scenarios

To edit scenarios, you can use a context menu which varies to suit the selected node or the scenario tree
branch (see Table 8).
To open the context menu, select the required node on the scenario tree and press the right mouse button:
Table 8. Description of the context menu
Menu item Purpose
Add scenario To add a new scenario branch regardless of the selected tree element
Expand To expand all the underlying tree levels
Collapse To collapse al the underlying tree levels
153
Table 8. Description of the context menu (continued)
Menu item Purpose
Expand all To expand all the scenario tree elements
Collapse all To collapse all the scenario tree elements
Sort scenarios by name To sort scenarios by name
Edit To edit scenario On/Off state, time readings, fault parameter
Rename To rename the scenario
Delete To delete a tree element (scenario branch, node, sub-node)
Delete scenario To delete a scenario branch
Copy scenario To create a copy of a ready scenarios and to add it to the tree structure
Absolute To select absolute time in the time node
Relative To select relative time in the time node
The toolbar buttons of the Fault scenarios panel are used:
l To save the latest changes in a scenario
l To cancel the latest step (Undo). As it is pressed, all the unsaved data will be deleted
l To add a scenario branch
l To delete a scenario branch
l To move data from the right-hand part of the panel to the left-hand part
l To delete a tree element (scenario branch, node, sub-mode)
154
List of Device Faults

Table 9. Description of the device faults
Device Fault Description Parameter
Auto Defect Autopilot failure True

False
Echo Sensor 1 (2) defect Sensor 1 (2) failure True

False
Sound speed Actual sonic speed. If the actual sonic 1400–1600

speed does not match the sonic speed
entered in the sounder, depth values
will have a systematic error
Engine (PS, l Blackout; True

SB) l CA compressor failed;
False
l CA leakage;
l Engine failure;
l FO pump failed;
l FW cooler fouling;
l FW pump failed;
l Pool atomizing;
l Propeller lost;
l Remote control system failed;
l Reverse failed;
l Scavenge spaces fire;
l Turn gear engaged;
l Worn piston rings
GPS Defect GPS power supply error True
DGPS error The receiver imitates operation False
in the non-differential mode only
Position Position fix (2-D fix, 3-D fix, No fix) 3-D position
2-D position
No position
Precision Measurement precision 0–1000
155
Table 9. Description of the device faults (continued)
Gyro Auto Correction Off Automatic calculation of the gyro True

speed correction will be turned off.
False
The Auto button on the trainee bridge
will be disabled
Error Systematic gyro reading error (deg) 0–180
Failure Gyro reading drift (deg/min) 0–10
Log Defect Log power off True
False
Error Systematic log reading error, % 0–100
Loran Power break Receiver power supply error True
Signal to noise ratio М Automatic adjustment of SNR for each False
(X, Y) auto transmitting station М (X, Y)
Signal to noise ratio М SNR for each transmitting station М 0–100

(X, Y) (X, Y)
Station Fault M (X, Y) Fault of transmitting stations: master True

(M) and two slaves (X, Y)
False
Wave type M (X, Y) Signal type for each transmitting Auto

station:
Ground
l auto;
Sky
l ground wave (Ground);
l wave reflected from the sky
(Sky)
Radar (1, 2, 3) ARPA failure ARPA failure True
Interference Signals from external radars False
Noise Receiver extra noise
No signal Receiver fault
156
Table 9. Description of the device faults (continued)
Rudder (PS, l Control failure; True

SB) l Rudder jamming;
False
l Power failure;
l Pump 1 (2) off;
l Pump standby off
Speed over reduction Reduction of rudder speed in % 0–50
Thruster Bow (Stern) thruster off True
False
UAIS Defect The transponder will not be replied on True

any incoming text messages
False
157
AID-TO-NAVIGATION OBJECTS (BUOYS)

Objects of this type are available in the database for the sailing area, but their position and status can be
changed in the course of creating an exercise.
1. Open the buoy’s context menu and select the necessary command:
o Move – to move the object to another position on the chart;
o Hide/Show – to hide or show a buoy on the chart;
o Turn the light on/off – to turn on/off the navigational light on the buoy.
2. To return the object to the initial state, select the Revert to initial item from the buoy’s context menu. All
the set object properties will be cancelled.
3. To view the object properties, select Properties line from the buoy’s context menu. The Scene buoy
window will display the set object properties:
4. To cancel some property, select it from the list and click Revert button.
Note: All the operations on the buoys are reflected on the radar and visualization screen, but are not
passed to Navi-Sailor electronic chart system.
158
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Land Objects
LAND OBJECTS
The simulator features a capability to set various types of 3D objects. The objects can be used as visual
landmarks and radar targets.
Setting Land Objects

To set the objects, use the following procedure:

2. Select the required object type from the list from the Land object category.
3. Press Next button. The screen will display General window for the input of the object’s spatial
orientation.
4. Enter the orientation angle and press Finish button. The window will close, whereas the cursor will be
switched to the mode of setting the object on the exercise chart.
5. Position the cursor in the required chart point and press the left mouse button.
The Land object category contains special objects such as: Tidal stream signal station (7 types) and
Traffic control signals station intended for displaying tidal current direction and ship traffic direction.
Tidal Stream Signal Station

To set Tidal stream signal station object on the exercise chart, perform the following procedure:

2. From the Land object category, select Tidal stream signal station object and press Next button. The
screen will display General window containing the initial object setting parameters.
3. In the Orientation field set the station’s orientation on the chart.

4. From the drop-down lists select flashing symbol which will be displayed on Tidal Stream Signal
Station: E (east), W (west), digit (from 0 to 13), Up Arrow, Down Arrow.
6. Position the cursor in the required place on the chart and click the left mouse button.
159
Note: The displayed symbols can be changed in the course of the exercise on object properties panel.
Traffic Control Signal Station

To set Traffic Control Signals Station object on the exercise chart, perform the following procedure:

2. From the Land object category select Traffic Control Signals Station object and press Next button. The
screen will display General window containing the initial object setting parameters:
3. In the Orientation field set the station’s orientation on the chart.

4. Select one of the following flashing symbols, which will be displayed on Traffic Control Signals: H, T,
HT.
5. To select a symbol, check the check box next to the required symbol by clicking the left mouse button.
6. Press Finish button. The cursor will switch to the mode of setting an object on the exercise chart.
7. Position the cursor in the required place on the chart and click the left mouse button.
Note: The displayed symbols can be changed in the course of the exercise on object properties panel.
160
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Floating Objects
FLOATING OBJECTS
Floating objects are designed for increasing the realistic display during the exercise.
There are following types of the floating objects:

l Buoys (Buoy Cardinal, Buoy Isolate Danger, Buoy Lateral, Buoy Preferred Channel To Port\Starboard,
Buoy Safe Water, Buoy Special, Small buoy 1, Small buoy 2);
l Above-water navigational dangers (Container 20 ft, Container 40 ft, Floating mine, Trunk).
Floating objects can be introduced in the exercise not only before its start, but also at any other moment.
Setting Floating Objects

To set a floating object, use the following procedure:

2. From the Floating object category, select the necessary object and press the Next button.The screen
will display the Drift dialogue box for setting the object’s parameters. The set of parameters can differ
in dependence with the object type.
3. Set the object’s course and speed over the ground in the Course and Speed fields, or check theDrift
checkbox, to drift the object.
4. For the objects Container 20 ft, Container 40 ft, Floating mine and Trunk, you can set the radar range in
the Radar range field.
161

6. Or if you create such objects as Buoy Cardinal/Lateral and Small buoy 1, 2: press the Next button,
select the visual state of the buoy, press the Finish button.
7. Place the cursor in the necessary point on the chart and left-click.
Note: If the ship collides with a floating object, a relevant entry appears on the Events panel.
Designation Floating Objects on Chart

Table 10. Floating objects's symbols
Floating object Simbol
Buoy Cardinal North_ Bl/Y
Buoy Cardinal East_ Bl/Y/Bl
Buoy Cardinal South_ Y/Bl
Buoy Cardinal West_Y/Bl/Y
Buoy Isolate Danger
Buoy Lateral Green
Buoy Lateral Red
Buoy Preferred Channel To Port
Buoy Preferred Channel To Starboard
162
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Floating Objects
Table 10. Floating objects's symbols (continued)
Floating object Simbol
Buoy Safe Water
Buoy Special
Small buoy 1
Small buoy 2
Container 20 ft
Container 40 ft
Floating mine
Trunk
163
AIS ATON
AIS AtoN – a device or system that is designed and operated to enhance the safe and efficient navigation
of vessels and/or vessel traffic.
There are three types of AIS AtoN:

l Real – an AIS station located on a real AtoN (Aids to Navigation);
l Synthetic – an AIS station distantly located from a real AtoN and transmitting messages (message 21)
about the location and status of AtoN;
l Virtual – an AIS station transmitting messages (message 21) about the location and status of a non-
existing (virtual) AtoN.
An AIS AtoN, independently of the selected type, can be placed in any point on the chart or connected to
the following objects of the exercise:
l Small buoy 1, 2 (category Floating objects);
l Oil platform, Oil platform 1, 2 (category Mooring).
After running a simulator session, all data about the AtoN are displayed on the monitor of the MKD imitator
of the Conning Display and are also displayed on the monitor of the radar. On deleting an AtoN Station
object from the exercise, the respective data disappear from the monitors of the MKD imitator and the
radar on 400 sec.
To set the object, use the following procedure:

2. From the Scene category, select the AtoN Station object.
3. In the Name field, type the name of the object (if necessary).
4. Press the Next button. The AtoN window appears on the screen:
5. In the AtoN AIS station group box, select the type of the object:
o Real;
o Synthetic;
o Virtual.
6. If the Real type is selected, set the dimensions of the AtoN Station in the Bow, Stern, Port and Stbd
fields of the Dimensions group box.
164
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • AIS AtoN
7. Press the Next button. The UAIS window appears.

o MMSI number;
o Flag (selected from the drop-down list);
o Electronic Position Fixing System (selected from the drop-down list);
o Navaids type (selected from the drop-down list);
o Report rate.
165
9. If necessary, press the Power button to switch on the device (by default, the devise is switched on).
10. If necessary to set the fault of the device, check the Fault checkbox.
12. Place the cursor in the necessary point on the chart and left-click.
To attach the AtoN Station object to another object:
1. Open the context menu of the AtoN object.
2. Select the Attach AtoN menu item.
3. Left-click on the necessary object to connect it to the AtoN station.
166
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Setup of Exchange Recording
SETUP OF EXCHANGE RECORDING

Record of trainee exchange during exercise is carried out by Audio Logger module, which must be added to
the configuration of the Instructor workplace or bridge. Audio Logger accepts data from sound card and
stores audio log-files on computer. Logging process can be controlled by Instructor from the Audio logger
panel.
To switch on the recording of exchange, use the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Panels\Audio Logger... menu item, or press the toolbar button.

2. On Audio logger panel, select Recording tab.
Note: The page contains the full list of audio channels. The column Status contains status audio channel.
The channel available for recording will have status Online.
3. Select channels which should be recorded.
Note: To carry out exchange playback, see "Playback of Audio Log Files" on page 266.
167
SETUP OF VIDEO LOG FILE RECORDING

Video log files in the process of an exercise are recorded by VideoLogger module included in the instructor
workplace or bridge configuration. The use of the VideoLogger software module is recommended for
logging instructor input at his/her instructor workstation and for recording the trainee performance on
Radar/ARPA, NavAids, Fishing station and ECDIS computers. Recording is controlled from the instructor
workplace on Video logger panel.
Note:It is not advisable to use VideoLogger software module on the computers where Navi-Trainer Model
and Visual Channel tasks are run.
Visual Channel and Conning Display tasks are played back during the debriefing from the main log file
data, so these require no video log files.
To turn on the recording of video files, perform the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Panels\Video logger… menu item, or press the toolbar button. The Video logger panel
contains a full list of Video Logger tasks as per the current simulator configuration.
2. In the left-hand part of Video logger panel, select, one by one, Video Logger tasks required for the future
recording, checking Enable recording check box in its right-hand part.
Note:The checking of Enable recording check box in the course of the exercise will not result in the
recording of video log files.
At the moments when video recording is started and stopped, screens of the pertinent computers will black
out for a second, which is an indirect indication of Video Logger task response.
Tocarry outplayback ofthe logfile recordedduring theexercise, see "Playback ofVideo Log Files" on page 267.
168
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Using Templates
USING TEMPLATES
To place an object or a group of objects with the set properties in any place on the chart or in another
gaming area, templates are used.
Template of Single Object

To create a template of single object , use the following procedure:
1. Open the object context menu and select the Save as template... item. The Save As Template window
will appear.
2. Type the name of template in the Template name field.

3. Press the OK button. The template will be created and saved by default to the \NTPRO_
5000\Nti\Templates folder.
Note: You can select another place for saving the template. To do this, you should press the Change…
button and select folder with template files.
To set the object template in the selected place, use the following procedure:

2. Check the Templates option box.
3. In the left-hand part of the window, select the object category. The right-hand part of the window will
display a list of objects templates:
169
4. Select the necessary template from the list.

6. In the General window, change the object’s initial parameters as required.
8. Move the cursor to the required place on the chart and press the left mouse button.
Template of Group of Objects

To create a template of group of objects, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the Edit\Create Template menu item. The template symbol will appear next to the cursor on
the screen.
2. Click the left mouse button on the objects which should be added to the template.
3. Click the right mouse button, to complete the adding of the objects to the template. The screen will
display the Create Template dialogue box where the all the selected ships will be specified
in the template object list:
4. Set the object group direction in Direction field or press the Set button, and set the direction on a chart
with cursor.
5. Type the template name.
6. If it necessary to continue editing the template (to delete or add an object), press the Continue edit
button.
7. Press OK button. The template will be created and saved, by default, to the NTPRO_
5000\Nti\Templates folder.
Note: To save the template to another place, press the Change… button and select the required folder.
To insert the template in the selected place on the chart, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the Edit\Insert Template... menu item. The screen will display the Select Template window with a
list of available templates.
170
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Using Templates
Note: To delete a template from the list, click it and press the Delete button.
2. Select a template from the list and press the ОK button.
Note: To select a template from another place press the Browse… button.
3. Set the template parameters:

o Speed – speed of the template’s objects;
o Orientation – object orientation relative to the template setting point.
4. Press the Finish button. The square shape of the template will be shown on the screen:
5. By moving the cursor, select the template setting point on the chart and click the left mouse button.
The template will be set in the selected point.
171
6. Open the template context menu by positioning the cursor on the template’s border.
7. Choose the Ungroup item. Template objects will be ungrouped. The template name will be added to the
name of each object.
172
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Creating Comments on Exercise
CREATING COMMENTS ON EXERCISE

At the exercise preparation stage, the Instructor can add own comments which will subsequently be
shown in the Open window when this exercise or log file is opened.
To create and edit comments on an exercise, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Edit/Comments... menu item or press the button on the toolbar. The screen will display
Exercise comments window.
2. Enter comments and press OK button.
Note: Comments can also be added or edited when the exercise is saved, in the Comments field of the
Save As dialogue box.
173
ADDING USER INFORMATION TO CHART

The instructor can add the necessary information to the exercise chart by using
the User objects category objects.
To add instructor information to the chart, use the following procedure:

2. Select the User objects category.
3. Select the necessary object from the list:
o User Ellipse – to show an ellipse on the chart;
o User Line – to show a line on the chart;
o User Text – to show text on the chart;
o User Zone – to show a zone on the chart.
4. Click the Next button. The screen will display a window for the input of the object properties.
5. Set the object properties:

o Text – the text will be displayed on the chart and/or in the pop-up prompt, which appears when the
cursor is positioned to the object border;
o Info – additional information on the object;
o Color – color of the text (line, ellipse, zone);

o Dangerous – object is dangerous.
6. Click the Finish button.
7. To set the User Text object, move the cursor to the required point on the chart and click the left mouse
button.
8. To set the User Line object:
a. Point the mouse cursor in the line’s start point and click the left mouse button.
b. Move the mouse cursor to the second point and click the left mouse button.
c. In setting the last point, click the right mouse button.
174
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Adding User Information to Chart
9. To set an User Ellipse object:

a. Place the cursor to the object’s position.
b. By moving the cursor, set the object dimensions and click the left mouse button.
10. To set a User Zone object:
a. Place the cursor to the zone’s first node position and click the left mouse button.
b. Move the cursor to the position of the zone’s second node and click the left mouse button.
c. In setting the last node, click the right mouse button.
After the user objects have been set on the chart, their parameters will be shown in the Information on Chart
window which can be opened by pressing the toolbar button (see "Information on Chart" on page 43).
To turn on/off the display of user text and line, select Chart\Overlays\User Info item and check/clear
User Text, User Line, User Ellipse and User Zone check boxes.
175
PRE-PLAYING OF EXERCISE
An exercise can be pre-played at the Instructor workplace. The pre-playing of an exercise is adequate to its
running on the bridge except that the control of the own ships should be exercised by the instructor.
To control the exercise pre-playing, use the menu File/Control, or control toolbar buttons or hot keys.
Table 11. Tools for control of exercise pre-playing
Purpose Menu Hot keys Button
To start the exercise pre-playing File\Control\Start <Ctrl>+<1>
To suspend (to continue) exercise pre-playing File\Control\Pause <Ctrl>+<2>
To stop the exercise pre-playing File\Control\Stop <Ctrl>+<3>
The exercise can be pre-played on the slow, real, or fast time scale. The time scale can be selected on the
toolbar (20:1, 10:1, 5:1, 2:1, 1:1, 1:2, 1:5, 1:10).
Note: It is not advisable to use high acceleration rate in pre-playing exercises containing a large number of
objects.
176
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Saving and Loading Exercise
SAVING AND LOADING EXERCISE

Saving Exercise
To save an exercise, use the following procedure:
1. Choose File\Save or File\Save As… menu item. The screen will display the Save As dialogue box.
2. Select the folder, where exercise will be saved. By default, the program offer to save the exercise in
the current area folder in the NTPRO_5000\Exercise folder.
3. In the File name field, type the exercise name.
4. In the Comments field, type or edit comments for the exercise, as it is required.
5. Press the Save button. The window will close down, and the exercise will be saved with the specified
name with the *nti extension.
177
Loading Exercise
To load an exercise, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the File/Open… menu item or press the <Сtrl>+<O> key combination, or press the toolbar
button.
2. Open Exercise folder and select the necessary area folder. The window will display the list of exercise
files with *nti extension. In the tabular form will be specified: file name, size, type, date when
modified. The bottom part of the window will show comments for the selected exercise if these were
added before by the Instructor.
Note: In the Open window, you can perform standard operations on the files (deleting, renaming, copying,
etc.). To do this, click the right mouse button on the exercise name and select the necessary item from the
context menu.
To sort files, click the right mouse button on an empty field in the table, and select the necessary item from
the context menu, or click the mouse on the table column heading.
3. To load an exercise, select the exercise file in the list and press the Open button. The Open dialogue
box will close down. The exercise window will appear, with a sign in its left top corner.
Note: If the exercise contains the objects which are missed in the objects base of the current simulator
version, the Select object dialog box will appear. Select an object to use instead of missing one and press
the OK button.
To load exercise files which have been recently run, you can use the File\Recent Files menu command.
178
Chapter 2. Creating and Editing Exercise • Saving and Loading Exercise
Loading of NT 3000 Exercises

NTPRO 5000 inherits exercises created by Exercise Editor of NTPRO 3000.
To load an exercise created in Navi-Trainer 3000 simulator, use the following procedure:
1. Choose File\Open… menu item. The screen will display Open dialogue window.
2. In the Look in tree of directories, select the folder where Navi-Trainer 3000 exercises are stored. Set
the file extension filter (*.edt). The screen will display a list of available exercises in Navi-Trainer
3000 format.
3. Double click on the name of the required exercise or press the Open button.
Note: An exercise in Navi-Trainer 3000 format will not be loaded unless the same area is installed in Navi-
Trainer 5000 simulator.
The Navi-Trainer 3000 exercise can be saved in Navi-Trainer 5000 format only.
The exercise is saved in the exercise folder for the same area.
179
CHAPTER 3.
SIMULATOR SESSION
Opening Simulator Session 183

Types of Training Scenario 183
Distribution of Tasks 183
Starting Exercise 186
Pausing Exercise 186
Session Overloading 186
Possible Operations During Simulator Session 188
Control of Ships 189
Control of Own Ships and Target Ships (Advanced Models) 189
Control of Targets Ships (Simplified Models) 189
Giving Sound Signals 191
Giving Sound Signals by Target Ships 191
Giving Siren Signals 192
Control of Autopilot 193
Motion Data Display 195
Fire Detection Alarm 196
Control of Navigation Signals 197
Selecting Signals Preset Combination 197
Setting Lights 198
Setting Shapes 199
Change of Lights and Shapes 200
Flashing Light Signaling 201
Setting Malfunctions on Ship's Properties Panel 202
Setting Radar Faults 202
Setting Loran-С Faults 203
Setting Propulsion Plant Faults 204
Setting Steering System Faults 206
UAIS Message Exchange 208
181
Message Reply 208

Monitoring of UAIS Messages 209
Setting Options During Simulator Session 210
Using Virtual Force 211
Setting Virtual Force 211
Changing Virtual Force 212
Setting Virtual Force Properties 212
Ship Information Panel 213
Events Panel 214
Monitoring of Dangerous Targets 217
CPA/TCPA Monitoring Panel 217
General CPA/TCPA Settings 217
Graphic Presentation of СРА/ТСРА Data 218
Diagrams of Ship Motion Parameters 220
Ship Diagram Window 220
Selecting Monitored Parameters 223
Setting Parameter Properties 225
Diagram Settings Template 226
Export Diagram Data to CSV-Format 227
Diagram Printout 227
Instructor Visualization 229
Setting Camera 229
Instructor Visualization Control Panel 232
Creating Visualization Screenshots 236
Loading Visual Profile on Bridge 237
Visual Settings 238
Setting Radar 240
Loading ECDIS Data 241
Transmitting NAVTEX Messages 242
VHF Playback 245
Control of Auxiliary Machinery 247
Control of Remote Sensors 249
Creation of Log Scripts 251
LogScript Panel 251
Saving Current Log Script 251
Recording Log Script 252
Editing Log Script 254
Closing Simulator Session 256
Saving Current State of Exercise 256
Stop Exercise 256
182
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Opening Simulator Session
OPENING SIMULATOR SESSION

To open the simulator session, perform the following:
1. Define the training scenario type.
2. Distribute exercise tasks among the bridges.
3. Start the exercise on the bridge.
Types of Training Scenario

There are following types of the training scenario:
l Joint Voyage – whereby several bridges are created and assigned with several ships sailing along
different routes in a single exercise. In this case, the trainees will be sailing in the same gaming area
and will be able to see each other in the process;
l Separated Voyage – whereby own ships simultaneously sail separately in different exercises;
l Common scenario – whereby identical exercises are loaded on the bridges. In this case, own ships sail
separately in the same exercise along the same route simultaneously.
Distribution of Tasks
The distribution of tasks consists in assigning the object to the simulator bridge. With more than one bridge
available in the simulator, they can operate in the same exercise provided, however, that the scenario
contains the appropriate number of objects.
To distribute exercise tasks among the bridges, use the following procedure:
1. Press Assign toolbar button , or <Ctrl>+<1> key combination, or select File\Control\Assign… menu
item. The screen will display Bridges assignment dialogue box.
2. From the Bridge drop-down list, select the bridge name.

3. From the Object drop-down list, select the object name.
4. In the Trainee field enter the Trainee name and his/her data (as required).
5. Press the Add button. In the task distribution list, a raw will appear, containing the bridge name, name
of the object assigned to it, object type and trainee data.
183
6. If there is more than one bridge in the simulator and more than one object, repeat the procedure
described above for each pair.
7. If the assignment is required to be changed, select the raw in the table and press Remove button. The
raw will disappear, and the bridge name and object name will appear in the Bridge drop-drown list and
the Object drop-drown list respectively.
8. To use the template of assignment to several bridges:
a. Press the Templates button.
b. Press the Save button in the Templates dialog box.
c. Enter the template name and press the OK button.
184
d. To apply the template in the exercise, open the Bridges assignment window. Press the Templates
button. Select the required template and press the Apply button.
e. To delete the template from the Templates dialog box, press the Delete button.
9. To open the list of trainees from the "e-Tutor" database, press the Select... button (for more information
about "e-Tutor" program see manual Transas Evaluation and Assessment System (e-Tutor) 5000).
10. To choose a common training scenario, check the Common scenario check box. In this case, it is
possible to assign the same object to several bridges:
If a Common Scenario is selected, it is not support the following functionality:

o Ice functionality;
o Towing and mooring operations;
o Underway replenishment operations;
o Automatic tugs;
o Fishing operations;
o Giving off distress signals;
o Lowering and hoisting lifeboats;
o Ship equipment fault scenarios;
o Helicopter take-off and landing from/onto the helicopter deck;
185
o Application of the tug’s virtual force;

o Balloon fenders;
o The collision speed setting parameter for the own ship does not work, i.e., any touch of another
ship’s hull with the own ship results in a collision;
o Joint operation with other Transas products;
o Influence of bow wave.
11. After the distribution has been completed, press OK button in the Bridges assignment window.
Note: The loading procedure may take considerable time. In the process of loading, Start button on the
toolbar remains disabled.
Starting Exercise
To start an exercise on the simulator bridge, press Start button on the toolbar , or press <Ctrl>+<2> key
combination, or select File\Control\Start menu item.
The time scale can be selected on the toolbar drop-down list:
Pausing Exercise
To suspend an exercise, press Pause button on the toolbar , or press <Ctrl>+<3> key combination, or
check File\Control\Pause menu item.
To resume the exercise, release Pause button, or <Ctrl>+<3> key combination, or clear File\Control\Pause
menu item.
Session Overloading
The simulator does not impose any limitations on the number of objects entered in an exercise. It should be
noted, however, that with too many objects, there may be overloading of the session. In this case, the
screen may display the following warning:
186
If such warning is displayed, you should stop the exercise and analyze what caused the overload. The
overloading may be due to the following reasons:
Table 12. Possible reasons of session overloading
Cause Recommendations
The computer running "Navi-Trainer Install the computer according to the specification
Model" program does not meet
the specification
The computer running “Navi-Trainer It is not advisable to run other tasks on the computer intended for
Model” program is engaged in other running Navi-Trainer Model program
tasks
Large number of targets in an exercise Set a smaller number of targets ships in all the simultaneously
or a large number of exercises running exercises
(session) running simultaneously
A large number of target ships in It is recommended that a simplified model of the target ship should
the exercise are operating in the 6-DoF be used if you are not planning mechanical or hydrodynamic
interaction between the own ship and this target
Too large calculation time acceleration After the overloading of session the time scale will automatically
has been set change on 1:1
It should be remembered that the most resource consuming model components (from the viewpoint of
calculations) are the following:
l Calculations of the ship hull interaction with the environment limits (inclined bottom, shoals, channel);
l Calculations of the ship hull mechanical interaction with another ship or tug;
l Calculations of forces from the mooring and tow lines;
l Motion of automatic tugs on the route (proceeding to a work point with the circumventing of obstacles);
l Motion of high speed vessels (of Combat Boat type) on the waves.
Although the developer does not provide any specific recommendations as to the reduction of the model
overload, the recommendations listed above should be taken into account in the generation of an exercise.
187
POSSIBLE OPERATIONS DURING SIMULATOR SESSION

After the simulator session start, the Instructor can do the following:
l Add new objects (except for objects of Ship, Tug and VTS categories, and such objects as: Pinnacle –
Fishing category ,Ice class, Tides and currents – Environment category, Laser docking system –
Mooring category).
l Move objects (except for the Current field, VTS objects whose position can only be changed before the
simulator session start).
l Delete objects (except for objects of Ship, Tug and VTS categories and also tide and current
database);
l Add and change some object properties. After the assignment of ships to the bridges, the ship
properties panel will contain some additional tabs.
l Control the objects from properties panel.
l Control mooring winches and anchor winches.
l Exchange UAIS message, give a sound signals, set equipment malfunctions and other.
188
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Control of Ships
CONTROL OF SHIPS
Control of Own Ships and Target Ships (Advanced Models)
Control of the own ships and target ships (Advanced models) can be carried out from Control page of
properties panel. The page represents of console with propulsion and steering controls, typical for selected
ship type:
If another object is selected on the exercise chart, the panel will automatically display the selected object’s
controls.
For the panel to be always linked with one selected object, click the mouse on the "pin" in the top left
corner of the window.
Note: To control several objects simultaneously, you can open as many panels as there are objects, and fix
each in the same way.
Control of Targets Ships (Simplified Models)

For the ships-targets (simplified models) you can set the ship speed and course directly or set the speed
and rate of turn by using the controls.
For direct input of ship speed and course:

1. Open the ship properties panel and select the General tab.
2. Select the Set explicitly option (it is selected by default):
3. Set the speed in the Speed field, or select the speed from the drop-down list.
189
4. Set the course in the Course field.

To set the ship’s speed and rate of turn by using the controls, perform the following:
1. Open the ship properties panel and select the General tab:
2. Select the Control option:
3. To set the speed, use one of the following ways:

o On the vertical scale set the slider in the required position (you cannot set the astern movement).
The speed value will be displayed in the list box from the left;
o Open the drop-down list, select the required speed value or enter desired value in the list box. Press
the Apply button.
Note: If you select the Set explicitly option, the set speed value will be saved and displayed in the Speed
field.
4. To set the rate of turn, use one of the following ways:
o On the horizontal scale move the slider to the required position. The value of the rate
of turn in º/min will be displayed on the right;
o In the field , enter required value and press the Apply button.
Note: If you select the Set explicitly option, the entered value of the rate of turn is cancelled.
190
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Giving Sound Signals
GIVING SOUND SIGNALS

Giving Sound Signals by Target Ships
During the simulator session sound signals are given by a target ship automatically in the poor visibility
conditions (fog) regardless of the time of the day.
The Sound page of the target-ship properties panel contains sound signals’ indicator buttons which are
backlighted when signals are automatically given:
To disable automatic signalling at the moment, press the No Sound button. The automatic signalling will be
disabled until the necessary conditions are fulfilled, e.g., a poor visibility zone.
To turn off the automatic signalling, remove the Autosound enabled check box.
Note: It is possible to disable/enable the automatic sound signals for selected ship-targets on the Sound
signals of the Settings panel (see on page 68).
Instructor can give sound signal manually:

1. To give a sound signal in the poor visibility conditions, press the appropriate button in the left-hand
buttons column. The signal will be given by the tyfon.
2. Press the At anchor or Aground button to select signals given by the ship when anchored or aground.
The signal will be given by the gong or bell.
191
3. Press and keep the button:

o Gong – to give gong signal;
o Tyfon – to give tyfon signal;
o Bell – to give bell signal;
o R. Bell – to give repeatable bell signal.
Giving Siren Signals

For some own ships and target ships (e.g., of Lifeboat type), after the exercise start a siren signal can be
produced on the bridge.
1. Open the Signal page of the ship properties.
2. To turn on siren signal, press one of the Siren buttons: 1, 2, 3, 4.
3. To turn off the siren signal, press the corresponding Siren button again.
Note: The trainee can give siren signals on the Signals page of the conning display.
192
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Control of Autopilot
CONTROL OF AUTOPILOT
The own ship autopilot controls and indicators are shown on Auto page of the ship’s properties panel.
1. Open the own ship properties panel and select Auto tab.
2. Press Auto button to switch autopilot on.
Note: If the autopilot is switched on, the indicator is lighted at the right of the Auto button .
3. Press Magn./Gyro to select type of heading device.

4. Press Course/Track to select autopilot mode (Course control orTrack control).
5. Press R.o.T./Radius to select vessel turn mode (Rate of Turn or Turn Radius).
6. To return to manual steering mode, press Follow or Non Follow button.
7. To enter autopilot fault, press Defect button.
Digital indicators on Auto panel displays the autopilot parameters and settings:
l Yawing – coefficient of rudder angle change rate in the ship yaw;
l Rudder – coefficient of correspondence between the rudder angle and deviation from course value;
l Count. Rud. – ship steadying coefficient as the set course is steered to;
l Speed – ship speed;
l Radius – ship turn radius as the course is altered;
l Rud. Lim. – maximum permissible rudder turn position in degrees;
l Off Course – error limit in the deviation from the course;
l R.o.T. – ship’s rate of turn with a change of course in °/min;
l Heading – current heading value in degrees;
l Course – set ship course in degrees.
Note: Autopilot settings can be perfomed from the ship bridge only.
193
The autopilot of a target-ship (Advanced model) is operation in Track Control mode only and only in the
presence of the targets route. To switch on/off the Track Control mode of the ship-target, do the following:
1. Open the ship-target properties panel and select Control tab.
2. Press AUTO button to switch on/off Track Control mode of ship-target autopilot.
Note: The Track Control mode will be automatically switched off after the target will reach the last
waypoint of the route.
194
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Motion Data Display
MOTION DATA DISPLAY

The Motion page of the own ship (tugboat, target ship, target tug, barge) displays the following current data:
l SOG – speed over ground;

l COG – course over ground;
l Speed F, Speed A – speed at the bow and at the stern;
l Heading;
l ROT – rate of turn;
l Current – current speed and direction;
l Wind – wind speed and direction;
l Wave – wave height and direction;
l Depth.
195
FIRE DETECTION ALARM

During the simulator session, it is possible to turn on the system for the automatic fire detection in certain
sections of the ship. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. Open the own ship properties panel and select Fire tab.
2. To select the zones for the fire alarm generation, left-click on the Zone… buttons.
On the Fire tab the selected Zone… buttons start blinking. On the Trainee Conning Display the sound
alarm is activated, and the Fire Alarms indicator starts blinking on the Alarms panel.
After the alarm is acknowledged by the Trainee, the Zone… buttons on the Fire tab stop blinking and
get lighted only. In the right part of the Fire tab the indicators are lighted, if the Trainee presses the
corresponding buttons on the Alarms panel.
3. Left-click on the lighted Zone… buttons to remove the button highlighting. Zone… buttons will cease to
be highlighted.
Note: All the operations with automatic fire detection system are shown on Events panel.
196
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Control of Navigation Signals
CONTROL OF NAVIGATION SIGNALS

The Navigational signals panel is used to control of navigation signals (lights and shapes).
On the panel the Instructor can select and turn on /off the required lights and shapes. Also it is possible, to
select the preset combination of lights and shapes.
Note: The required combination of lights and shapes can also be set from the Signals page of the ship
properties panel (see "Setting of Navigational Signals" on page 126).
The set of available lights/shapes depends on the vessel model and is defined when creating the visual
model of the vessel.
Selecting Signals Preset Combination

To select preset combination of lights and shapes, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Navigational Signals... menu item, or press the toolbar button.
2. Select a ship or ship-target from the Ship drop-down list of the Navigational Signals panel.
3. Select the necessary combination of signals from the State drop-down list.
197
Setting Lights
To set lights, use the following procedure:
3. Open the Lights page.
4. To turn on/off the lights, check/clear the necessary lights in the table’s On/Off column and press the
Apply button.
5. To set a light fault, check the required lights in the Fault column and press the Apply button.
6. To set the light fault duration:
a. Select the time type (Relative or Absolute) in the Time group box.
b. Enter the fault start time in the Fault start column.
c. Enter the fault end time in the Fault end column.
d. Press the Apply button.
7. To turn on a backup light, check the required light in the table’s Backup column and press the Apply
button.
8. To turn on deck lights, check the Deck light check box and press the Apply button.
198
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Control of Navigation Signals
Setting Shapes
To set shapes, use the following procedure:
3. Open the Shapes page.
4. Left-click on the Shape column, next to the required shape place. On the mnemonic diagram the red
square shows the selected place:
5. Select the necessary shape from the drop-down list (Sphere, Cone up, Diamond, Cone down,
Cylinder). Press the Apply button.
6. Repeat the steps 4 and 5, to set other shapes. The shapes will be set:
199
Change of Lights and Shapes

By default, the navigational shapes are automatically replaced with navigational lights at night or in low
visibility (fog).
The instructor can disable the automatic change of navigation signals and specify which navigation signal
will be displayed regardless of day time and visibility conditions. To do this, use the following procedure:
2. Clear the Automatic change of lights/shapes check box.
3. Select the required type of the navigational signal: Lights/Shapes/Both.
200
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Flashing Light Signaling
FLASHING LIGHT SIGNALING

For flashing light signaling from a ship-target to the own ship, perform the following:
1. Start the exercise.
2. Choose the View\Panels\Flash Light….menu, or press the toolbar button.

3. In the Source drop-down list, select the ship-target – a signal source.
4. In the Recipient drop-down list, select the own ship – a signal recipient:
5. In the Manual mode (the Manual option is selected), to give a flashing light signal, press the Flash
button. The indicator gets highlighted as it is pressed.
Note: Pressing the Flash button too often can result in incorrect signalling.
6. In the Text mode (the Text option is selected):

a. Type a letter-number message in the Message field;
b. Set the signal speed (word/min) in the Speed field;
c. Press the Send button. The flashing light signal will be given by using the international Morse code.
201
SETTING MALFUNCTIONS ON SHIP'S PROPERTIES PANEL

During the simulator session on the ship’s properties panel it is possible to set the malfunctions of such
bridge equipment as:
l Radar (see "Setting Radar Faults" on page 202);
l Loran-C (see "Setting Loran-С Faults" on page 203);
l Propulsion plant (see "Setting Propulsion Plant Faults" on page 204);
l Steering system (see "Setting Steering System Faults" on page 206).
l Log (the procedure is the same as before the start of session, see "Log Malfunctions" on page 123)
l Echo-sounder (the procedure is the same as before the start of session, see "Echo-Sounder Parameters
and Malfunctions" on page 124)
l Gyro (the procedure is the same as before the start of session, see "Gyro Malfunctions" on page 123)
l GPS (the procedure is the same as before the start of session, see "GPS Parameters and Malfunctions"
on page 124).
Setting Radar Faults

To set the radar faults during the simulator session, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship properties panel and select the Radar page.
2. Select the required malfunctions:
o No signal – transceiver failure;
o ARPA failure ;
o Interference – interference caused by the operation of other radars;

o Noise – radar receiver noise.
3. Add the object to the category of the radar error: Hidden – hidden signals; Indirect – indirect signals;
Multiplie – multiple echoes from a large-tonnage ship passing close to the own ship. To do this:
a. Right mouse click on the category’s column and select Add menu item, or press the <Insert> key.
b. Select the required object from the list of the Add object dialog box and press OK. The Cancel
button will cancel the selection and close the dialogue box.
202
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Setting Malfunctions on Ship's Properties Panel
Note: To delete an object from the category of the radar error, select the required object and choose Delete
menu item or press <Delete> key.
4. After any editing, press the Apply button.
Setting Loran-С Faults

To set the Loran-С faults during the simulator session, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship properties panel and select the Loran-C page.
2. To disable the receiver supply, check the Defect check box and press the Apply button.
3. To disable transmitting stations (M – master, X and Y – slave), check the appropriate Fault check box.
4. To choose the signal type for each transmitting station, clear Auto (automatic adjustment) checkbox
and select the signal type from the Wave drop-down list: Ground – ground wave; Sky – wave reflected
from the sky.
5. To choose the signal to noise ratio (SNR) for each transmitting station, clear Auto (automatic
adjustment) checkbox and select the value from the SNR drop-down list.
6. After any editing, press the Apply button.
203
Setting Propulsion Plant Faults

To set the propulsion plant faults during the simulator session, use the following procedure:
1. Open the own ship properties panel and select Engine tab.
2. Press PS (SB) button to select faults for left or right engine correspondingly.
3. Press Faults button to display the list of available malfunctions. The screen will display the list of
available faults.
4. Select by the check boxes the required malfunction and press OK button.
The page contains the three groups of emergency indicators:
l The Slow Down group contains the alarm indicators of Slow Down safety system. The system
automatically reduces the engine load if the controllable parameter exceeds the safety limit. The safety
system automatically reduces the engine load in the following situations:
o Over Load – engine overload;
o Cool T high – high temperature in cooling system;
o Cool P low – low pressure in cooling system;

o Exhaust T high – high temperature of exhaust gas;
o Scav. Fire – fire in the cylinder scavenging space;
o Oil Mist – oil mist in the engine crank case.
204
l The Shut Down group contains the alarm indicators of Shut Down safety system. The system
automatically stops the engine if the controllable parameter exceeds the safety limit. The safety
system automatically stops the engine operation in the following situations:
o Over Speed – the propeller shaft exceeded maximum RPM;
o Lub. oil P low – low pressure in lubrication system;
o Engine Failure – engine stop.
l The Start Fail group contains the alarm indicators, signaling on reduction of start/reverser system
functions. The alarm is generated in the following cases:
o Turn Gear – shaft turn gear is connected;
o Reverse Fail – the diesel cannot reverse;
o Start Air P Low – low air pressure in start/reverse system;
o System Error – remote control system failure;
o Too Long Start – start duration is longer than the set time;
o – indication the first, second, third unsuccessful attempt to start the diesel.
Table 13. Typical system reactions on engine faults introduced by the Instructor
Fault Indication Protection system
Worn piston rings Oil Mist
FW cooler fouling Cool T High Slow down
Poor atomizing Exhaust T High Slow down
Scavenge spaces fire Scav. fire Slow down
FW pump failed l Cool T High; Slow down

l Cool P Low
Turn gear engaged l Over Load;

l Turn gear;
l Engine failure
Reverse fail Reverse fail, at attempt to reverse

diesel
CA leakage Start Air P low
CA compressor failed Absence of pumping of compressed air
Propeller lost l Over speed; Shut down

l Engine failure
LO pump failed Lub. oil P low, Engine failure Shut down
Blackout Lub. oil P low, Engine failure Shut down
FO pump failed RPM slowdown
205
Table 13. Typical system reactions on engine faults introduced by the Instructor (continued)
Fault Indication Protection system
Engine failure Engine failure
Remote control failure System error
To switch the operational mode of propulsion plant, use the following buttons:
l OPEN SEA – usually is used during the sea passage;
l MANEUVER – usually is used when performing maneuvers (for example, exit/entrance to port,
mooring, etc.).
Note: In some cases, the switching of operational mode limits the operation of propulsion plant (for
example, limitations of azipod turning). The switching of propulsion plant's operational modes is displayed
on the Events panel.
Setting Steering System Faults

To set the steering system faults during the simulator session, use the following procedure:
1. Open the own ship properties panel and select the Steer page.
2. Press PS (SB) button to select faults for left or right rudder correspondently.
3. Press Faults button to display the list of available malfunctions. The screen will display the list of
available faults:
o Pump No 1 fault;
o Pump No 2 fault;
o Standby pump fault;
o Rudder jamming;
o Rudder power failure;
o Rudder control failure;
o Speed over reduction.
o Bow thruster failure;
o Stern thruster failure.
206
4. Check by checkboxes the required faults in Faults list. To select Speed over reduction fault, set the
reduction of rudder speed in %.
5. Press OK button.
Note: The set of steering gear faults depends on the ship model.
The Steer page contains the following indicators:

l Pump 1/2/Standby Failure indicates pump failure (pump No 1, No 2, or Standby);
l Pump 1/2/Standby Overload indicates pump overload (pump No 1, No 2, or Standby). The overload is
understood as the excess of the limit temperature value of the hydraulic liquid in the pump;
l Power Failure indicates faulty power supply circuit;
l Control Failure indicates a break in the steering gear control circuit;
l Pressure Reduction indicates the operating fluid pressure drop.
207
UAIS MESSAGE EXCHANGE

Message Reply
The Instructor can send any text message on behalf of any target ship. To do this, use the following
procedure:
1. Open the ship-target properties panel and select UAIS tab.
2. Select the AIS type from the drop-down list: UAIS or IAIS (Inland AIS).
3. Change the UAIS or IAIS parameters in the table, if necessary.
4. To turn on the transponder, press the Power button. The Power button is backlighted.
5. Press the Apply button. The Send message button will be activated.
6. Press Send message button. The screen will display the AIS Safety Message window.
7. Type any message text.

8. From the To: drop-down list select the destination.
9. Press the Send button.
208
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • UAIS Message Exchange
Monitoring of UAIS Messages

To monitor all UAIS messages sent during exercise, use the following procedure:
1. Call the Events panel: menu View\Panel\Events….
2. Select UAIS category.
209
SETTING OPTIONS DURING SIMULATOR SESSION

After the simulator session start, Instructor can select the following options:
1. Open the own ship properties panel and select the Options tab.
2. To hide/show mooring chart on the Moor page of the Trainee’s Conning Display, check/clear the
Disable mooring map check box and press the Apply button.
3. To hide/show lines control panel (Line) on the Moor page of the Trainee’s Conning Display, check/clear
the Disable mooring control check box and press the Apply button.
4. To hide/show flock of birds over the vessel on the visualization screen, check/clear the Birds over
the vessel check box and press the Apply button.
5. To hide/show ecology panel (ECO) on the Instrum page of the Conning Display, check/clear the
Disable ecology panel check box and press the Apply button.
210
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Using Virtual Force
USING VIRTUAL FORCE

The Instructor can set virtual horizontal force affecting the own ship/tug or target ship (6DoF model). The
force can be applied to any point of the ship hull in any direction horizontally.
Note: Virtual forces are not applied to the fleet formation.
Setting Virtual Force

To set a virtual force, use the following procedure:
1. Open the context menu of the own ship and select Virtual force item:
2. In the New virtual force dialog box type the name of a virtual force, if necessary:
Note: Before the simulator session start, the Instructor can rename the virtual force. To do this, open the
context menu of the force's vector from and select the Rename force item.

4. Position the cursor on the ship hull in the force application point and click the left mouse button. The
force application point will be fixed on the ship hull.
5. By moving the cursor, set the force value and direction, and click the left mouse button. The force
vector will be fixed on the chart:
6. Repeat steps 1–5, to create other virtual force vectors.
211
Changing Virtual Force

To change the virtual force parameters graphically, use the following procedure.
1. Open the context menu of the selected force vector and select Change force item.
vector will be fixed on the chart.
To change the application point and parameters of a virtual force, use the following procedure:
1. Open the context menu of the selected force vector and select Move force item.
2. Position the cursor on the ship hull in the force application point and click the left mouse button. The
force application point will be fixed on the ship hull. The mouse cursor will assume the shape of a force
vector.
Note: Press the right mouse button for setting a virtual force in a new point without changing its
parameters.
vector will be fixed on the chart.
To delete a virtual force, use the following procedure.
1. Open the context menu of the selected force vector.
2. Choose Remove force item.
Setting Virtual Force Properties

To set the virtual force properties, use the following procedure:
1. Open the context menu of the selected force vector and select Properties item. The Virtual force page
appears.
3. Set the following virtual force properties on the Virtual force page:
o Value – current value of the force vector, t;
o Relative direction – relative direction of the force vector, deg;
o Maximum value – maximum value of the force vector, t.
212
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Ship Information Panel
SHIP INFORMATION PANEL

During the simulator session, the panel displays the following information on ships (target ships):
l Name – ship name;

l Speed L – ship longitudinal speed;
l Heading – ship heading;
l SOG – speed over ground;
l COG – course over ground;
l ROT – ship rate of turn;
l Speed F – transverse speed on the ship bow;
l Speed A – transverse ship on the ship aft.
To open the panel, use the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Panels\Ship info... menu item, or press the toolbar button.

2. Make a double left-click to select an object from the list. The object will turn up in the centre of the
exercise chart and will be highlighted in orange.
Note: Information on ships can be sorted by any of parameters. To sort, click the mouse on the required
table heading.
213
EVENTS PANEL
The Events panel displays the list of events, which take place during the simulator session.
To show the Events panel, choose the View\Panels\Events…menu item, or press the toolbar button.
The table of Events panel contains:

l Time – event time;
l Object – exercise object, with which the event is associated;
l Category – event type;
l Name – event name;
l Text – tag text.
The events in table may be sorted by object type (Object), event type (Category), or comment (Text). To
sort the events in table, use the following procedure:
1. Select the ship name from the left drop-down list, to sort events by object.
2. Select event category from the middle drop-down list, to sort events by category.
3. Type the "key word" in the right text box, to sort events by text comment.
214
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Events Panel
There are following events categories:

l Action – messages on the Trainee performance on the bridge are formed when the autopilot, lights, or
sound signals are turned on/off, anchor is dropped or heaved, etc.;
l Crash – messages on accidents are formed in the case of ship collision or grounding;
l Distress – messages on the Trainee sending a distress call;
l Intercom – messages on the Trainee actions during the work with the Intercom;
l Ice Navigation – messages on the Trainee performance in conducting navigational operations in ice
conditions;
l Lock – message on the Trainee breaking the lock passing rules;
l Lines – messages during the work with mooring lines;
l Rules – messages on sailing rule violation are formed for dangerous targets as calculated CPA/TCPA
values exceed their limits;
l SSAS – messages are formed when Trainee works with
the Ship Security Alert System;
l UAIS – messages on the trainee steps in the operation with UAIS
are formed when text messages are sent, and the station static and dynamic data is changed;
l Instructor – the Instructor generated events;
l VHF – messages on the Trainee actions during the work with the VHF communication.
The events with comments may be added by Instructor. Instructor event can be associated with any own
and target ship.
To add Instructor event, use the following procedure:

1. Click right button on the Events panel. The Add event menu will appear on the panel.
2. Choose Add event… menu item.

3. Position the cursor on any object on exercise chart.
215
4. Click left button. The screen will display Add event, containing position and name of object:
5. Type the event name in the Name field, and any text comment in Text field and press the OK button.
The event will be added to the list of events.
Note: For focusing the chart on a geographic point where the event occurred, double click the left mouse
button on the required event on Events panel.
216
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Monitoring of Dangerous Targets
MONITORING OF DANGEROUS TARGETS

CPA/TCPA Monitoring Panel
To monitor CPA/TCPA data, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\CPA/TCPA menu item, or press the toolbar button. The CPA/TCPA panel
appears. The panel contains the list of dangerous targets by CPA/TCPA criterion.
2. Select reference ship in the drop-down list of vessels.

3. Set the values in the Limits fields:
a. Set the distance within which the dangerous targets will be monitored . The table will
display the ships and targets, which CPA/TCPA values are smaller than specified limits.
b. Set the monitoring time .

4. To select object on the chart, make a double left-click to an object from the list in the table.
Note: Information in the table can be sorted by any of parameters. To sort, click the mouse on the required
table heading.
General CPA/TCPA Settings

To adjust general settings of CPA/TCPA data display on the chart, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Settings… menu item. The Settings window will appear.
2. Open the CPA/TCPA page.
3. Check by check boxes the objects which the CPA/TCPA data should be displayed for.
217
4. To display CPA/TCPA data for all the objects, press the Show All button, to hide it, press the Hide All
button.
5. Set the limit values of the CPA and TCPA:
o CPA – the distance to closest point of approach;
o TCPA – the time to closest point of approach.
6. If it is necessary to display the СРА/ТСРА data for dangerous targets only, check the Show only
dangerous targets check box (the check box is checked by default). Graphically shown on the chart
will be only those CPA/TCPA values which are less than or equal to the set limit values.
7. Check the Check both parameters check box if it is required that target will be classified as dangerous
if the value of both СРА and ТСРА are less than or equal to the set limit values.
8. Check the Show TCPA linecheck box if it is necessary to show the ТСРА line on the chart (checked by
default). If the check box is removed, the CPA point will be displayed on the chart only.
9. From the Marks drop-down list, select an interval between the time markpoints on the ТСРА line (0 min
by default).
10. From the Refresh drop-down list, select the time interval for updating the СРА/ТСРА data graphic
display (1 sec., by default). The СРА/ТСРА graphic information will be updated at the selected
intervals.
Note: For more information, see "Graphic Presentation of СРА/ТСРА Data" on page 218.
Graphic Presentation of СРА/ТСРА Data

During the exercise, the СРА/ТСРА data can be presented graphically in three ways:
l If the current СРА/ТСРА values are greater than the limit СРА/ТСРА values, the СРА point and the
ТСРА line will be marked in green:
Note: The limit CPA/TCPA values are set on the CPA/TCPA page of the Settings panel (see "General
CPA/TCPA Settings" on page 217).
l The ТСРА line will be divided in two parts (green and red) in the following ways:
o Green part of ТСРА line shows the time before the dangerous ТСРА. In this case the current
СРА/ТСРА values are greater than limit СРА/ТСРА values
o Red part of ТСРА line shows the dangerous ТСРА. In this case the current СРА/ТСРА values are
less than limit СРА/ТСРА values.
218
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Monitoring of Dangerous Targets
l If the current СРА/ТСРА values are less than or equal to the limit СРА/ТСРА values, the CРА point
and the ТСРА line are shown in red:
To turn on the graphic presentation of the СРА/ТСРА data, select View\Vectors\Relative menu item, or press
the toolbar button). The chart will graphically display the СРА/ТСРА data as per the settings made.
The current CPA/TCPA values are shown next to the СРА point.
Note: To set the display parameters of relative vectors, open the Vectors page on the Settings panel
(View\Settings… menu item).
219
DIAGRAMS OF SHIP MOTION PARAMETERS

During the simulator session and the log file playback, the instructor can monitor the change of the vessel
motion parameters in the ship diagram window.
Ship Diagram Window

To open the ship diagram window, use the following procedure:
1. Open the context menu of any own ship and choose the Ship diagram item.
2. In the Parameters selection window, select the required parameters for monitoring on the ship diagram
(see "Selecting Monitored Parameters" on page 223).
3. Close the Parameters selection window. The selected parameters appear in the ship diagram window.
The upper part of the ship diagram window contains the following controls:
l button – to open the Parameters selection window (see "Selecting Monitored Parameters" on page
223).
l button – to show the parameters values on the graph. When the cursor moves along the time axis
the vertical line appears. To the right of this vertical line the prompt window shows the values of
parameters at the selected time.
220
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Diagrams of Ship Motion Parameters
l button – to add tickmark on the graph. The tickmark can be dragged on the time axis.
l button – to view information on tickmarks.
221
l Auto Scale check box– to automatically scale the diagram window when the parameter exceeds
existing limits.
l The drop-down list – to select the time interval for which diagram displays a history of changing
parameters.
l The drop-down list – to select the updating rate.
l button – to export diagram data to csv format (see on page 227).
l button – to print diagram data (see on page 227).
l button – to create a ship diagram settings template (see on page 226).
l button – to hide/show information on the parameters in the bottom part of the ship diagram
window.
The middle part of the ship diagram window contains the graph that shows coloured curves of parameters
values. Horizontal axis shows the time, the vertical axis shows the parameter values. The colour and
range of the parameter axis is set in the parameter properties window (see "Setting Parameter Properties" on
page 225).
222
The bottom part of the ship diagram window contains information on the parameters displayed on the
graph:
To the left are the following controls:

l check box – to show/hide parameter on the graph;
l button – to open parameter properties window (see on page 225);
l button – to add levels on the graph. Levels are horizontal lines of constant values which are used to
monitor the current values of the parameter deviations from set level. To add the level, press the
button and click on the graph.
Note:Levels could be added and changed in the parameter properties window. It is possible to remove
levels only in a parameter properties window as well (see "Setting Parameter Properties" on page 225).
l button – to open new ship diagram window with selected parameter shown.
l button – to remove the parameter from the ship diagram window.
Selecting Monitored Parameters

To select the monitored parameters in the ship diagram window, use the following procedure:
1. Open the context menu of any own ship on the chart and select the Ship diagram item.
2. In the left part of the Parameters selection window, select the required ship (ship target).
223
3. Select group of parameters from the list.

4. Select subgroup of parameters from the list (if it is available).
Note: The set of groups of parameters depends on vessel model, and on the objects available in the
exercise.
5. In the right part of the Parameters selection window, select required parameters. To do this, double
left-click on the parameter name or press the Add to Diagram button. The selected parameters appear
in the ship diagram window.
6. If it is required, select the parameters for other own ships (ship-targets), as described above.
7. If it is required for a quick search of parameter, enter the full or partial name of the parameter in the
Search text box.
224
8. After selecting all the required parameters, close the Parameters selection window.
Note: Press the button in the ship diagram window to open the Parameters selection window if you
want to add new parameters to diagram.
Setting Parameter Properties

To set properties of parameters displayed on the diagram use the following procedure:
1. Select the required parameter in the table in the bottom part of the ship diagram window (see "Ship
Diagram Window" on page 220) and press the corresponding button. The parameter properties
window appears.
2. In the Parameter field, enter the parameter name which will be shown on diagram (if it is required).
3. In the Min and Max fields, set the parameter's minimum and maximum values (scale range of
parameter values on the graph).
4. In the Color field, set the colour which will be marked parameter curve in the ship diagram window. To
do this, click on the Color field and select required colour in the Color dialogue box, press the OK
button.
225
5. In the Line width field, set the width of the parameter's curve on the graph in pixels.
6. To add levels on the graph:
a. Press the Levels button. If previously the user added the levels in the ship diagram window (see on
page 223), the values of these levels are displayed in the Levels list box of parameter properties
window.
b. To add new level on the graph, press the button and enter required value.
c. To remove a level, press the button.
7. After setting all the properties, click Ok. The parameter properties window closes.
Diagram Settings Template

The instructor has the ability to save the specified settings of ship diagram window. To do this, create the
template:
1. Open any own ship context menu and choose Ship diagram item.
2. Select required parameters in the Parameters selection window (see "Selecting Monitored Parameters"
on page 223). Close the Parameters selection window.
3. Set properties of the parameters (see "Setting Parameter Properties" on page 225).
4. Press the button in the ship diagram window.

5. In the Templates dialog box, enter the template name and press the Save button.
226
If it is required to delete the diagram settings template, select it in the Templates window and click Delete
button.
To load the diagram settings template to exercise, use the following procedure:
1. Open any own ship context menu and choose the Ship diagram item.
2. In the Parameters selection window, open Select Template drop-down list, select the required template
and press Add to Diagram button.
Export Diagram Data to CSV-Format

If at least one monitored parameter is selected in the ship diagram window, the data related to the
parameter can be exported to the CSV-format. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. In the ship diagram window select the monitored parameters and set their properties (see "Ship Diagram
Window" on page 220).
2. Press the button in the ship diagram window.

3. In the Export to CSV dialog box, set the following parameters:
o From – start of a time period;

o To – end of a time period;
o Step – graduation step.
5. Press the Export button.

6. In the Save As window, select the folder, enter the name of the file and press the Save button.
Diagram Printout
To print out the diagram data, use the following procedure:
1. Open the ship diagram window (see "Ship Diagram Window" on page 220).
2. Press the button.

3. In the Title field, enter the heading (diagram name). In the Comment field, enter comments if it's
required. Click Ok button.
4. Set print setup.
227
5. Press the Print button.
228
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Instructor Visualization
INSTRUCTOR VISUALIZATION
The instructor visualization expands the instructor functional capabilities and is used for the visual
monitoring of the surroundings during the exercise.
The main capabilities of the instructor visualization are:

l Formation of visual monitors from several visual channels;
l Setting of an unlimited number of the instructor visual cameras, both in the preparation stage and
during the exercise conduct.
The instructor visual camera can be set in any place on the chart, or attached to a mobile or stationary
exercise objects (own ships, target ships, aircrafts, helicopters, life rafts, VTMS stations, etc.).
Setting Camera
To set a Camera object, use the following procedure:
1. Open the list of object categories: Edit\New object.
2. In Scene category, select Camera object.
3. Press Next button. The screen will display a window for the input of the main object parameters.
4. Enter the direction, tilt, and height of the camera.

5. If necessary, select the infrared mode by checking the Infrared Mode check box.
7. Position the cursor in the selected place on the chart and press the left button. The camera will be fixed
in the selected place.
8. To move, turn or rename the object, select the appropriate items of the camera context menu.
229
To attach the camera to an object, use the following procedure:

1. Open the camera context menu and select Attach camera item.
2. Use the cursor to indicate the object which the camera should be attached to, and click the left mouse
button. The camera will be fixed on the selected object.
To set parameters of the attached camera:
1. Choose General properties item from the camera context menu.
o Direction – camera’s direction relative to the object direction;
o Tilt – camera’s vertical tilt;
o X, Y, Z – camera shift along the longitudinal/transverse/vertical axis relative to the object centre;
o Infrared mode .

To detach the camera from the object, select Detach camera context menu item.
Note: If an object which the camera was attached to is deleted, the camera is detached automatically, the
camera’s position remaining unchanged.
230
To move the camera quickly and set it on any object and in any place in the exercise scene, use the
1. Open Edit menu and select Add/Remove Camera menu item, or press toolbar button. The Settings
window will appear.
2. Enter the camera direction, tilt and height.

3. To set the infrared mode, check the Infrared mode check box.
5. Position the cursor in the selected point on the exercise chart and press the left mouse button. The
camera will be set in the specified position on the exercise chart. The camera screen will display the
exercise scene viewed from the selected point in the selected direction.
6. If it is required to set the camera on the own ship or on the target ship, it will be required also set the
camera attachment-to-ship point:
a. Point the cursor on the ship which the camera should be attached to, and press the left mouse
button. The context menu listing the camera attachment-to-ship points will appear.
b. Select the required point from the context menu and press the left mouse button.
Note: In the process of the exercise fulfilment, positions of all the cameras and their motion, attachment to
an object and change of parameters are recorded in a log file for the further automatic reproduction of
the surroundings during the Debriefing.
231
Instructor Visualization Control Panel

Control of Instructor’s visualization is performed from a special panel (View\Panels\Camera control… menu
item):
The panel contains:

l buttons for selecting the monitor (the monitors are set up in Configuration Editor);
l buttons for selecting the cameras assigned for the monitors (the cameras are set up on the chart of the
exercise);
l arrow-buttons for moving along the list of cameras (forward and backwards);
l Buttons for switching between the tabs:
o Info – display of information about the location of the camera (absolute and relative positions);
o Control – camera controls (setting up the tilt, direction, height);
o Settings – settings of Instructor’s visualization.
232
Assignment of Cameras to Monitors

When a new exercise is created, no cameras are assigned to monitors.
To assign the cameras to monitors, use the following procedure:
1. Open the View\Panels\Camera control... menu or press the toolbar button. A window for controlling
the Instructor’s visualization appears.
2. Press a button with the name of the monitor, and then a button with the name of the camera.
Note: If a monitor is selected, any successive pressing on the camera button will result in this camera re-
assignment to this monitor. One and the same camera can be assigned to several monitors.
Control of Cameras
To control the cameras,use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Camera control... menu item, or press the toolbar button.
2. Select the Control tab.
233
3. By using scroll boxes, set up:

o Tilt – tilt angle of the camera (from -90 to 90 degrees);
o Direction – direction of the camera with respect to the real north:
o Height – height of the camera (from -500 to 5000 m).
4. To zoom in the picture on the visualization, press the Zoom in button.
5. To zoom out the picture on the visualization, press the Zoom out button.
6. To turn infrared mode on/off, check/clear the Infrared mode check box.
7. To detach the camera from the object, press the Detach button (the button is not enabled unless the
camera is attached to an object).
The Info tab shows the following information about the location of the selected camera:
l Absolute Positiongroup box:
o Latitude and Longitude;
o Height – camera elevation above the sea level;
o Direction – camera direction (turn angle) relative to the true north;
o Pitch – camera’s vertical inclination angle (the trim or pitch angle taken into account);
o Roll – camera’s transverse inclination angle (the heel angle taken into account).
l Relative position group box:
o X – longitudinal shift relative to the object centre;
o Y – transverse shift relative to the object centre;
o Z – vertical shift relative to the object centre;
o Direction – camera direction (turn angle) relative to the object direction;
o Tilt – camera’s vertical inclination angle.
Note: Relative parameters are not displayed unless the camera is attached to an object.
234
Settings of Instructor’s Visualization

To change the settings of the Instructor’s visualization, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Camera control... menu, or press the toolbar button.

2. Select the Settings tab.
3. To display the names of ships, check the Ship names checkbox.
4. To display absolute speed vectors:
a. Set the Speed vectors checkbox;
b. Select the color form the Color drop-down list;
c. Set the length of the speed vector by using the scroll box (shorter or longer).
5. To display routes:
a. Set the Routes checkbox;
b. Select the color of routes from the Color drop-down list.
6. To display borders local composite zones:
a. Select the Local zone borders checkbox;
b. Select the color of borders from the Color drop-down list.
7. To switch off the display of weather parameters (layers of clouds, low visibility, rough sea, ship roll),
set the Suppress weather check box.
235
CREATING VISUALIZATION SCREENSHOTS

To enable the high quality graphic materials to be obtained, the simulator has a capability to create:
l panoramic visualization screenshots (large view angle);
l screenshots of graphic arts quality (high resolution).
Note: For creating screenshots, at least one visualization task should be run on the bridge.
To create visualization screenshots, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Screenshot... menu item, or press the toolbar button. The Screenshot
window will appear.

o Visual Channel Type – visual channel (which the screenshot will be made from);
o File Name – path to and name of the file for storage (BMP format);
o Resolution – image resolution in pixels in width and height;
o Shot Mode – projection type (Horizontal – on a vertical cylinder or Vertical – on a horizontal cylinder);
o Angle Range – view angle depending on the projection type (from 1 to 360 degrees);
o GPU/CPU – type of the processor for the image processing (graphic/central).
3. Press the Make Shot button.
236
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Loading Visual Profile on Bridge
LOADING VISUAL PROFILE ON BRIDGE

The Visual Profile panel (View\Panels\Visual Profiles... menu, or toolbar button) allows the Visual Profile
file to be selected and loaded on the bridge.
The Visual Profile is created and edited with the aid of the Visual System Tuning program (see Navi-
Trainer Professional 5000 (v. 5.35). Technical Description and Installation Manual).
The Visual Profile contains information on a set of visual tasks for a group of channels, on the channel
positions relative to each other, visual settings of each channel, information on the geometry adjustment,
blends adjustment and colour adjustment.
237
VISUAL SETTINGS
To optimize and adjust the picture displayed on visualization screen, the Visual Settings panel is used.
To set visual parameters, use the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Panels\Visual Settings… menu item or click toolbar button. The Visual Settings panel
appears.
2. In the Enchancements group box, set the following visual effects:

o Common shadows – to display shadows of the objects in exercise.
o Cloud shadows – to display shadows of the clouds.
o Area lights – to display light areas around the scene lights.
o Sun rays – to display sun rays passing through the clouds.
3. To switch on Anaglyph 3D mode of all channels on all bridges of exercise, select Anaglyph 3D check
box. Adjust Anaglyph 3D mode settings:
o Stereo separation – difference in horizontal position between the right and left images. The greater
the stereo separation, the greater the stereo effect. Too much separation, however, can be
uncomfortable if your eyes are not adjusted to stereo.
o Focus distance – focus distance, m
o Color filter – color filter: default (red and blue) or triochrome.
4. In the Lights scale group box move the slyders, to set the following effects:
o Buoys – scale of the lights on the scene buoys;
o Lighthouses – scale of the lights on the scene lighthouses.
5. In the Picture quality settings group box set the effects for picture quality improvement:
o Anti-aliasing – smoothing the jagged or stair-stepped edges of the objects. You can choose Multi-
Sampled Anti-Aliasing (MS) and/or Fast Approximate Anti-Aliasing (FX). To switch off the effect,
select off radio button; to use the medium effect, select medium radio button; to use the maximum
effect, select high radio button.
o Anisotropic filtering – filtering the color noise of
surfaces of the objects. To switch off the effect,
select off radio button; to use the medium effect, select medium radio button; to use the maximum
effect, select high radio button.
238
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Visual Settings
o Sea presentation – quality of the sea presentation: Standard – standard quality; Simplified –
simplified quality (it does not require high processing power of graphics card); As in
ConfigurationEditor – the quality set in the Configuration Editor.
Note: Application of visualization optimizing effects requires considerable processing power of graphics
card. The improvement of visualization by means of described effects is efficient for widescreen pictures
produced by projectors. As for visualization applied for displays, these settings may not take such a
meaningful effect.
6. To apply all settings, press the Apply button.
239
SETTING RADAR
The simulator features a capability to perform exercise monitoring by using radar. For the operation with
the radar, the simulator configuration is required to include the appropriate applications: Radar/ARPA
display. To set the radar, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Edit\Set Radar Position menu item, or press the toolbar button.
2. Position the cursor in the required chart point and click the left mouse button. The radar position will be
fixed on the chart, and the screen will display the antenna elevation setting panel.
3. Set the radar elevation and click the left mouse button on the chart beyond the panel. The panel will
disappear, whereas the radar screen will display the exercise scene observed from the set point.
Note: The radar can be attached to any moving or stationary exercise object. To do this, at the time when
you are setting the radar, position the cursor on the object contour and click the left mouse button. In this
case, position of the radar will be determined by the position of the object in the exercise.
240
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Loading ECDIS Data
LOADING ECDIS DATA

There is a capability to transmit information from the trainee ECDIS to the Instructor ECDIS, which
enables the Instructor:
l to view any trainee’s passage plan;
l to view any trainee’s electronic ship log;
l to view manual electronic corrections made by the Trainee;
l to overlay the trainee’s manual electronic updated on the standard update prepared beforehand on the
instructor workstation.
Before loading of the data on the Instructor’s ECDIS, perform the following operations:
1. Install the Navi-Sailor 3000 program on the Instructor’s Workstation.
2. Set the @InstructorECSHost parameter in the Configuration Editor for the Navi Trainer Instructor task.
3. Start the ECS Interface task on Trainee’s Bridges.
To load the ECDIS data, use the following procedure:
1. Press toolbar button. The screen will display the Load ECDIS data window with a list of bridges:
2. Select the bridge which data is required to be received from.

3. Press the ОK button.
241
TRANSMITTING NAVTEX MESSAGES

To transmit NAVTEX messages to ECDIS of the own ship, use the Navtex panel ) during a simulator
session.
To open the panel choose View\Panels\Navtex… menu item, or toolbar button.

The panel contains the following control elements and indicators:
l Text – field for entering the text of the message by using the keyboard.
l Load… – button for loading the message from the text file.
l Save… – button for saving the message in a text format.
l Navarea – drop-down list for selecting the number of the navigational area.
l Station – drop-down list for the selecting the NAVTEX station in the navigational area.
l Frequency – drop-down list for selecting the transmitting frequency of the NAVTEX message.
l Id – field for indicating the identifier of the NAVTEX station.
l Message class – drop-down list for selecting the identifier of the message transmitted to the NAVTEX
system.
l Latitude/Longitude – fields for indicating the coordinates of the NAVTEX station.
l Send – button for transmitting Navtex-message to ECDIS of the own ship.
l Stations… – button for calling the panel to edit NAVTEX stations in the database.
To transmit a NAVTEX message, use the following procedure:
1. Select the View\Panels\Navtex menu item, or press the toolbar button. The Navtex window will
appear.
2. Type the message in the Text field.
3. Select the number of the navigational area from the Navarea drop-down list.
4. Select the NAVTEX-station from the Station drop-down list.
5. Select he transmitting frequency from the Frequency drop-down list.
6. Select the class of the message from the Message class drop-down list.
7. Press the Send button. The message in NAVTEX format is transmitted to the ship’s ECDIS.
242
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Transmitting NAVTEX Messages
To save the message in a text file:

1. Press the Save… button in the Navtex window.
2. In the Save as window, select the folder to save the text file, type the file name and press the Save
button.
To load messages from the text file:
1. Press the Load… button in the Navtex window.
2. In the Open window, select the text file with the message, press the Open button.
To add a new NAVTEX-station, use the following procedure:
1. In the Navtex window, press the Stations… button. The Navtex stations window with a list of all
stations will appear.
2. In the Navtex stations window, press the New button. The Edit Info window will appear.
3. In the Edit Info window, set the parameters of the station:

o Navarea – number of the navigational area (select from the drop-down list);
o Station name ;
o Latitude/Longitude – coordinates of the station;

o Country ;
o Frequency – transmitting frequency ( kHz);
243
o Id – alphabetical identifier of the station;

o Range – broadcasting range (nm).
4. Press the Save button. After saving the parameters, the new station is added to the list of stations.
To edit parameters of the station:
1. In the Navtex stations window, select the required information in the list.
2. Press the Edit button.
3. Set new values of parameters of the station.
4. Press the Save button.
To delete a station from the list:
1. In the Navtex stations window, select the required station in the list.
2. Press Delete button.
244
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • VHF Playback
VHF PLAYBACK
The Instructor has a capability to playback prerecorded *.wav files on the Trainee bridge.
1. Choose the View\Panels\VHF Playback… menu item, or press the toolbar button. The VHF Playback
window will appear.
2. Press the button. The screen will display the Browse For Folder window for selecting a folder with
sound files.
3. In the Browse For Folder window, select a folder with prerecorded *.wav files (it is required have rights
of access to the folder). Press the OK button.The VHF Playback window will appear.
245
4. In the left-hand part of the window, select the necessary sound file with the wav extension. The right-
hand part of the window will display information on this file (length, size and comments if they were
added by the Instructor):
5. To play back the selected sound file, press the Play button.
6. To stop the playback of the sound file, press the Stop button.
7. To delete the selected sound file, press the Delete button.
8. To add comments to the sound file, press the Edit comment button.
9. To close the VHF Playback window, press .
246
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Control of Auxiliary Machinery
CONTROL OF AUXILIARY MACHINERY

The Auxiliary machinery panel is designed for operations with the emergency plant.
Use the following procedure before the exercise start:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Auxiliary machinery… menu item or press the button on the toolbar.
2. Select own ship from the Ship drop-down list.
3. Select diesel-generators (DG) which will be run on the Trainee’s bridge from the DG to run drop-down
list:
o DG1;
o DG2;
o DG1 + DG2.
Note: During a simulator session the Trainee can start and stop DG1 and DG2 by his own choice; the
respective indicator will get highlighted on the Auxiliary machinery Instructor’s panel.
Use the following procedure after the exercise start:

1. To set a failure of one or two DG on the Auxiliary machinery panel, check the DG 1 failure checkbox
and/or the DG 2 failure checkbox and press the Apply button.
Note: An alarm goes off on the Trainee's bridge on the Instrum panel on the EPC page, and the emergency
indicator starts blinking.
2. To cancel the fault of DG1, 2, clear the checkboxes on the Auxiliary machinery panel and press the
Apply button.
247
The highlighted indicators on the Auxiliary machinery panel shows:

l DG1 – DG 1 is running;
l DG2 – DG 2 is running;
l EG – emergency DG is running. The indicator gets highlighted if the Instructor has set the failure of two
generators, or if in case of failure of one of the diesel-generators the Trainee has not started the other
diesel-generator in time.
On the Events panel (the View\Panels\Events… menu) displays the following Trainee’s actions:
l start of diesel-generator DG1, 2;
l stop of diesel-generator DG1, 2;
l automatic stop of diesel-generator DG 1, 2;
l automatic start of emergency diesel-generator EG.
248
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Control of Remote Sensors
CONTROL OF REMOTE SENSORS

The Remote sensor object from the Reference object's category could be set at any point on the chart and
is attached to any object.
The remote sensor is used to monitor the following parameters:

l Latitude;
l Longitude;
l ROT (rate of turn);
l Velocity;
l Depth;
l Current speed;
l Current direction;
l True wind speed;
l True wind direction.
To set the remote sensor:
1. From the Reference category select Remote sensor object and press the Finish button.
2. Left click on the chart.
To attach the remote sensor to any moving or stationary object, call the context menu of the remote sensor
and select the Attach sensor item, and then left-click on the required object. The sensor will observe its
position relative to the object and move with object.
To detach the sensor form the object, call the context menu of the remote sensor and select the Detach
sensor item.
249
To control of the remote sensors, use the following procedure:
1. Open menu View\Panels\Remote sensors... or press the button on the toolbar. The Remote sensors
control panel appears.
2. On the Settings tab for each receiver (own ship) select the sensor which will transmit data at IBID-
layout "Remote Sensor" (for more information see IBID layouts Manual ). Press the Apply button.
3. On the Information tab, you can view data from remote sensors.
250
Chapter 3. Simulator Session • Creation of Log Scripts
CREATION OF LOG SCRIPTS

The Instructor can create log scripts and playback them on the Bridge.
Log scripts can be created in different ways:

l by using the LogScript real-time editor. In this case, the Instructor can record any fragments of the
exercise and place them in the necessary order for further playback;
l by using any text editor. In this case, the Instructor can write a log script in
the txt format. The extension of the log script file should be *.ntlogsc. The log-script can contain
one or several log files; the log script and log files used in it should be located in one folder.
Note: Theplayback of log-scripts is described in Chapter 4, see "Log Script Playback" on page 262.
Below is the description of creating log-scripts in LogScript real-time editor.
LogScript Panel
The log script is recorded and edited on the LogScript panel (View\Panels\LogScript... menu item, or
toolbar button):
The LogScript panel displays the following information in the tabular form:
l № − number of the exercise fragment (shows the fragment playback order);
l Start − start time of exercise fragment;
l Stop− stop time of exercise fragment;
l Description − description for exercise fragment (text displayed on the visualization screen during the
log script playback).
Saving Current Log Script

To save the current log script, use the following procedure:
1. In the LogScript window, press the Save… button
2. In the Save As window, select a folder for saving the log script (LogFiles by default).
251
3. Enter the log script name in the File name field

4. Press the Save button. The log script file will be saved in the selected folder with the *.ntlogsc
extension.
Recording Log Script

As an exercise is running, the Instructor can record any exercise fragments to a log script. To do this, use
the following procedure:
1. After the exercise start, select the View\Panels\LogScript… menu item, or press the button. The
LogScript window will appear:
2. To start recording of the first fragment, press the Start button. The fragment number and start time will
appear in the first row.
252
3. To end recording of the first fragment, press the Stop button. The first fragment stop time will be added
to the row.
4. In the Description column you can add description of this fragment. When this log script fragment is
played back, the screen will display the entered text.
5. Repeat steps 2–4, to record the other fragments to the log script.
253
Editing Log Script

The Instructor can edit a previously created log script by use Log Script editor during the exercise.
The following operations are available during the editing:

l Adding new exercise fragments to the log script, assigning their start and stop time.
l Changing manually the fragment start and stop time.
l Changing the fragment playback order (moving the rows up and down the table).
l Deleting fragments from the log script (as this is done, the fragment is deleted from the log script only,
but not from the log file).
Note: The log script can also be edited after an exercise stop in the log script window. In this case,
fragments are added from the log file. Editing of the log script during playback is impossible.
To add a fragment to the end of the list, use the following procedure:
1. Click the mouse in the bottom empty row in the LogScript window. The Add button will be activated in
the window.
2. Press the Add button. A new row specifying the fragment start time will appear (by default, the start
time is equal to the previous fragment’s stop time).
3. To set the stop time of the added fragment, press the Stop button. The fragment stop time will appear in
the last row.
254
To add a fragment to the beginning of the list:

1. Click the mouse on the first row in the list.
2. Press the Add button. The new fragment’s row will appear above the first row; assigned to it will be the
following parameters:
o Start time = 00.00.0000000;
o Stop time = start time of the next row.
Note: Numbers of all the subsequent rows will be increased by one.
To add a fragment in the middle of the list:

1. Click the mouse on the fragment row above which the new fragment is required to added.
2. Press the Add button. The new fragment’s row will appear above the selected row; assigned to it will
be the following parameters:
o Start time = stop time of the previous row;
o Stop time = start time of the next row.
Note: Numbers of all the subsequent rows will be increased by one.
To manually change the fragment start and/or stop time, use the following procedure:
1. Click the mouse in the required table cell.
2. Enter the necessary time (the stop time should not be less than the start time).
To move a fragment up, select it in the table and press the Move Up button.
To move a fragment down,select it in the table and press the Move Down button.
To delete a fragment from the table, select it and press the Delete button.
255
CLOSING SIMULATOR SESSION

Saving Current State of Exercise
In course the exercise, the current state of exercise can be saved as initial state
of new exercise. To do this, select File\Save As... menu item. In the Save As dialog box, enter file name and
press the Save button.
Stop Exercise
To terminate the exercise, press Stop button on the toolbar , or select File\Control\Stop menu item.
256
CHAPTER 4.
DEBRIEFING
General 259
Loading Log File 260
Log Playback 261
Log Script Playback 262
Main Exercise Window Printout 264
Playback of Audio Log Files 266
Playback of Video Log Files 267
Report Generation 268
Report Generator Wizard 270
257
Chapter 4. Debriefing • General
GENERAL
Debriefing presumes the playback of an exercise record (log) and generation of different reports, based on
log data. The exercise log represents a data file formed in the course of an exercise. The exercise report is
formed in accordance with the selected template on the basis of exercise log. The report can be printed out
or saved to a file in the Excel (*.csv) format.
259
LOADING LOG FILE

To load a log file, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the File\Open... menu item, or press the button on the toolbar, or press the <Сtrl>+<O>
key combination. The screen will display the Open window.By default, all the log files are stored in the
NTPRO_5000…\LogFiles folder.
2. Open the LogFiles folder.
3. Open the necessary area folder. The window will display a list of log files with .*ntlog extension: In
the tabular form will be specified log file data: name, size, type and date when modified. The bottom
part of the window shows comments for the selected log file: bridge and trainee name, object name and
type and also comments to the exercise if these were added by the instructor.
4. To sort files, click the right mouse button on an empty field in the table, and select the necessary item
from the context menu, or click the mouse on the table column heading.
5. To load a log file, make a double mouse click on its name or press the Open button. The Open dialogue
box will close down. The log file window will appear, with icon in the top left corner.
Note: In the Open window, you can perform standard operations on the files (deleting, renaming, copying,
etc.). To do this, click the right mouse button on the exercise name and select the necessary item from the
context menu.
260
Chapter 4. Debriefing • Log Playback
LOG PLAYBACK
The procedure for running the log playback is similar to the exercise running procedure.
For log playback on the Instructor workplace, use the following procedure:
1. Press Start toolbar button , or press the <Ctrl>+<2> key combination, or select File\Control\Start
menu item.
2. Specify the time scale of log playback on toolbar.
To change the start time of log playback:
1. Press Pause toolbar button or <Ctrl>+<3> key combination.

2. To set the time, move the slider on the time-bar at the exercise window bottom, or use the spin
buttons, or type the required value in the spinbox.
3. Release toolbar button.

For log playback on Bridge, use the following procedure:
1. Press Assign button on toolbar, or press the <Ctrl>+<1> key combination, or select item
File\Control\Assign in main menu.
2. In Bridge list, select the bridge name.
3. In Object list, select the object name.
4. In Trainee field, enter the trainee name and his/her data (as required).
5. Press Add button.
6. After the distribution has been completed, press OK button. The window will disappear, and the initial
data loading procedure will start.
7. Press Start toolbar button on toolbar, or press the <Ctrl>+<2> key combination, or select item
File/Control/Start in main menu.
8. To stop log playback, press Stop toolbar button or press the <Ctrl>+<4> key combination.
261
LOG SCRIPT PLAYBACK

The Instructor can load the log script and play it back on the Instructor workplace or on the Trainee's
bridge.
Note: To create a log script, see "Creation of Log Scripts" on page 251.
To load a log script and start its playback, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the File\Open… menu item, or press the button.

2. In the Open window, select a folder in which the log script was saved (LogFiles by default).
3. Select the necessary file (the file should have the *.ntlogsc) extension.
4. In the Open window press the Open button. The log script window will appear and displays the start and
the finish time of exercise fragments and comments on them:
262
Chapter 4. Debriefing • Log Script Playback
Note: If necessary, edit the log script and save it by clicking the Save… button. The Start/ Stop button is
disabled during the editing. The procedure of editing of the log script is similar to the one of editing of the
log script during the simulator session (see on page 254).
If the log script has been created in the text editor, the text of the log script is displayed:
5. To start the log script playback on the Instructor workplace, press the toolbar button.
6. To start the log script playback on the bridge, press the and toolbar buttons.
7. To stop the log script playback, press the toolbar button.
263
MAIN EXERCISE WINDOW PRINTOUT

During the log file playback, the Instructor can print out the main exercise window at any time.
To set the page parameters, use the following procedure:

1. Choose the File\Page Setup... menu item. The Print Setup window will appear.
2. In the Printer group, set the printer properties.

3. In the Paper group, select the page size and the type of feeding sheets to the printer.
4. In the Orientation group, select the page orientation.
5. Pres the ОK button.
To preview document, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the File\Print Preview menu item or press the toolbar button.
264
Chapter 4. Debriefing • Main Exercise Window Printout
Note: The page bottom margin contains the current scale of the chart, date and the page printout time.
The top margin shows the exercise name. For a log-file the exercise creation time and date are also
displayed in the top margin.
2. Press the Zoom In/Zoom Out button, to zoom the image in/out.
3. To print out the page, press the Print button.
To print out the main exercise window, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the File\Print... menu item or press the <Ctrl>+<Р> key combination. The Print window will
appear:
2. Set up the window printout settings as required.

For the prompt printout of the main exercise window, press the toolbar button The document will be
printed out on the selected printer with the current settings.
265
PLAYBACK OF AUDIO LOG FILES

Exchange playback may be carried out on any computer from simulator configuration, with sound card and
Audio logger application. To start exchange playback, use the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Panels\Audio logger... menu item or press toolbar button.

2. Open Playback page on Audio logger panel.
3. In the configuration tree, select the Audio Logger task, which will be used for playback.
4. Select the required records for right and left channel, by setting checkboxes next to their name.
Note: The trainee exchange records will be played during exercise log playback. Left and right cannels will
reproduce the sum of selected records.
266
Chapter 4. Debriefing • Playback of Video Log Files
PLAYBACK OF VIDEO LOG FILES

Video log files can be played back on any computer included in the simulator configuration where Video
Logger task is run. To turn on playback of the log file recorded during the exercise, perform the following
procedure:
1. On any instructor station, load the main log file.
2. Choose the View\Panels\Video logger… menu item, or press the toolbar button.
3. From the tree in the left-hand part of the panel, select Video Logger task, which will be used for playing
back the video recordings.
4. In the right-hand part of the panel, check Associate with checkbox and select that instructor station
from the drop-down menu where the main log file is loaded.
5. Select the tapes (Playback#), which will be played back by the previously selected Video Logger task
by selecting the tape number and selecting the name of the computer where the tape was recorded,
from the drop-down menu.
6. Start playing back the main log file on the instructor station.
7. On the computer which was selected by step 3, switch to Video Logger task by using the Taskbar or
<Alt>+<Tab> key combination.
8. Click on the picture, which you wish to zoom. The second click will return all the pictures on
the screen.
The computer which was selected by step 3, will play back all the tapes selected by step 5, each in its part
of the screen, or one of them on the entire screen.
Note: The maximum number of tapes played back on one screen, is 4. If less than 4 tapes are played back,
it is allowed to add new ones without stopping playback of the main log file.
Playback will be performed in the course of playing back the main exercise log file responding to the
changes of acceleration ration, to Pause command, and to leaps from one event to another (Events panel).
267
REPORT GENERATION
An exercise report is a tabular or graphic presentation of exercise log data.
The simulator has a capability to generate the following reports:
l Training – contains results assessment of the trainee competency with regard to the given set of
criteria;
l Ship dynamics – contains the main ship motion parameters;
l Events – contains a list of events which took place during the simulator session;
l Forces – contains forces and moments affecting the ship;
l Log – contains an extended list of the ship motion parameters;
l Towing – contains main parameters of the tow lines;
l Traffic – contains main parameters of the targets motion;
l Tugs – contains forces and moment from the tugboats acting on the ship;
Virtual forces – the report (in a tabular form) contains component of the external forces and moments
affecting the ship.
To start report generation, do the following:

1. Choose View\Panel\Reports in menu. The screen will display Reports panel.
2. In ship list, select the ship which you wish to generate report.
3. In reports list, select a report type.
Note: The Training report is shown by default (see "Training Report" on page 483).
4. To open the report properties panel, press the button. The screen will display the report
parameters setting panel.
268
Chapter 4. Debriefing • Report Generation
5. On the Time interval page set the following parameters:.

o Start– the report start time counted from the beginning of the exercise.
o Period – the report duration.
o Step – the report time step.
6. Press Apply button.
Note: If the set parameters go beyond the set log file duration, the screen will display a pertinent warning.
7. On the Table layout page set the size of the table displayed on a single report pages (number of rows on
the first and rest pages).
8. Press Apply and Close buttons.

9. To view the report, use arrow buttons on the Reports panel.
10. To print out the report, press Print button on the Reports panel.
11. To save a tabular report, press Save button on the Reports panel. The report will be saved in the
specified folder in Excel format (comma separated values).
Note: The format allows the reports to be viewed in the form of electronic Microsoft Excel tables.
269
REPORT GENERATOR WIZARD

The Report Generator is designed for automatic reports generation in the CSV-format on the basis of both
log-files and exercises.
The Report Generator allows:

l Automatically starting and playing a set of exercises without assigning on the bridge. The duration of
playback can be defined for each exercise.
l Forming a report for an exercise or a log-file. The report contains a table or a graphic display of log-file
data.
l Selecting a report type: Events, Forces, Log, Ship dynamics, Training and other. An individual file is
created for every ship and report type.
l Saving a report in the CSV-format to any directory.
For work with the report generator, perform the following steps:
1. Open the Start menu in OC Windows. In the All Programs list select SW Navi-Trainer 5000 and
start the Report Generator Wizard application. The Report Generator window appears.
Note: Before starting the Report Generator Wizard make sure that the Router of the simulator hasn't been
started.
2. Add log-files and exercise for processing:

a. In the Report Generator window click Add.
b. In the Open window select the necessary files of logs and/or exercises. To select several files at
once, hold the <Shift> button: press Open.
c. To remove a file from the Report Generator window, select it and press Remove. To remove all
files, click Clear.
270
Chapter 4. Debriefing • Report Generator Wizard
3. Press Next.
4. Define report settings:
o Time step – data display time step.
– the directory where the reports will be saved. By default, the reports are saved in
o Output directory
the NTPRO_5000\Nti\Export directory. To select another directory, click Browse.
o Maximum running time – the running time of the exercise. When the time is expired, the exercise is
automatically stopped.
5. Select the report types, for this, check the checkbox opposite the required report type. To select\clear
all report types, check\clear the Select\Deselect all checkbox.
271
Note: By default, the list of report types is the same like on the Reports panel (see "Report Generation" on
page 268). Besides this, the templates, defined by the user in the Diagrams window (see "Diagrams of Ship
Motion Parameters" on page 220), will be additionally included. Consider that the parameters in the
diagram template can be specific for a particular ship; if another ship does not contain these parameters,
they will not be displayed in the output file.
6. Press Next.
7. Define units of measure in the Measure column from the drop-down lists.
8. Press Next.
9. To save the current settings of the report generator as a template, check the Save these settings
checkbox, then in the Name field enter the name of the settings template.
Note: During further runs of the Report Generator Wizard the Load settings button will become active in
the window that appears and will serve for loading the Report Generator settings template.
10. Press Next. The processing of files will begin.
272
Chapter 4. Debriefing • Report Generator Wizard
11. After successful processing press Finish.
A report file in the CSV format will be created for every ship and selected report’s type. All report files will be
saved in the selected directory.
273
CHAPTER 5.
SPECIAL EXERCISES
Mooring Operations 277

Mooring Walls 277
Characteristics of Mechanical and Hydrodynamic Interaction 280
Points on Ship Contour 281
Operations with Tow/Mooring Lines 282
Control of Mooring Winches 285
Setting Mooring Objects 287
Work with Balloon Mooring Fenders 295
Operations with Anchors 297
Setting Anchor Parameters 297
Selecting Seabed Type 299
On-Chart Control of Anchors 300
Control of Anchor Winches during Exercise 302
Towing Operations 304
Setting Bridle 304
Creating Barge Tow 306
Operations with Tow Winches 307
Operations with Automatic Tugs 314
Automatic Tugs General Settings 315
Reserving and Releasing of Tug 315
Basic Operations 316
Automatic Tug Control Page 323
Navigation in Ice Conditions 324
Work with Ice Zone 324
Setting Ship Ice Class 329
Setting Ice Repulsion 330
Setting Ice Accretion 331
Operations with Icebergs 331
275
Operations with Ice Breaker 334

Monitoring Trainee Performance 337
Fishing Operations 338
Shoal Objects 338
Selecting Vertical Sonic Speed Distribution 341
Pinnacle Objects 342
Fishing Buoys 343
Setting Bottom and Pelagic Trawl 344
Setting Purse Seine 347
Setting Long Line 350
Watching Trainee Performance 352
Search and Rescue Operations 354
SAR Objects 354
Signaling in Accordance with ICS 365
Giving Distress Signals 369
Use of Rescue Boat 370
Operations with Helicopters and Aircrafts 374
Operations with Helicopter Objects 374
Operations with Aircraft Objects 376
Deck Helicopters 377
Underway Replenishment Operations 382
Setting Underway Replenishment Criteria 382
Underway Replenishment Control Panel 383
P&D Line and Span Wire Rendering/Heaving 384
Joint Ship Maneuvering in Formations 387
Creating Fleet Formation 387
Control of Fleet Formation 390
Passing of Locks 392
Setting Lock Initial Properties 392
Control of Lock 393
Monitoring Fulfilment of Exercise with Locks 397
Control of Semaphores 398
Ro-Ro Operations 400
ECDIS Training 404
Ordering Charts, Chart Update and Weather Forecasts 404
Order Processing 407
Operations with Submarine 409
Pirates Attacks Control 411
Control of Motion Platform 412
276
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Mooring Operations
MOORING OPERATIONS
Instructor can do the following:
l to show/hide mooring walls, to use the fender protection of the mooring walls (see "Mooring Walls" on
page 277);
l to set the characteristics of interaction (see "Characteristics of Mechanical and Hydrodynamic Interaction"
on page 280);
l to control tow/mooring lines (see "Setting Mooring Point Properties" on page 282);
l to control mooring winches (see "Control of Mooring Winches" on page 285);
l to set the mooring objects on the chart (see "Setting Mooring Objects" on page 287);
l to control balloon mooring fenders (see "Work with Balloon Mooring Fenders" on page 295).
Mooring Walls
The Instructor can show or hide the mooring walls on the chart. For fender protection of mooring walls the
Fender zone object is used.
Displaying of Mooring Walls and Piers on Chart

The actual edge of the mooring wall does not always coincide with the coastline on the exercise chart. To
view actual borders of mooring walls, it is useful to switch on the displaying of mooring walls and piers on
exercise chart.
To turn on this function, use the following procedure:

1. Choose View\Panels\Objects... menu item.
2. On Objects panel, select Walls type object from Environment category.
3. Click the right mouse button on it. A context menu will appear:
4. To display mooring walls, select Show menu item. Contours of mooring walls on the chart will be
shown as a red line.
277
5. To turn off the display of mooring walls, select Hide menu item.
Fender Protection of Mooring Walls

For the ship mooring to the mooring wall, the Fender zone object, which is a mechanical model of mooring
fenders, can be used.
Note: Before object adjustment it is recommended to switch on the display of mooring walls (see
"Displaying of Mooring Walls and Piers on Chart" on page 277).
To adjust the Fender zone object, use the following procedure:

1. Before the exercise start call a list of object categories, select the Fender zone object type from the
Mooring category and press Finish button.
2. Draw arbitrarily the fender zone along the mooring wall.
3. Right-click to finish the drawing.
278
4. Right-click on the selected zone. The object context menu appears:
5. In the context menu, select the General properties item.

To change the display of fender zone’s bound:
1. Open Bound tab of zone properties panel.
2. Set the colour, thickness and outline for the boundary line of the fender zone.
3. If necessary, clear the Hide on scale decrease checkbox to cancel the option.
To change the rigidity level of mooring fenders:
1. Open Fenders tab of zone properties panel.
2. Select Use instructor setting.
279
3. Set the rigidity level of mooring fenders by using the slider. The Energy and Reaction fields will be
automatically updated as per current rigidity level.
Characteristics of Mechanical and Hydrodynamic Interaction

Characteristics of mechanical and hydrodynamic interaction are set on the Options page of the ship
properties panel before the exercise start.
Characteristics of Mechanical Interaction

Mooring operations are related with a mechanical contact of the ship with other ships, tugboats and
mooring walls. The mechanical interaction is characterized by maximum mechanical contact speed.
In case of a mechanical contact with a higher speed, a “collision” message is formed and the modeling is
stopped.
To set the maximum speed of the mechanical contact, perform the following procedure:
1. On Options page of ship’s properties panel, enter the speed values:
o Dangerous bump speed – maximum speed for mechanical interaction with walls;
o Collision speed – maximum speed for mechanical interaction with other ships (tugboats, barges).
2. After the setting of values, press Apply button.
In case of a mechanical contact with another ship or a wall, there will be no collision if the interaction speed
is less than the specified values.
280
In case of a mechanical contact of two ships, the collision message can appear for one ship only. This is
due to the fact, that in case of a collision, it is not only the collision speed, which is taken into account, but
also the ship displacement (dimensions). The ships with significantly dissimilar dimensions will, therefore,
be differently affected by the same collision speed.
By default, the Dangerous bump speed and the Collision speed for ship (ship-target) object types are set at
2 knots, for tug (tug-target) object types are set at 5 knots.
Hydrodynamic and Aerodynamic Effects

During mooring operations, a ship has also the hydrodynamic contact with mooring walls, canal slopes,
banks and other ships.
To set the ship hydrodynamic and aerodynamic coefficients, use the following procedure:
1. On Options page of ship’s properties panel, enter the values of the following effects.
o Anchor holding power ;
o Local current influence – distributed current effect;

o Local wind influence – effect of the wind distributed along the ship hull;
o Ship to ship interaction – hydrodynamic interaction with other ships;
o Unequal bottom interaction – hydrodynamic interaction with unequal bottom (bank).
2. After setting the values, press Apply button.
The entered coefficients will be used for increasing or weakening forces and moments caused by
hydrodynamic interaction.
The zero coefficients turn off the calculation of forces and moment of hydrodynamic interaction. By
default, hydrodynamic interaction with uneven bottom (bank) is disabled for the ship target models (0).
Points on Ship Contour

The following points are displayed on the ship contour:
l Mooring points – are used for sending\fastening lines and setting properties of line and mooring winch.
The points are shown as small filled squares on the ship contour (for more information, see "Setting
Mooring Point Properties" on page 282).
281
l Anchor points – are used for dropping the anchor. The points are shown as empty squares on the ship
contour (for more information, see "On-Chart Control of Anchors" on page 300).
l Winch points (only on the Tug, Tug target 6 DoF objects) – are used for sending\fastening lines and
setting properties of line and tow winch. The points are shown as empty rhombuses on the ship contour
(for more information, see "Setting Winch Point Properties" on page 307).
Operations with Tow/Mooring Lines

Setting Mooring Point Properties
The mooring point properties panel can be opened before the simulator session start, and also after the
start if no line is sent from this point.
To set the properties of the mooring point, use the following procedure:
1. Increase the display scale so that the mooring points become visible on the object contour.
2. Position the cursor on the mooring point and press the right mouse button.
3. From the context menu which will appear, select the Properties item. The screen will display a window
with opened Line source tab:
282
4. Select the material type from the drop-down list: steel wire, aramid, dyneema, nylon, polyester,
polypropylene. The selected material type will determine the line extensibility, break force and winch
parameters.
5. To change the line break force value:
a. Open the Material properties tab.
b. In the Breakforce column enter new value for required type of material, press <Enter> key and the
Apply button.
c. To apply new break force value to all mooring points, check Apply to all check box and press the
Apply button.
d. To return to the initial values, press the Defaults button.
e. To continue the editing of line properties, open the Line source tab. To close the properties
window, press the Close button.
6. On the Line source tab, check the Lightweight line checkbox if the line is required to be lighter.
7. Select the winch’s initial status from the Initial status drop-down list:
o Veer – the line is being paid out under the effect of an external force;
o Pay out – the line is paid out by the winch motor (not for all the ship models);
o Winch – the line is being heaved;
o Stop – the line length is fixed.
283
8. If necessary, check the Auto winch checkbox and enter the line maximum tension next to it. After the
exercise start, the winch will have the Winch status until the line tension grows to the set value.
The winch status will the automatically change to Stop.
To set winch parameters:
1. In the table, enter values for the 4 winch speeds and values of the pulling force and holding force for
these speeds.
2. If it’s necessary, check the Auto render checkbox for the line to be rendered when subjected to large
loads.
3. In setting parameter values, the following should be taken into account:
o The Pulling force parameter value should be smaller than the Holding force parameter value,
otherwise there is winch slipping;
o The Holding force parameter value should be smaller than the Break force parameter value.
4. During the exercise, the winch speed can be switched on the ship properties panel (the Lines page).
5. Check the Apply to all if the specified properties should be applied to all the lines and mooring points on
the ships.
6. Press the Apply button to save the selected properties, or the Defaults button to return to the initial
values.
Sending and Fastening Lines

The line can be sent from any ship (tugboat, barge). To do this, use the following procedure:
2. Position the cursor on any mooring point. A prompt containing the mooring point number will appear:
3. Press the left mouse button and move the cursor beyond the object contour. A line going from the
mooring point to the cursor will appear on the display of the object:

5. Position the cursor on the line.
To heave the sent line:
1. Position the cursor on the line and press the left mouse button.
2. Without releasing the mouse button, drag it beyond the ship contour.
284
You can fasten the line on any mooring point of another ship (tugboat, barge), as well as on the bollard,
CALM buoy and SALM buoy. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. Position the cursor on the display of the line and press the left mouse button.
2. Move the cursor to the mooring point on another object (if this is a ship, barge or a tugboat) or on the
object itself if this is a bollard or a CALM/SALM buoy).
Control of Mooring Winches

During the exercise the mooring winches can be controlled from the Lines page of the own ship or target
ship properties panel.
To control the winches, use the following procedure:

1. Open the object properties panel and select the Lines tab. The screen will display the Lines page which
contains the table and buttons for the winch control. The table displays the following information:
o Point No – mooring point number;
o Object – name of the object which the line is sent from;
o State – winch status (Stop, Winch, Veer, Pay out);
o Length – line length, m;
o Force (ton) – current line tension, tons;
o Material – line material (* – if lightweight line is in the settings);
o Extensibility – line extensibility, %;
o Break force – line minimum breaking force, tons.
2. In the table, select a row referring to the line and press one of the buttons:
3. If it is necessary to give a command for several lines at a time, press the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key and
select several rows in the table. After a time, the winch will be operating in accordance with the
selected command. The table will show the change of data.
285
4. To switch the winch speeds, use the buttons.
Note: There is no selection or switching of winch speeds for some ship models.
5. To let go a line, select the relevant row in the table and press the Let go button.
The winch state can be selected or a line deleted from the line context menu:
1. Position the cursor on the display of the line and press the right mouse button.
2. Select one of commands.
Note: When the cursor is positioned on the display of a line, the prompt shown the current line state.
Information on the trainee line handling performance is displayed on the Events panel.
286
Setting Mooring Objects

This section describes the setting of such objects as:
l Bollard (see "Setting Bollards" on page 287);
l CALM and SALM (see "Setting Mooring Buoy (CALM, SALM)" on page 289);
l Floating dock (see "Setting Floating Dock" on page 290);
l Floating Fender (see "Setting Floating Fender" on page 290);
l Laser Docking System (see "Setting Laser Docking System" on page 291);
l Oil platform (see "Setting Oil Platforms" on page 294);
l SPM (see "Setting SPM Object" on page 294).
Setting Bollards
To set bollards, use the following procedure:
1. Open the list of object categories.Select Bollard type object from Mooring category and press the Next
button. The Bollard page appears.
2. Select bollard’s type from the Type drop-down list: General (default), Double.
3. Select bollard’s color from the Color drop-down list: black (default), white; red; blue; green; yellow.
4. To set bollard offset relative to the sea level, check the Manual offset check box and enter value in
meters in the Vertical offset field (0–99).To move bollard with tide, check the Move with tide check box.
5. Choose a way of bollard deployment on the chart:
o Deploy manually – to set each bollard manually.
o Deploy by polyline – to set some bollards on the polyline. Enter distance before bollards in the
Distance between bollards field.
287
6. Press Finish button and set the bollard (s) on the chart.
To open the list with all bollards which have been set on the chart, call the context menu of any bollard and
select the General properties item.
To delete a bollard:
1. Select a bollard from the list.
2. Press the Delete button.
3. Press OK to confirm the object deleting.
To open the bollard properties panel, make a double mouse click on the required bollard from the list. The
object will be centred on a chart, and the object properties panel will be displayed:
288
Setting Mooring Buoy (CALM, SALM)

The simulator handles two types of mooring buoys: CALM and SALM. To set a mooring buoy, use the
1. Open the list of object categories.
2. Select CALM or SALM type object from Mooring category.

3. Press Next button.
4. Specify the number of anchors for the ship mooring from 1 to 10, input the buoy orientation and press
Finish button.
5. Position the cursor on the selected place and click the left mouse button. The image of a buoy will
appear on the chart:
On visualization screen the object will be displayed as:
289
Setting Floating Dock

Floating dock object can be used as a mooring object. To set the object, use the following procedure:
1. Call the list of object categories, and from Mooring category select Floating dock type object and press
Next.
2. Enter the object aspect angle.
3. Enter the object deepening value.
5. Position the cursor in the selected point and click the left mouse button. Located on the dock are points
where lines from the ship can be sent to:
Setting Floating Fender

During the ship berthing alongside the wall or other ships, an object representing a floating fender model
can be used. To set the object, use the following procedure:
1. Call the list of object categories.
2. Select Floating fender (6 m/9 m) object from Mooring category.
4. Enter the object orientation (by angle) and press Finish button.
5. Position the object on the chart and click the left mouse button. The object will be fixed on the chart.
6. Lines for fastening the fenders can be sent from the fender itself or from any other mooring point on the
ship.
290
On visualization screen, the object will be displayed as:
Note: If the line is sent from the fender, its length will always be fixed. If the line is sent from the ships, it
will be controlled just like any other line. Fenders can be connected with each other.
Setting Laser Docking System

The exercise can be supplemented with a Laser Docking System which measures distance from the wall
to the ship in the process of mooring.
The system consists of two laser sensors and a large digital display board. The laser sensors are placed
on the edge of the mooring wall, so it is advisable to display mooring wall contours on the exercise chart.
The range of laser sensor is 200 meters.
To set an object on the exercise chart, perform the following procedure:

1. Call the list of object categories. From Mooring category, select Laser Docking System type object.
2. Press Next button. The screen will display General window containing the initial object setting
parameters.
3. Enter the display board orientation (by angle) and press Finish button.
4. Left-click on the chart, to specify the place where the display board should be installed.
5. Left-click on the mooring wall, to specify the place where the first laser sensor should be installed.
291
6. Left-click on the mooring wall, to specify the place where the second sensor should be installed:
The circle areas on the chart show the ranges of the laser sensors (the circle areas are displayed, if the
sensor or display board is selected on the chart):
To change orientation of the display board and sensors:

1. Choose General properties item from the object context menu.
2. On the General page enter the orientation (by angle) of the display board (Orientation field) and left/ right
sensors (Left/Right fields).
To change the display board settings:

1. Choose General properties item from the object context menu.
292
2. On the Board settings page set the safe speed value and dangerous speed value.
Note: The green indicator lights up, when the ship speed is less than the safe speed value. The yellow
indicator lights up, when the ship speed is more that the safe speed value but less than dangerous speed
value. The red indicator lights up, when the ship speed is more than the dangerous speed value.
To move or rotate the sensors or display board, use the objects context menu.
The display board shows the following information:

l Speed range (red indicator if the speed is higher than 15 cm/s, yellow – from 15 to 7 cm/s, green – less
than 7 cm/s);
l Ship motion direction (R – ship approaching the wall, E – moving from the wall);
l Ship speed, cm/s (2-position digital indicator);
l Distance from the laser sensor to the ship hull along the wall normal, m (3-position digital indicator).
293
Setting Oil Platforms

There are three types of oil platform (Oil platform, Oil platform 1, Oil platform 2).
To set an oil platform object, use the following procedure:

1. Call the list of object categories, select Oil platform (Oil platform 1, 2) type object from Mooring
category and press Next button.
2. Enter the object orientation (by angle).
4. Position the cursor on the chart and click the left mouse button. A contour of the object will appear on
the chart.
On visualization screen, the object will be displayed as:
Setting SPM Object

The SPM (Single Point Mooring) object is a beam, rotating freely around its foundation under the effect of a
force applied in the mooring point.
Note: The SPM has only one mooring point which only one line can be sent to.
To set an object, use the following procedure:

1. Call the list of object categories, select SPM (SPM or SPM 2) type object from Mooring category and
press Next button.
2. Enter the object orientation (by angle).
4. Position the cursor on the chart and click the left mouse button. A contour of the object will appear on
the chart.
294
5. All the operations with lines are shown on Lines page of the SPM properties panel.
Work with Balloon Mooring Fenders

In the simulator, some ships models have non-stationary (lowered/heaved) mooring fenders – balloon
fenders. The balloon fenders are used for killing the speed of the ship’s bump against the mooring wall or
another ship’s side.
To set the properties of a balloon fender, use the following procedure:

1. Position the cursor on the ship’s mooring point (except for stern and bow mooring points) to select the
place of sending the balloon fender, and press the right mouse button. The screen will display the
mooring point context menu.
295
2. From the context menu, select the Properties item.

3. On the mooring point properties panel, select the Fender Source tab. The screen will display a page for
setting the balloon fender properties. The mooring point number will be specified in the window
heading:
4. Select the fender colour from the Color drop-down list.

5. Select the fender’s initial status (Onboard or Outboard) from the Initial Status drop-down list.
6. Set the distance from deck in meters in the Distance from deck field.
7. Check the Fluorescent checkbox, if the fender is required to fluoresce in the dark.
8. If the set fender properties should be applied to all the mooring points on the ship, select the Apply
settings to all mode.
9. Press the Apply button to save the selected properties, or press the Defaults button to return to the
initial values. The mooring balloon fender is sent from, will be shown on the chart as a circle:
Note: The Trainee can control the balloon fenders from the Moor panel of the Conning Display (Fenders
page). If the Trainee changed the fender’s initial status in the course of the exercise, the Instructor will see
this in the fender properties window.
296
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Operations with Anchors
OPERATIONS WITH ANCHORS

Setting Anchor Parameters
The setting and editing of the anchor parameters is made before the exercise start on the Anchor page of
the ship properties panel.
1. On the ship properties panel, open the Anchor tab.
2. From the Anchor drop-down list, select the necessary anchor:

o Portside anchor;
o Starboard anchor;
o Stern anchor (if available).
3. From the Anchor type drop-down list, select the anchor type:
o Custom;
o Gruson’s;
o Hall’s;
o Stockless;
o Stokes’s.
4. If the Gruson’s, Hall’s, Stockless or Stokes’s type of anchor is chosen, set the anchor mass in the
Anchor mass field. Values and coefficients of anchor holding power for different types of seabed will be
automatically calculated in the Anchor holding power group box.
297
5. If the Custom type of anchor is chosen, set the values of anchor holding power for different types of
seabed (mud, sand, gravel, rock). The anchor mass value will be automatically calculated.
Note: The type of the seabed is selected by using the Overall Condition Manager or/and Composite
condition zone (see "Selecting Seabed Type" on page 299)

o Chain gauge (mm);
o Winch speed (m/min).
7. Press the Apply button to apply the set parameter values.
298
8. To view default values, press and hold down the Show defaults button. While the button is released,
the last values set by the Instructor are displayed.
9. Press the Set defaults button, if it is necessary to set the default values.
Selecting Seabed Type

The dangerous ground touch speed depends on the type of seabed, if the Simulate damaged state after
collision check box is selected on the Misc tab of the Settings panel (see "Miscellaneous Settings" on page
69). In this case, the touching of the vessel with the ground at the speed that exceeds the dangerous
speed for this type of seabed will cause damage to the vessel.
The are following types of seabed can be selected: Mud, Sand, Gravel, Rock.
It is possible to set seabed type:

l for entire sailing area;
l in the expected anchorage site.
To select the seabed type for entire sailing area:
3. In the Overall Condition Manager window, open the Seabed tab.
4. Select the seabed type from the Seabed drop-down list.

In the expected anchorage site, the Instructor can build up a zone and set the seabed type for this zone:
1. In the Environment category, select the Composite condition zone object.
2. In the Composite zone window, check the Seabed parameter and press the Finish button.
3. Draw the zone on the chart.
299
4. Open the zone context menu and select General properties.

5. In the composite condition zone properties window, open the Seabed tab and select the seabed type
from the Seabed drop-down list.
Note: Instructor can set the anchor holding power for all seabed types, see "Setting Anchor Parameters" on
page 297
On-Chart Control of Anchors

To put the ship to or take it from the anchor before and after the exercise start, the Instructor can use a
chart.
Putting Ship to Anchor

To drop an anchor, use the following procedure:
1. Increase the display scale so that the anchor points become visible on the object contour. Anchor
points are shown as empty squares at the bow of the ship:
2. Position the cursor on any anchor point, press the left mouse button and, without releasing it, drag the
cursor beyond the object contour. The screen will display the anchor chain, going from the anchor point
to the cursor.
300
3. Release the left mouse button. A picture of the anchor will appear on the chart.
After the exercise start, a mark (touch point) will appear on the picture of the anchor line, indicating that the
anchor chain has reached the ground. The line from the anchor to the touch point shows the part of the
anchor chain lying on the ground; from the touch point to the ship – the sagging part of the anchor chain.
Taking Ship from Anchor

To heave the anchor, use the following procedure:
1. Position the cursor on the anchor and press the left mouse button.
2. Without releasing the mouse button, drag it within the ship contour.
301
Control of Anchor Winches during Exercise

Control of anchor winches in course of the exercise could be carried out from the Anchor page of the ship
properties panel.
1. Open the ship properties panel and select Anchor tab. The Anchor page will appear:
2. Select the anchor which should be dropped: port anchor (in the left-hand part of the panel) and/or
starboard anchor (in the right-hand part of the panel) or stern anchor (to control the stern anchor winch,
press the Bow button on the panel).
3. Set the anchor chain length in shackles by using the arrow buttons (the length of anchor chain is
measured from the hawse).
4. To drop the anchor, use the following buttons:
o Drop – the anchor chain will be dropped by the anchor weight;
o Pay Out – to pay out the anchor chain at a rate equal to 50% of the anchor “Drop” speed;
o Walk Out – to walk out the chain at a winch speed set by the “Winch speed” parameter.
Note: The chart will display a sign with a picture of an anchor (if the length of the anchor chain is smaller
than the depth of the bottom, the sign will not appear). The chain will continue to be paid out until its length
reaches the set value, whereupon the automatic anchor chain stop is actuated, and the Hold indicator
button lights up. The point where the anchor chain touches the ground will be shown on the chart.
302
5. To view information about the state of the anchor chain, use the following digital displays:
o Length – length of the paid out anchor chain;
o Tension – anchor chain tension, in tons;
o Speed – winch speed, m/s;
o Direction – anchor chain direction relative to the ship centreline plane, degrees;
o Holding Power – anchor’s holding power, tons.
6. To stop the anchor chain motion manually, press the Hold button.
7. To heave the anchor chain, press the Up button. At the moment when the anchor breaks away from the
ground, the anchor mark will disappear from the chart.The anchor chain will be heaved until its length
becomes equal to 0 (the anchor is in the hawse).
8. For the emergency let-go of the anchor chain inner end, press the Release button.
9. Check the Water edge checkbox to stop the winch when the anchor reaches the water surface.
Note: The Trainee can control the anchor winches from the conning display Moor panel (the Anchors
page).
303
TOWING OPERATIONS
Setting Bridle
Usually, towing operations are performed with the help of special towing bridle.
To set bridle, use the following procedure:

2. In ship contour, choose the points to which the towing bridle will be connected Click the first mooring
point, then click the second mooring point.
3. To set bridle length, move the central point of bridle (“fish plate”) and left-click (the operation is possible
before starting the exercise). The position of the “fish plate” will be fixed on the screen.
4. Click the tug fastening point, and then click the “fish plate”.
5. Place, for an instant, the cursor above the image of bridle. The screen will display the tip with bridle
length.
To change the bridle properties:

1. Open the bridle context menu and select Properties menu item.
304
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Towing Operations
2. To change length of a bridle, enter new value in the Length field.

3. To change chain’s properties (size and break force): clear the Default check box and enter new values
in the Chain size and Break force fields.
5. All bridle properties will be displayed on the ship properties panel.
6. To delete towing bridle, call the bridle context menu and select Delete bridle item.
Note: For towing operations involving a target ship, use the advanced model.
305
Creating Barge Tow

For use as towing/pushing objects, the barges can be arranged in different tows. Examples of such tows
are listed below.
Example 1. Pushing two barges tow
1. Position barges and push boat on chart in accordance with desired tow configuration.
2. Specify the characteristics of mechanical interaction of each object to prevent tow collision (Option tab
on the properties panel).
3. Set properties of mooring points on the push boat and barges.
4. Connect barges by lines.
5. Connect barge tow and push boat.
Example 2. Towing two barges tow
1. Position barges and push boat on chart in accordance with desired tow configuration.
2. Set properties of mooring points on the push boat and barges.
3. Connect barges by lines and specify the characteristics of mechanical interaction of each object if it is
required (Option tab on the properties panel).
4. Send bridle from the first barge and send cable from tug and fixed it on “fish plate”.
Note: Characteristics of mechanical and hydrodynamic interaction, as well as the properties of lines and
mooring winches, can be set in much the same way as in the preparation of mooring exercises.
306
Operations with Tow Winches

Setting Winch Point Properties
Diesel and hydraulic winches are used on some tug models (own tugs and tug- targets 6DoF). These tugs
besides of mooring points have special winch points which are displayed on the ship contour as
rhombuses.
The winch points have the set of parameters which determine the properties of lines and tow winch.
The winch point properties panel can be opened before the simulator session start, and also after the start
if no line is sent from this point.
To set the properties of the winch point, use the following procedure:
1. Increase the display scale so that the winch points become visible on the object contour.
2. Point the cursor on the winch point and press the right mouse button.
3. From the context menu which will appear, select the Properties item. The screen will display a window
with opened Line source tab.
307
4. In the Material group box, select the line material from the drop-down list: steel wire, aramid, dyneema,
nylon, polyester, polypropylene. The line extensibility will display in the Extensibility field. The line
break force will display in the Break force field.The color indicator will show the color of line on the
visualization screen.
Note: Colored lines will be displayed on the visualization screen, only if the Colored check box is selected
on the Option tab of the ship properties panel.
5. To change the line break force value:

a. Open the Material properties tab.
b. In the Breakforce column enter new value for required type of material, press <Enter> key and the
Apply button.
c. To apply new break force value to all winch points, check Apply to all check box and press the
Apply button.
d. To return to the initial values, press the Defaults button.
6. To continue the editing of line properties, open the Line source tab.
7. To close the properties window, press the Close button.
8. On the Line source tab, check the Lightweight line checkbox if the line is required to be lighter.
9. If necessary, enter maximum line length in the Line length field.
10. To select Auto winch mode, check the Auto winch checkbox and enter the line maximum tension next
to it. After exercise start the winch will have “Winch” state. When the tension of a line will reach the set
value, the state of the winch will automatically change on “Stop”.
11. Select the winch’s initial status from the Initial status drop-down list:
12. In the Winch force field enter the winch pulling force.
13. If it’s necessary, check the Auto render checkbox for the line to be rendered when subjected to large
loads.
14. To set a line consisting of two different parts – line’s general part and tail (the tail connects line’s
general part with towed vessel):
a. Set Tail check box.
308
b. Set length of the line’s tail in the Length field.

c. Set material of the line’s tail in the Material field. The color indicator shows the color of line’s tail on
the visualization screen (only if the Colored check box is selected on the Option tab of the ship
properties panel). The break force of the line’s tail will display in the Break force field. The break
force can be changed on the Material properties tab (see step № 5).
15. Check the Apply to all check box, if the specified properties should be applied to all the winch points on
the ships.
16. Press the Apply button to save the selected properties, or the Defaults button to return to the initial
values.
Hydraulic Winch Control

The model of a hydraulic tow winch is used on some tugs objects which have special winch points, for
example: Z-Drive tug 1 (№ 6), Z-Drive tug 3 (No 8, 9, 10) and Fin First VS tug 1 (№ 5).
Winches and pins are controlled on the Winch tab of the tug properties panel. The name of the tab specifies
the number of the winch point, e.g., Winch: 10.
The winch control on the Winch tab is possible only if the exercise is already started.
309
Pins Control
The instructor can raise or lower the pins on the Winch page both, before and after the exercise start. To do
this, use four buttons in the left bottom corner of the page:
1. To raise a pin, press the button in the upper row: Port (portside pin), Stbd (starboard pin);
2. To lower a pin, press the button in the bottom row: Port (portside pin), Stbd (starboard pin).
Winch Control Modes

There are two tow winch control modes:
l Mode of manual control of the line slack away/heave speed and direction;
l Mode of maintaining the set tension. In this mode, depending on the tension control position, the line is
either heaved or slacked away to maintain the constant set tension.
To turn on the manual line slack away/heave speed and direction control mode:
1. The Clutch button is pressed by default, i.e. the cohesion is on.
2. Use the Brake handle, to release the winch brake which is set by default at the maximum braking
force.
3. Use the Speed handle, to set the winch power in per cent:
o Push up the handle, to heave the line;
o Pull down the handle, to slack away the line.
4. Use the Gear 1 and Gear 2 buttons to switch the transmission of the winch drive clutch.
The mode is turned off by pressing the Tension button or the EMCY breakdown button.
To turn on Tension mode:

1. On the Tension scale, set the towing tension per cent from 0 to 100% and press the Tension button (the
button will be backlighted):
310
Note: The value of the tow line pulling force is set on the properties panel of winch point (the Winch force
parameter).
2. The mode is turned off by pressing the Tension button again (the button backlighting will disappear), or
by pressing the EMCY breakdown button.
As the EMCY breakdown button is pressed, the line is slacking away.
Winch Faults Setting

To set winch faults:
1. Press the Faults button on the winch control panel.
2. Check\clear the winch faults in the list-box.
Table 14. Possible hydraulic winch faults
Fault name Explanations
Lost Engine The winch engine is out of order. The line length does not change When the Speed handle is
moved, the winch is actually in the "Stop" state
Lost Break The brake is out of order. Moving the Brake handle does not influence the line slacking speed
as if the brake is in the zero position
Break The line is not slacked away as if the brake is set at the maximum value
Jammed
Lost Tension The Tension control is out of order as if the Tension handle is in the minimum position
Lost Engine Moving the Speed handle has no impact on the winch state
control
Lost Break Moving the Brake handle has no impact on the breaking effort
Control
Lost Tension Moving the Tension handle has no impact on the tension control effort
Control
311
Table 14. Possible hydraulic winch faults (continued)
Fault name Explanations
Lost clutch The Clutch button is out of order. The button changes its state, however, the winch operation
control does not
Diesel Winch Control

The model of the diesel tow winch functions with the Conventional twin screw tug 4 (bp 46.3t) which has a
special line fastening point (No 9). The winch control console is available on the simulator bridge of this tug
type.
On the instructor workplace, the tow winch is controlled in the course of the simulator session from the
Winch page of the ship properties panel.
The Winch page contains:

l Drum operating mode setting buttons:
o In – to heave;
o Dog – to stop;
o Out – to render.
l Winch power control telegraph (scale from 0 to 100%).

l Brake control telegraph (scale from 0 to 100%).
l Gear 1 and Gear 2 buttons to switch the transmission of the winch drive clutch.
l Winch RPM indicator.
l Clutch button and Clutch engaged indicator.
l Breakout – button for the emergency line break.
312
l Breakdown – button for the emergency winch brake release. After pressing the button, the line is
slacking away.
l Four pairs of control buttons for the stern pins directing the tow line (two on the starboard – Stbd 1, Stbd
2 and two on the portside – Port 1, Port 2), where:
o top row Up buttons are used for lifting the pins;
o bottom row Down buttons are used for lowering the pins.
l Power button for turning on the pin power supply.
l Hold down button for turning on holding down of the line’s vertical motion. This is necessary to prevent
the line sliding down from the pins.
l Faults button for winch faults setting.
To switch from one drum operating mode to another, the line is required to have no speed, and the Power
telegraph handle should be on the zero.
In render mode with the gear engaged, the winch is controlled with the Power telegraph. With the gear
disengaged, the line is rendered by the force of the line itself.
Note: Control of the starboard drum winch drive is currently not implemented.
313
OPERATIONS WITH AUTOMATIC TUGS

Automatic tugs are the tug-targets (advanced models) working under automatic mode.
In automatic mode the tug is controlled by the "virtual pilot", who executes commands, given either by the
Trainee from Conning Display or by the Instructor.
Automatic tugs can work with own ships or with ship-targets (advanced models).
In the automatic mode the tug can perform several typical maneuvers without manual handling of it
controls:
l Follow to point;
l Escort;
l Push;
l Pull;
l Attach.
Depending on performed operation, the tug contour on the chart changes its colour according to the
following table.
Table 15. Ship contour color depending on the ship status
Status/Operation Color
Going to carry out operation Green
Carrying out an operation Violet
Free Black
Selected as an object Orange
The tug-target can be reserved for the operation with one ship. The requests for operations from other ships
are ignored at this time.
A non-reserved tug-target can work with any other ship, performing operation as requested (each operation
is completely performed, to perform the next operation, the previous one is not stopped).
Note: Work with non-reserved automatic tugs is possible only on the Instructor’s workplace. To switch the
tug to the automatic mode on the Conning Display, the Trainee has to reserve it first.
314
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Operations with Automatic Tugs
Automatic Tugs General Settings

To enter automatic tugs general settings, use the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Settings… menu item and open the Autotugs tab on the Settings panel.
2. To switch on/off highlighting autotugs with color on the chart, select/clear Highlight autotugs with color
check box.
If this option is on, contours of autotugs are highlighted with different colors according to current status
of autotug or execution operation.
Note: It is impossible to switch off highlithing with color on the Conning Display.
3. To allow/prohibit autotugs passing through the obstacles, select/clear Allow passing through obstacles
check box.
4. To switch on/off option of building the routes of autotugs through the narrow channels, select/clear
Build routes through the narrow channels check box.
If this option is on, the tug can go through a narrow channel at the expense of decreasing its own safety
criteria. It is recommended to switch on this option only when necessary, otherwise the decrease of
the safety criteria can impact the tug-ship interaction and result in collision.
5. To switch on/off reduction of the maximum acceleration for autotugs, select/clear Reduce maximum
acceleration check box.
6. To confirm the settings, click OK.
Reserving and Releasing of Tug

The tug-target can be reserved for operation with own ship or ship-target (advanced model).
The tug-target, engaged by one ship, cannot be reserved by another ship unless it is released by “Let go”
command.
To reserve the tug-target, use the following procedure:

1. Open the tug-target context menu and select Reserve item.
2. Position the cursor on the contour of the ship which the tug-target should work with, and click the left
mouse button.
315
The tug-target will switch to the automatic mode. Hovering on the tug, the screen displays a prompt
containing the tug-target current status: “Working with…” and the name of the ship which the tug-target is
operating with. Requested tug is marked with “auto” label on the chart and highlighted with bold contour:
Also the tug-target could be reserved from Tug page of the own ship (or 6-DoF target ship) properties panel.
1. Open the ship context menu and select General properties item.
2. On properties panel, select Tug tab.
Note: Data on the target tugs, available in an exercise, is presented in a tabular form, where the following
is specified: Name – tug-target name; State – tug-target current operation mode; Object – the name of the
own ship which the tug-target is working with; % – current thrust value; current thrust direction, deg.
3. Select the free tug-target from the list and press Reserve button.
To release the reserved tug-target, press Free button on the Tug page of the own ship (ship-target)
properties panel or select Let go command from the tug-target context menu.
Basic Operations
There are the following basic operations with automatic tugs:
l Follow to point;
l Escort;
l Push;
l Pull;
l Attach;
l Thrust.
316
Follow to Point
In this mode the tug-target follows to absolute geographic point specified by Trainee or Instructor, avoiding
mobile and static obstacles at maximum available speed, and lies in the drift at point of destination.
To switch the tugboat to the “follow to point” mode, use the following procedure:
1. Open the tug-target context menu and select Follow to point item.
2. Position the cursor in the point of destination and click the left mouse button.
Having received the command, the tug-target will start proceeding to the set point at the maximum speed.
Hovering on the tug, the screen displays a prompt containing the tug-target current status: “Follow”:
Escort
In this mode the tug-target follows the ship at some escort position, specified by Trainee or Instructor. Tug-
target moves to escort position avoiding mobile and static obstacles at maximum available speed.
To switch the tugboat to the “escort” mode, use the following procedure:
1. Open the tug-target context menu and select Escort item.
2. If tug-target hasn’t reserved, position the cursor on the contour of the ship which the tug should escort,
and click the left mouse button.
3. Position the cursor in a point at the selected distance from the ship contour and click the left mouse
button.
Having received the command, the tug-target will start proceeding to the set point at the maximum
speed.
Hovering on the tug, the screen displays a prompt containing the tug-target current status: “Going to
escort” and the name of the ship which the tug-target is operating with:
At the set point, current status turns to “Escort”:
317
Note: The tug-target will be not able to get to the work point unless the ship is proceeding at a speed
greater than the tug-target maximum speed. At destination point, the tug will have the same speed and the
same heading as escorted vessel.
Push
In this mode the tug-target pushes the ship to given point with given thrust. The force direction is limited by
the target tug’s position relative to the pushed ship hull. When “Push” command is given, the following
parameters are set: push position, thrust level, and direction. Thrust level is specified in percents to
maximum bollard pull.
The tug proceeds to position at maximum speed avoiding mobile and static obstacles. At destination point,
the tug lies on specified thrust heading and begin pushing.
Alteration of trust level and direction can be initiated by “Thrust” command.
Note: All tractor tugs (Voith Schneider type) has pushing point at the stern. All reverse tractor tugs (Z-drive
tug) and conventional tugs have pushing point at bow.
To switch the tugboat to the “push” mode, use the following procedure:
1. Open the tug-target context menu and select Push item.
2. Position the cursor on the ship contour at the point where the thrust must be applied, and click the left
mouse button.
3. By moving the mark along the force vector and rotating the tug contour around the fastening point, set
the force value and direction, and click the left mouse button:
Having received the command, the tug-target will start proceeding to the work point at the maximum
speed. Hovering on the tug, the screen displays a prompt containing the tug-target current status: “Going
to push” and the name of the ship which the tug-target is operating with:
318
Having achieved the pushing point, the tug starts pushing the ship in the specified direction. Hovering on
the tug, the screen displays a prompt containing the tug-target current status: “Push”, the name of the ship
which the tug-targets operating with, force value, direction of force vector (in degrees) and side of the ship
which the work point is situated on: port side (PS) or starboard (SB):
Pull
In this mode the tug-target can pull vessel on a towline of given length at any direction limited by ±90
degrees to the perpendicular to the ship bow in fastening point. The towing mode is initialized by “Pull”
command whereby the following parameters are set: fastening point to the ship, towing position, thrust
level and direction.
Alteration of trust level and direction can be initiated by “Thrust” command.
To switch the tugboat to the “pull” mode, use the following procedure:
1. Open the tug-target context menu and select Pull item.
2. Position the mouse cursor on the mooring point on the ship contour and click the left button. The line
will be fixed on the mooring point:
3. Position the mouse cursor on the point on chart where the tug-target is required to pull the ship from,
and click the left button. The mouse cursor will assume the shape of tug-target contour with a force
vector. The contour will be fixed on the mooring point:
319
4. By moving the mark along the force vector and rotating the tugboat contour around the mooring point,
set the force value and direction and click the left mouse button.
Having received the command, the target tug will start proceeding to the work point at the maximum
speed. Hovering on the tug, the screen displays a prompt containing the target tug current status: “Going to
pull” and the name of the ship which the target tug is operating with:
Having achieved the pulling point, the tug starts pulling the ship in specified direction. Tug’s contour
becomes violet. Hovering on the tug, as the tug starts to pull the screen displays a prompt containing the
target tug current status: “Pull”, the name of the ship which the target tug is operating with, force value,
direction of force vector (in degrees) and side of the ship which the work point is situated on: port side (PS)
or starboard (SB):
320
Hovering on the tug winch which is used to pull, when the tug’s line is fixed the screen displays a prompt
containing winch current status: “Veer” if the line is winded off freely, “Winch” if the line is winded up on the
winch, or “Stop” if length of line is fixed, current length of line and force of winch (in tons). As current status
is “Veer” or “Winch” the force is equal to 0 ton.
Attach
To imitate “push-pull” operations, the tug’s can be made fast either by bow or by stern line to any mooring
point on vessel.
The line can be fastened by giving “Attach” command.
At the “Attach” command, the tug moves close to mooring point and sets the short line either from bow
(reverse tractor and conventional tugs) or stern winch (tractor tug) to specified knight of the vessel.
Note: Depending on type, all tugs have either one aft towing point (tractor tug) or two towing points: one on
bow and one on stern.
To switch the tugboat to the “attach” mode, use the following procedure:
1. Open the tugboat context menu and select Attach item.
2. Position the cursor on the mooring point on the own ship contour and click the left mouse button.
Having received the command, the target tug will start proceeding to the mooring at the maximum speed.
Hovering on the tug, the screen displays a prompt containing the target tug current status: “Going to
attach” and the name of the ship which the target tug is operating with. As the tug is on the beam of
mooring point, picture of fastened line appears on the screen. Current status of tug is not changed at the
same time.
321
The tug moves to mooring point being connected to the ship by the line. Hovering on the tug, as the tug is
attached the screen displays a prompt containing the target tug current status: “Attach” and the name of
the ship which the target tug is operating with:
While the tug is fastened on short line by using the “Attach” command, the direction and level of thrust can
be altered by “Thrust” command. The mooring point is not changed at the same time. Whether the status
will be “Push” or “Pull” is dependent on direction of force vector relative to the ship. At the same time, the
current status of the tug contained in prompt is changed to “Pull (attached)” or “Push (attached)”.
Note: As the “Pull” command is sent the attached tug stays attached in the same point. As the “Push”
command is sent the attached tug is going to push in specified point but stays attached in the same
position in which it has been attached before if to move in the pushing point does not need to gush of line
over the superstructures of the ship.
Current status of the tug winch, length of line and force in the “Attach” mode are contained in the prompt
just as in the “Pull” mode.
To unfasten the tug, either any different context menu command must be selected except of “Pull” or
“Push”.
Thrust
The thrust level and direction can be altered by Thrust command, which appears in the context menu after
the “pull” or “push” and “attach” mode have being switched.
To alter the thrust level and direction, use the following procedure:
1. Open the tug-target context menu and select Thrust item.
2. By moving the mark along the force vector and rotating the tug contour around the mooring point, set
the force value and direction and click the left mouse button.
322
Automatic Tug Control Page

To control a tugboat operating in the automatic mode, use the Control page of the tugboat’s properties
panel.
The Control page contains:

l Status line which displays the tugboat’s current operation mode;
l Lever for setting the thrust value (0–100%); the arrow-buttons above/under the lever are used for
moving the lever’s handle to one scale point.
l Buttons with arrows for changing the thrust direction (from -90 degrees to +90 degrees with a step of 5
degrees):
At the right part of the page you can set the maximum power of the auto tug relative to nominal in the
"Push" and "Pull" operation mode:
1. In the Push field set the maximum power of the auto tug in the “Push” mode.
2. In the Pull field set the maximum power of the auto tug in the “Pull” mode.
3. Select maximum power units of measurement relative to nominal: tons or %.
4. Click Apply.
323
NAVIGATION IN ICE CONDITIONS

The simulator allows imitating the ship motion in different ice conditions.
The simulator can be used for creating exercises whose purpose is:
l training in the ship control when proceeding in the ice;
l training in ship control in overcoming ice crosspieces, collisions with single ice floes and ice chipping
at the channel edges;
l training in ship control when sailing in the areas with icebergs.
In creating exercises for sailing in the ice, use Ice object which sets ice condition in the selected zone on
the exercise chart.
Work with Ice Zone

Creation of Ice Zone
To create an ice zone, perform the following:
1. Before the session start, select Ice object in the Environment category and press Finish button.
2. Set the cursor on the chart and left-click to fix the start zone point.
3. Move the cursor to the next point and left-click.
4. Repeat the previous action to construct all zone sections.
5. To finish the zone construction, right-click.
Setup of Ice Zone Properties

To set general settings of the ice zone:
1. Right-click on the ice zone contour. A context menu of the ice zone will appear.
2. Choose the Properties item in the context menu. The Ice property window will appear.
324
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Navigation in Ice Conditions
3. On the General tab in the Ice window, set the following parameters:
o Speed –speed of the ice zone motion;
o Course – course of the ice zone motion;
4. Or, check the Drift checkbox to let the ice zone move in accordance with the set weather conditions
(current direction and speed).
5. Press the Apply button. After the exercise start the ice zone will follow the set course with the set
speed or will drift.
To set ice parameters in the ice zone, perform the following:
1. Open the the Ice parameters tab of the ice zone properties panel.
2. Select an ice type from the Ice type drop-down list: Ice field; Broken ice; Brash ice; Pancake ice; Small
floe; Nilas ice.
3. If the Ice field type is selected, set the following parameters:
o Thickness – ice thickness from 0.1 to 5.0 m.
o Concentration – ice concentration from 1 to 9.
o Crosspiece – distance between edges of channels (0–70 m).
Note: If the distance between two channels is smaller than a certain distance, the solid ice crosspiece is
destroyed. If the parameter is set at 0, the crosspiece is not destroyed. The channel width is set in the
characteristics of the Ice Breaker 1 ice class (see "Setting Ice Class of Ice Breaker" on page 334).
o Freezing – time of the channel getting covered with ice (2–360 min).
o Compacting – speed of broken ice accretion after the ship (1–500 cm/min).
o Intensification – switch on/off the intensification of the radar echo from the ice field.
325
o Hummocks – switch on/off the display of hummocks on the radar picture during the visualization on
the bridge.
o Detection range – display of ice edge on the radar, in nautical miles.
o Number of fisher groups on ice – number of fishers’ groups located at random which will be
displayed on the ice zone during the visualisation.
4. For the other ice types set the following parameters:
o Thickness – ice thickness from 0.1 to 5.0 m;
o Concentration – ice concentration from 1 to 9;
Note: The rudder is blocked if a vessel moves astern at a speed of more than 0.05 m/sec through ice with a
thickness of more than 0.3 m, at the rudder angle of more than 5 degrees.
To set parameters of the ice zone boundary on-chart display, perform the following:
1. On the Bound tab of the Ice window select values from the drop-down lists:
o Colour – colour of the zone boundary line (blue by default);

o Line – type of the zone boundary line;
o Thickness – thickness of the zone boundary line.
2. Select the Hide on scale decrease mode as required.
326
Movement of Ice Zone on Route

An ice zone can move on the route. To set an ice zone on the route, perform the following:
To plot the route of the ice zone:

1. Right-click on the ice zone contour and select the Begin route item in the context menu.
2. Plot the route for the ice zone.
To assign an ice zone to any plotted route:

1. Right-click on the ice zone contour and select the Assign to route item in the context menu.
2. Left-click on the route.
Note: The ice zone will be moving so that the start point of the ice zone moves along the route line.
To unassign the ice zone form the route, select the Unassign from route item in the context menu of the ice
zone.
The route of the ice zone hasn’t properties.
Creation of Hummocks
The hummocks are displayed only for the ice zone of the "Ice field" type. To create a hummock on the ice
zone, perform the following:
1. Right-click on the ice zone contour and choose the Add hummock item in the context menu.
2. Draw a hummock of an arbitrary shape on the ice zone.
3. To finish drawing, right-click.
4. Right-click on the hummock line.

5. Choose the Properties item in the context menu of the hummock. A window for setting hummock
parameters will appear.
327
6. Set the Width and Height of the hummock if necessary.

7. Press the Apply button to confirm the changes.
To delete a hummock, right-click on the hummock line and select the Remove hummock item in the context
menu.
Creation of Channels
The channels are displayed only for the ice zone of the "Ice field" type. To create a channel in the ice field,
perform the following:
1. Right-click on the ice zone contour and choose the Add channel item in the context menu.
2. Draw a channel of an arbitrary shape on the ice zone.
3. To finish drawing, right-click.
4. Right-click on the channel line.

5. Choose the Properties item in the context menu of the channel. A window for setting channel
parameters will appear.
6. Set the width of the channel if necessary.

7. Press the Apply button to confirm the changes.
To delete a channel, right-click on the channel line and select the Remove channel item in the context menu.
328
Setting Ship Ice Class

For ship and ship target, you can set an ice class (LU1–LU9) which determines the "maximum speed of
proceeding in ice" and "maximum ice thickness".
To set an ice class, use the following procedure:

1. On the ship properties panel, open Ice Class page.
2. Select the ship ice class from the list (LU1–LU9).
3. If the Custom ice class is selected, you can set the following values:
a. In the In channel navigation group box set the ship speed (Max speed) and ice thickness (Max
thickness) values.
b. In the Navigation in broken ice group box set the ship speed (Max speed) and ice thickness (Max
thickness) values.
329
Setting Ice Repulsion

Ice repulsion can be set up for any ship model of the ice class after starting the exercise. For this, use the
1. On the ship properties panel, open the Ice Repulsion tab.
2. Select the control mode: Combined (set up by default) or Separate.

3. If the Combined control type is selected, set value for the common multiplier of all forces by using the
slider.
4. If the Separate control type is selected, set the values for each multiplier separately by using the
sliders:
o Longitudinal – multiplier of a longitudinal force;
o Transversal – multiplier of a lateral force;
o Turning – multiplier of the torque.
5. To reset values, press the Reset button.
330
Setting Ice Accretion

To set ice accretion, use the following procedure:
1. On the ship properties panel, open the Ice accretion tab.
2. By suing the slider, set the depth of the icing layer on deck and superstructures (from 0 to 2 m).
3. To close the window, press the Close button.
Note: The visualization screen will show the ice accretion if the Seagull 6000 visualization is used. Ship
stability during the ice accretion is considerably disturbed.
Operations with Icebergs

The simulator allows imitating the ship motion in the areas with icebergs.
To create the exercise with icebergs, use the Iceberg object from the Environment category.
There are six types of icebergs depend on size, and each size type has three visual types.
To set Iceberg object, use the following procedure:

1. Open the objects category window and select the Iceberg object from the Environment category. Press
the Next button. The Iceberg type window will be displayed.
2. Select the iceberg size category, using the slider: Growler, Bergy bit, Small, Medium, Large, Very
Large.
3. Select the visual type for selected iceberg size category: 1, 2, 3.
Note: To show description of the all iceberg types, see Table 16. You cannot change the iceberg type after
the setting object on the chart.
331
4. Press the Next button. The General window will be displayed.

5. Set the initial iceberg speed in the Speed field.
Note: The selected speed is only initial characteristic and it is changed during the exercise by inertia or
under the influence of external conditions.
6. Set the initial iceberg course in the Course field.

7. Set the object’s orientation (by angle) in the Orientation field.
8. Press the Finish button and set the object on the chart.
Iceberg object can be seen visually and is shown on the radar.
Each iceberg has one or several mooring points and can be used for towing by own ship or ship target.
332
If the ship collides with an iceberg, a relevant message appears on the Events panel. In the case of
collision of the big vessel with small iceberg, the iceberg can be automatically removed from the exercise
in a few seconds.
The iceberg can move on route. You can plot the route for iceberg (use the Begin route item from the
iceberg context menu), or assign the iceberg to plotted route (use the Assign to route item from the iceberg
context menu).
The properties of route waypoints and segments cannot be set for iceberg route.
Table 16: Overview on the icebergs types
Size Category Underwater Part, m Above-water Part, m Visual Skin

(one of three possible skins)
Growler 1.3 Less than 1 m
(5 m)
Bergy Bit 9.5 1–5m
(15 m)
Small 37.5 5 – 15 m
(60 m)
333
Table 16: Overview on the icebergs types (continued)
Size Category Underwater Part, m Above-water Part, m Visual Skin

(one of three possible skins)
Medium 139.5 15 – 45 m
(120 m)
Large 270 45 – 75 m
(200 m)
Very Large 307.5 Over 75 m
(over 200 m)
Note: Types of icebergs in NTPRO are designed in accordance with International Ice Patrol classification.
Operations with Ice Breaker

To set the Ice Breaker ice class, use the Ice Class page of she ship's properties panel (for more
information, see "Setting Ice Class of Ice Breaker" on page 334)
To control the Ice Breaker, use the Control page of the ship's properties panel (for more information, see
"Control of Ice Breaker" on page 335).
Setting Ice Class of Ice Breaker

For Ice Breaker ship model, you can set an ice class (LL6–LL9), which determines the “maximum speed of
proceeding in ice” and “maximum ice thickness”.
To set an ice class, use the following procedure:

1. On the ship properties panel, open Ice Class page.
334
2. Select the ship ice class from the list (LL6–LL9).
3. If the Custom ice class is selected, you can set the following ice navigation limits:
o Max speed – maximum ship speed.
o Max thickness – maximum ice thickness.
4. Set the following channel characteristics:

o Rel. breadth – relative canal width;
o Rejection zone – temporary zone of broken ice ejection by the propeller behind the ship stern (sec).
Note: By taking into account the temporary rejection zone and icebreaker speed, you can calculate a safe
distance for a ship following the icebreaker.
Control of Ice Breaker

The icebreaker is a diesel-electric ship. Nine diesel generators produce current which is fed to three
tandem electric motors.
Each electric motor rotates its fixed pitch propeller. Accordingly, rpm of the portside, central and starboard
propellers depend on:
l number of diesel generators connected to each electric motor (one, two or three);
l rpm of diesel generators providing different current to the electric motor controller;
l set electric motor controller position.
The direction of rotation at ahead speeds for the central and starboard propellers is clockwise, and counter
clockwise for the portside motor.
The central propeller rotates in water streams produced by side propellers, so its rpm may be lower, all
other things being equal.
335
To control icebreakers, use the following procedure:

1. Open the object context menu and select General properties item.
2. On the properties panel, select Control page.
3. Select diesel generator connection option. To connect one, two or all the three diesel generators, press
one, two or three buttons respectively. Diesel generator connection option is determined by the
pressed (backlighted) buttons:
Note: With the selection of diesel generator connection option, it is the number of pressed buttons which is
important, not their position (top, bottom or in the centre). E.g., option 3-3-3 shows that three diesel
generators are connected simultaneously to each electric motor. Option 1-3-1 means that side electric
motors operate from one diesel generator, whereas the central motor is operated by three-diesel
generator.
4. To disconnect one of diesel generators from the electric motor, press the switched-on button again.
5. Select the mode of electrical power generation by the diesel generators, i.e. rpm of 280, 350 and 380.
All the nine diesel generators will be producing power in the selected mode:
6. To control the electric motors, set the handles of all the three engine telegraphs to the necessary
position.
Note: Each engine telegraph is connected to the corresponding electric motor controller. The telegraph and
controller have from 0 to 25 positions for speeds ahead and from 0 to -25 positions for speeds astern.
To stop the electric motor, set the engine telegraph handle to zero, or disconnect it from all the diesel
generators by releasing the appropriate buttons.
336
Monitoring Trainee Performance

Information on the trainee performance in conducting navigational operations ice conditions is displayed on
Eventspanel.
To view messages, use the following procedure:

1. Choose the View\Panels\Events... menu item.
2. Select Ice Navigation category from the list.
The Events window may display the following events:

l "Safe speed exceeded" – speed permitted for the given ice class exceeded;
l "Ship has contacted ice field by port/starboard/stern/bow at V=…" – contact of the specified part of the
ship with solid ice at a specified speed;
l "Dangerous maneuvering astern under shifted rudder";
l "Propeller impact into a dangerous zone of target vessel" – propeller is in the ice ejection zone from
another ship.
337
FISHING OPERATIONS
A fishing module as part of the Navi-Trainer Professional 5000 simulator is designed to form and develop
navigational and fishing professional skills, such as:
l ship handling during fishing operations (trawling, purse seining and long lining);
l handling of the fishing gear and deck machinery;
l fish-finding and control hydroacoustic devices.
The following models of fishing vessels are simulated:
l Fishery training ship 1–7;
l Fisher;
l Fish boat;
l Seiner;
l Research Ship;
l Trawler.
Shoal Objects
The fish shoal model simulates the behavior of fishing objects. Fish shoal is a cluster of fish, which
consists of several groups of fish. Each group is able to respond to external irritants, while trying to stay in
one cluster. Fish shoal can move with the defined speed and course on a plotted route.
To set fish shoal object, use the following procedure:

1. Open the list of the exercise object categories, select Shoal object in Fishing category and press Next
button. The General window will appear.
2. Set the shoal motion parameters: Course and Speed.

3. Select the shoal density: Rarefied, Medium, Dense.
Note: The shoal density can be changed only before the session start.
338
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Fishing Operations
4. In the Base Depth field enter the shoal base depth.

5. Check the Marking by birds check box, to show birds near the shoal.
6. Press the Next button. The Behavior window will appear.
7. In the Timidity drop-down list select the shoal timidity of passing vessels and trawls (None, Low,
Medium, High, Very high);
8. In the Max Escape Speed field set the maximum speed of the shoal escape, m/s;
9. In the Max Escape Depth field set the maximum depth of the shoal escape, m.
11. Position the cursor in chart point where the object should be located, and left click.
12. By moving the cursor on the screen, set the object area and left click. The object will be fixed on the
chart:
After the session start the object will be displayed as shown below:
Note: When all fish will be caught the Shoal object disappears from the chart.
339
Use the object context menu to do the following:

l move object;
l rotate object;
l change object size;
l begin object route;
l assign object to already plotted route;
l unassign object from route;
l rename object;
l delete object;
l save object as template;
l open the object properties window.
340
Selecting Vertical Sonic Speed Distribution

Vertical sonic speed distribution (VSSD) affects functioning of hydro acoustic fish-fining devices.
To select VSSD in the entire exercise area, use the following procedure:
3. In the Overall Condition Manager window open the Sonic Speed tab.
4. Select the VSSD from the Type drop-down list and press the Apply button.
To select VSSD in the composite condition zone, use the following procedure:
1. In the Environment category, select Composite condition zone object and press the Next button.
2. Check the Sonic speed check box and press the Finish button.
3. Draw the zone on the chart.
4. Open the zone's properties panel and select Sonic Speed page.
5. Select the VSSD from the Type drop-down list and press the Apply button.
341
Pinnacle Objects
Objects of this type are designed for imitating the bottom or pelagic trawl’s footrope catching on a pinnacle.
To set the object, use the following procedure:

1. Open the window with the list of the exercise object categories, select Pinnacle object from Fishing
category and press Next button. The screen will display General window for the input of object
parameters.
2. Enter the object height in the Height field.

3. Enter the object orientation (by angle) in the Orientation field.
4. Select the pinnacle type (Soft\Medium\Hard) from the Type drop-down list.
5. After the end of parameter input, press Finish button.
6. Position the cursor in the chart point where the object should be located, and left click.
7. By moving the cursor on the screen, set the object area and left click. The object will be fixed on the
chart.
To change the properties of the pinnacle, use the following procedure:

1. Open the object’s context menu and select the General properties item.
2. If it is required, change the dimensions of the object in the Wight, Length and Height fields.
3. In the Orientation field set new value of the object’s orientation by angle.
342
4. From the Type drop-down list select other type of the object.
Note: It is impossible to change pinnacle’s properties after start of the training session.
Fishing Buoys
For fishing operations, the exercise may include objects of the Fishing Buoy Line, Fishing Buoy Single,
and Fishing Buoy Zone type.
To set a Fishing Buoy Line, use the following procedure:

1. Open the window with the list of the exercise object categories, in the Fishing category select the
Fishing Buoy Line object and press the Next button:
2. In the Cоunt field set the number of buoys in the line.
4. Position the cursor in the line’s start point and press the left mouse button.
5. Position the cursor in the following point and press the left mouse button.
6. After setting the last point, press the right mouse button. The fishing buoy line will be shown on the
chart in the form of a line with buoys distributed uniformly along its entire length:
To set a single fishing buoy (Fishing Buoy Single), use the following procedure:
Fishing Buoy Single object and press the Next button.
2. Position the cursor in the place where the buoy should be set, and press the left mouse button.
To set a Fishing Buoy Zone, use the following procedure:

Fishing Buoy Zone object and press the Next button.
2. In the the Cоunt field set the number of buoys in the zone.
3. In the Min. distance field set the minimum distance between the buoys.
343

5. Position the cursor in the place of the zone’s first node and press the left mouse button.
6. Position the cursor in the place of the zone’s following node and press the left mouse button.
7. After setting the last node, press the right mouse button. The chart will display a polygon delineating
the fishing buoy zone.
Setting Bottom and Pelagic Trawl

Selection, setting, and control of a trawl are performed by the Trainee on the bridge from the Fishing Gear
control console. The Instructor however can also carry out these operations direct from instructor
workstation.
The trawl can be set from any fishing vessel (own ship and 6 DoF targets) in the course of an exercise.
Setting Trawl from Own Ship

To set the trawl from own ship, use the following procedure:
1. Start the exercise. Open the ship properties panel and select Fishing page.
2. Select a trawl type from the drop-down list of available fishing gear:
o Pelagic trawl (2559);
o Pelagic trawl (2674);
o Bottom trawl (2561);
o Bottom trawl (2517).
344
3. Press Set button to start the trawl setting. After some time, a picture of the trawl will appear on the
chart:
Note: The trawl cannot be set unless the ship is proceeding at a speed of more than 1 knot.
4. Check the Allow trawl’s parameters editing check box, if it is required that the trainee can edit the trawl
parameters during trawling.
To control the trawl winches, use the following procedure:
1. Position the mouse cursor on the picture of a trawl on the chart and right-click. Select General properties
menu item. The screen will display a trawl winch control panel. The panel will display the following
information for each warp:
o length, m (Length);
o tension, t (Tension);
o pay out/heave rate, m\s (Speed).
2. To pay out trawl warps, set the winch levers to the topmost position.
345
3. To stop the warp paying out, set the winch levers to “zero” position.
4. To heave the warps, set the winch levers to the bottom position.
5. Control of the starboard and portside winches can be exercised independently.
Setting Trawl from Ship-Target (6 DoF)

To set the trawl from ship-target (6 DoF), use the following procedure:
1. Start the exercise. Open the ship-target (6 DoF) properties panel and select Fishing page.
2. Select a trawl type from the Trawl type drop-down list: Target Pelagic, Bottom target.
3. Set depth in the Depth field and cable length in the Cable length filed and press the Apply button.
4. Press Set button, to set trawl. A picture of the trawl will appear on the chart:
346
Note: Control of the trawl winches is not carried out.
Setting Purse Seine

Selection, setting, and control of a seine are performed by the Trainee on the bridge from the Fishing Gear
control console. The Instructor however can also carry out these operations direct from instructor
workstation.
The seine can be set from any fishing vessel (own ship) in the course of an exercise. To do this, use the
1. Open the ship properties panel and select Fishing tab.
2. Select a seine type from the drop-down list of available fishing gear:
o Purse seine (680\150);
o Purse seine (990\200).
3. Set buoy pick up conditions: Distance – maximum distance to the buoy, Speed – maximum ship
speed.
347
Important: To pick up the buoy anchor, the following conditions should be fulfilled:
1) the entire length of the seine is overboard;
2) the buoy is on the starboard side;
3) the distance to the buoy and ship speed does not exceed preset maximum values.
4. To turn on\off the interference effect, check\clear the Interference checkbox.

Note: Instructor can set buoy pick up conditions and interference effect before the exercise start.
6. Press Set button to start setting of seine. After some time, the setting will be shown on the instructor
chart.
7. In the course of seine setting, handle the ship so that after making a turning circle, the ship would
approach the buoy anchor with its starboard (recommended to turn on the trend mode: menu
View\Settings\Contours).
8. To pick up the buoy anchor on board:

a. Point the mouse cursor on the seine picture on the chart and right-click.
b. Press Take buoy button on the General tab.
348
If all conditions are fulfilled, the buoy anchor will be picked up on board.
9. After the buoy has been picked up, you can start the heaving of drag ropes and pursing. To heave the
drag ropes, press Bow capstan and Net winch buttons on the General tab.
10. For pursing, put the seine winch lever to one of the positions.
Pursing process will be displayed on the exercise chart.
349
Modeling of the seine is completed automatically when the length of the purse line length is less than 150 m.
Setting Long Line

Selection, setting, and heaving of a long line are performed by the Trainee on the bridge from the Fishing
Gear control console. The Instructor however can also carry out these operations direct from his/her
workstation.
The long line can be set from any fishing vessel (own ship) in course of an exercise. To do this, use the
1. Open the ship properties panel and select Fishing tab.
2. Select a Long Line from the list of available fishing gear.
3. Select the long line type from the list: Drifting or Moored.
350
4. Set buoy pick up conditions:

o Distance – maximum distance to the buoy;
o Speed – maximum ship speed.
Important: To pick up the buoy, the following conditions should be fulfilled: 1) the buoy is on the starboard
side; 2) the distance to the buoy and ship speed do not exceed preset maximum values.
5. To turn on the interference effect, check the Interference checkbox.

7. Press Set button to start the long line setting. After some time, the setting process will be displayed
on the instructor chart:
8. Position the mouse cursor on the picture of the long line on the chart and right-click. The screen will
display the winch control panel. The panel will show the current length of the set long line:
9. After the end of the long line setting, press Complete button. The setting of the long line will be stopped.
351
10. To pick up the buoy on board, the ship should approach it with its starboard side (recommended to turn
on the trend mode: View\Settings\Contours).
11. Press Heave button to pick up the buoy on board. The buoy cannot be picked up unless all the three
conditions are fulfilled and none of the indicators is lighted:
12. To heave the long line, put the winch lever in one of the positions.
13. Modeling of the long line is completed automatically when the length of the long line is less than 0 m.
Watching Trainee Performance

As a trainee is setting the fishing gear, all the winch operations are displayed at the instructor workstation.
In addition, the Events panel (View\Panels\Events…) displays the events connected with the trainee handling
the fishing gear:
352
In the case of operation with a trawl, the following events are shown:
l "Trawl on water" – end of trawl setting;
l "Trawl footrope on ground" – footrope touching the bottom;
l "Trawl otter doors on ground" – trawl doors touching the bottom;
l "Trawl lost" – alarm signifying an error which resulted in the loss of a trawl;
l "N.N tons caught" – catch calculations result.
In the case of operation with a seine, the following events are shown:
l "Seine setting" – command to set the seine is given;
l "Seine completing the set" – end of setting the net and dragrope;
l "Seine pursing" – pursing start indication;
l "Seine on board" – pursing end indication;
l "Seine lost" – alarm signifying an error which resulted in the loss of a seine;
In the case of operation with a long line, the following events are shown:
l "Long Line setting" – command to set the long line is given;
l "Long Line fishing" – end of long line setting;
l "Long Line heave" – long line heaving start indication;
l "Long Line on board" – long line heaving end indication;
353
SEARCH AND RESCUE OPERATIONS

To ensure simulator training in the search and rescue (SAR) operations as per the requirements of
International MERSAR and IAMSAR Conventions, the simulator has a number of objects for practising
search and rescue operations, and the following functionality is implemented:
l Giving signals in compliance with the International Code of Signals (ICS-69) by using flags, flashing
light (with appropriate visual effects) and sound signals;
l Giving distress signals associated with appropriate visual effects;
l UAIS functionality;
l Integration with Transas GMDSS Simulator TGS 5000 (transmission of ship position coordinates,
speed, local time, SART and radar operation, reception and transmission of messages to Navtex
Manager utility (NS 3000 ECDIS-I) for their further processing).
SAR Objects
The objects from the Rescue category can take part in SAR operations.
Rescue category objects are added to the exercise by using standard procedures. All these objects can be
used by the Instructor both at the exercise preparation stage and during the exercise, adding them, at the
necessary time, in the required place of the scenario. Besides, SART and Life buoy objects can be thrown
overboard by the Trainees themselves: the former by using the GMDSS work station, the latter by using
the Conning Display.
Note: Also helicopters from Helicopter category can take part in SAR operations (see "Operations with
Helicopter Objects" on page 374).
This section describes the specific features of such Rescue objects as: Damaged Tanker, Damaged fish
boat, Fire objects, EPIRB, AIS SART and SAR routes.
Damaged Tanker Object

The Damaged tanker object has several visual scripts:
l Code flags – tanker with a distress signals as per the International Code of Signals (November,
Charlie);
l Damaged ship – tanker with fire in the stern part;
l Distress flag – tanker with a distress flag;
l Flames on vessel – tanker with a burning barrel on the stern;
l Hand flare – tanker with a person holding a hand flare on the stern;
l Safe – tanker which does not move relative to the water;
l Sinking ship – tanker with a starboard list and slight forward trim;
l Square flag and ball – tanker with a distress signal which is a square flag with a ball under it.
l Wave arms – tanker with a person waving arms on the stern.
To set visual script of the object, use the following procedure:
1. Open the object properties panel.
2. Select Visual scripts tab.
354
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Search and Rescue Operations
3. Select the damaged tanker visual script from the list.

The Damaged tanker object is also capable to send UAIS messages and to give distress signals.
Damaged Fish Boat Object

For the Damaged fish boat object it is possible to set the orientation, visual states, switch on the UAIS
transponder and specify AIS data.
To set visual states of the object, perform the following operations:

1. Select the Damaged fish boat object in the Rescue category, set up its orientation and place on the
chart.
2. Open the properties panel of the object and select the Distress tab.
3. Check the checkboxes to set up the necessary state (several states can be set up simultaneously):
o Hull damage – burnt hull of the ship;
o Smoke – smoking boat;
o Barell – smoking barrel on the ship;
o Distress flag – distress flag on the ship;

o Man – man is waving on board.
4. In the Fire group box, select the fire type on the ship if necessary:
o None – no fire;
o Moderate fire – moderate fire (separate flashes);
o Extensive fire – strong fire;
o Extreme fire – maximum fire.
5. Press the Apply и Close buttons.
355
Fire Object
The Fire object can be set in any point on the chart, or can be attached to a stationary or movable exercise
object.
To set and assign properties to an object, use the following procedure:

1. Select the Fire object in the Rescue category, set its initial parameters and press the Next button.
2. Position the cursor in the place of the zone’s first node and press the left mouse button.
3. Position the cursor in the place of the zone’s following node and press the left mouse button.
4. After setting the last node, press the right mouse button.
5. To attach a Fire object to an exercise object call the fire zone context menu and select the Attach to
object menu.
6. Position the cursor on the contour of the object which the Fire object should be attached to, and press
the left mouse button.
EPIRB Object
The Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon (EPIRB) object is designed for determining position of
objects in distress and sending a relevant notification signal.
After connection to the power supply, the EPIRB sends an encoded VHF signal which can be received by
special VHF/UHF direction finders on the sea ships and aircraft closest to the distress position.
Note: COSPAS/SARSAT radio beacon transmission on 406 MHz frequency can automatically generate
and store encoded digital messages with the MMSI data of the ship or helicopter in distress.
In the NTPRO simulator, the Instructor can set the EPIRB in an exercise on any ship or helicopter, or drop
it into the water at any moment of time. To measure the EPIRB distress signal bearing and to decode it,
SAR DF direction finder is used, which is included in the SAR panel equipment of the training bridge
Conning Display.
Note: The full mission simulator training in operating a direction finder (taking direction to the VHF
exchange and receiving coordinates of the ship in distress from the COSPAS/SARSAT satellites) is
possible in the NTPRO’s joint operation with the GMDSS simulator.
To set the object properties, use the following procedure:

1. Select the EPIRB object in the Rescue category.
2. Select the distress signal frequency in Type list.
3. To turn on/off the radio beacon power supply, check the Power On checkbox.
356
Note: If the EPIRB power supply is turned on at the exercise creation stage, its distress signal will be
transmitted immediately after the exercise start. The same can be done later when the exercise is being
fulfilled by the Trainee.
4. Press the Next button. The Drift window will be displayed.
5. If necessary, set the radio buoy speed and course. To do this, clear the Drift checkbox and enter
values in the Speed and Course fields respectively.
6. Press the Finish button. Use the left mouse button click to indicate with the cursor the radio buoy
setting place on the chart.
7. To set a radio beacon on the ship or helicopter, call the radio beacon context menu and select the
Attach item.
357
8. Left-click on the ship or helicopter contour.

9. To drop the radio beacon, select the Drop item from the context menu.
Note: After the radio beacon is detached from the object, the object data (MMSI) will be stored in the
device memory.
AIS SART Object

AIS SART is an AIS emergency transmitter used to perform a secondary alarm when search and rescue
units are searching for a life raft/lifeboat in distress.
AIS SART includes a built-in GPS, which will help the units to pinpoint exactly where the distressed boat
is located in a larger area. This is done with the help of the AIS on the searching ship or helicopter. When
started, the AIS SART sends its position data in an ordinary AIS message.
The information sent by AIS SART can be seen on the simulator radar, Navi-Sailor and UAIS MKD.
To set AIS SART object, use the following procedure:

1. Select the AIS Sart object in the Rescue category.
2. Press the Next button. The Drift window appears.
3. If necessary, set the device speed and course. To do this, remove the Drift checkbox and enter values
in the Speed and Course field respectively.
4. Press the Next button. The AIS-SART window appears.
358
5. Select the device state:

o Inactive – the device is switched off.
o Active – the device is switched on and ready for operation.
o Test – the device is used in the test mode.
6. To change SART ID data, perform the following:
a. To change the Device type (it means a part of SART ID representing device type), press the
Unlock button and enter the new value in the first field.
Note: During the simulator session the Device type can be changed if the AIS SART is in "Inactive" state.
b. To change the Manufacture’s number, enter the new value in the second field.
c. To change the Device serial number, enter the new value in the third field.
7. Press the Finish button and click the left mouse button on the chart. The object appears on the chart.
To change the AIS SART properties, open the object’s context menu and select General properties menu
item. The object properties window will appear.
359
Note: Such objects of the Rescue category as Life buoy, Man over board and partly Life Raft have the
same AIS SART properties.
SAR Routes Objects

SAR operations are performed by search-and-rescue services in compliance with the recommendations
IMO “IAMSAR manual “Planning and Conducting the Search” 2008 Edition”.
With consideration for these recommendations, Navi-Trainer Instructor provides the creation of four
search-and-rescue patterns:
l Track line search.
l Parallel sweep search;
l Expanding square search;
l Sector search.
Both the own ship and the ship-target can be set for such a route.
The following concepts are used for the creation of SAR routes:
l Leg length – the length of the route leg;
l Track spacing – the distance between two adjacent parallel tracks;
l Search direction;
l Search radius;
l Number of sectors;
l Turn angle;
l Turn point;
l Return search;
l Drift – probable drift velocity of a search object with consideration for currents and wind in the search
area;
l Set – probable drift direction of a search object;
l CSP – Commence Search Point.
SAR Track Line Search

The search pattern is mainly used for the search of lost ships and aircraft if their estimated route is known.
The search is organized along the estimated route of the lost object. The search can be one-way along the
route of the lost object or return-way back to the start point. Usually such a search pattern is used at the
beginning of the rescue operation.
To set SAR track line search object, use the following procedure:
1. In the Rescue category select the SAR Track line search object and press the Next button. The Track
search window will appear.
2. Set the values:
o Track spacing – the distance between two adjacent parallel tracks, m;
o Leg length – the length of the route leg, m;
o Search direction – direction of search, deg.
3. Check the Return search checkbox, if you need to set a search with a return to the search start point.
360

5. Set the values:
o Drift – possible drift velocity of a search object with consideration for currents and wind in the search
area;
o Set – possible drift direction of a search object;
6. Press the Finish button. A cursor with a yellow square will appear on the screen:
7. Left-click on the route initial point. The route will be placed on the chart.
An example of a search route with return to the search start point:
An example of a search route without return to the search start point:
361
SAR Parallel Sweep Search

A parallel sweep search pattern is used at large areas when there is no reliable information about the
location of the search object.
Large search areas are usually divided into sections where an independent search is performed
simultaneously with different means.
To set SAR parallel sweep search object, use the following procedure:
1. In the Rescue category select the SAR Parallel sweep search object and press the Next button. The
Parallel sweep search window will open.
2. Set the following values:

o Number of legs – number of route legs;
o Track spacing – the distance between two adjacent parallel tracks, m;
o Leg length – the length of the route leg, m;
4. Set the following values:
area;
5. Press the Finish button. A cursor with a yellow square will appear on the screen.
6. Left-click on the route initial point. The route will be placed on the chart.
362
SAR Expanding Square Search

An expanding square search pattern is used if the position of the searched object is known rather
precisely. The search start point concurs with the point of the estimated location of the search object.
Such a pattern suits for search by using small ships, people or water craft with a weak drift. The first leg is
usually oriented against the wind to minimise navigational errors.
To set SAR expanding square search object, use the following procedure:
1. In the Rescue category select the SAR Expanding square search object and press the Next button.
The Expanded square search window will open:
2. Set the values:

o Number of legs – number of route legs;
o Track spacing – the distance between two adjacent parallel tracks;
4. Set the values:
area;
6. Click on the route initial point. The route will be placed on the chart:
Sector Search
A sector search pattern is most efficient of the position of the searched object is precisely known, and the
search sector is small. The route is used for search in a circular area with the centre in the point of the
estimated position of the search object. With such a search pattern, only one rescue airplane or one
helicopter together with one ship can be used for independent search in the same area. The search radius
363
for ships is usually from 2 to 5 nautical miles.
To set SAR sector search object, use the following procedure:

1. In the Rescue category select the SAR Sector search object and press the Next button. The Sector
search window will appear.
2. Set the values:

o Search Radius .
o Number of sectors ;
o Turn angle – turn angle of the search pattern if there are more than three sectors.
4. Set the values:
area;
o Set – possible drift direction of a search object.
6. Click on the route initial point. The route will be placed on the chart:
Route Properties
To change route properties, use the following procedure:
1. Right-click on the route line.
2. In the route context menu select the General properties item. The route property window appears.
364
3. Make the necessary changes and press the Apply button.

An object assignment to a route of a search-and-rescue operation is performed similarly to a ship
assignment to any other route (see "Assigning Object to Route" on page 133).
When the Drift and Set values are set, the search route will be corrected in accordance with these values
at the exercise start. After the exercise start the corrected route is displayed if an object is assigned for
this route.
Signaling in Accordance with ICS

Exchange of signals between any ships in accordance with International Code of Signals ICS-69 is
performed by using flags, light (with searchlight) and sound (with tyfon) signals in Morse code.
The transmitting stations may be:

l Own ships (Ships) – control exercised by a Trainee on the bridge from the Conning Display, or by the
Instructor from Flags panel (View\Panels\Flags);
l Target ships (Ship targets) – control by the Instructor from Flags panel.
ICS flags are hoisted on two halyards (portside and starboard): the station callsign on one of them, and a
message or answering pennant on the other. The message may consist of groups (from one to six flags).
Groups are separated from each other with a tackline. Therefore, the sufficient maximum number of
hoisted objects (flags plus tackline) is seven.
Note: For some models of naval ships in the simulator it is possible to give NATO signals in addition to the
ICS signals; they can be hoisted on six halyards (three on each side).
The Flags panel contains the following tabs:

l Alphabet tab: consists of 26 alphabetic flags + 3 substitutes + 1 answering pennant;
l Numeral tab: consists of 10 numeral pennants + 3 substitutes + 1 answering pennant;
l Special tab: consists of 9 special flags;
l Codes tab: consists of flag sets signifying messages commonly used during rescue operations. There
are 6 of them in the delivery set, but this number can be increased by the Instructor.
To work with the Flags panel, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Flags... menu item, or press the toolbar button. The Flags window will
appear.
365
2. From the Ship drop-down list, select the name of the own ship or target ship.
3. From the Code of signals drop-down list, select the code of signals (if it is possible). After the ship
selection, buttons for hoisting and lowering flags on the halyards will be activated.
Note: If the exercise is running, and the Trainee has given a signal on the own ship, the Instructor will see it.
To form a signal in the Prep column:

1. Open the Alphabet or Numeral, or Special tab of the Flags panel. Double left-click on the flag picture, or
drag it to the Prep column. If more than 7 flags are set to the Prep column, the topmost flag will be
automatically deleted.
2. If it is required to set a tackline, left-click on the picture and drag it to the Prep column.
3. To delete a flag, double left-click on it picture in the Prep column, or drag it back to the left part of the
Flags panel.
4. To delete all the flags from thePrep column, press Clear button.
366
To save the formed signal:

1. Press the Save button.
2. In the Flag group properties box, enter the signal treatment in the Treatment field and press the OK
button.
Note: Work with flag signals is recorded to a log file for the further debriefing.
To select a ready flag combination:

1. Open the Codes tab on the Flags panel.
2. Left-click on the flag combination row.
To edit or delete of flag combination on the Codes page:
1. Select the necessary flag combination row and press the right mouse button.
2. Choose Edit or Delete menu item, as required.
367
3. To hoist the signal "close up", press the button.

4. To hoist the signal "at the dip", press button.
5. To lower the signal, press button.
368
Giving Distress Signals

This category includes the following signals:
l Red, white, or green rockets or shells;
l Parachute red or white flares;
l Buoyant signals giving off a volume of orange-coloured smoke.
These signals can be given from the own ships by the Trainees from the Conning Display (SAR->Distress
Signal page), and from all the ship types by the Instructor from the appropriate object property tab.
To send distress signals, the Instructor should use the following procedure:
1. Open ship properties panel and select Distress signals page.
2. Select the required signal by pressing the appropriate button.

3. Adjust launch parameters for rockets:
o Rel. Brg. – shooting direction relative to the ship bow;
o Distance – distance from the ship at which the rocket will fall down;
o Height – rocket ascent height;
o Period – how often the rocket launching will be repeated. 0 value – single launch.
4. Press the Launch button for giving distress signals.
The Launch button is highlighted in white. When a single distress signal is given, Launch button
is released on its own. Otherwise, it is for the Instructor to decide when it should be released, in order
to stop a series of distress signals, as this series duration is not limited in any other way.
Note: The signal rocket luminescence duration is 5 seconds. The parachute red flare is lighted for at least
40 seconds, smoke signal – 3 minutes. The time delay, between the signal launch command and its visual
presentation, is 1–2 seconds.
Work with distress signals is recorded to a log file for the further debriefing.
369
Use of Rescue Boat

In the conduct of simulator training in search and rescue operations, the NTPRO simulator offers a unique
capability to turn one of training bridge into a rescue boat cabin.
In this case, at the exercise start the rescue boat may be either on board the carrier ship controlled during
the exercise from another (main) bridge, or may be sailing freely not far from the carrier ship. In the first
case, the simulator allows the exercise to be started from lowering the rescue boat down on the water, in
the second case – the exercise to be finished with hoisting it on board.
These operations are possible with the use of special ship mathematical models: IMT 992 type ship as a
rescue boat carrier ship, and Offshore Rescue Vessel for the rescue boat itself.
Note: Military ships: AOR-Fort Victoria class, Frigate F123, Frigate F124, Supply ship EGV 702, Support
Ship T404 can be boat’s carriers. A Rescue boat object is used for these types of ships.
If the training bridges are used for sailing on other own ships, the Instructor can perform the rescue boat
lowering and hoisting operations with target ships of the same types.
The simulator can display and save to log files forces occurring on the boat tackle and it length.
Exercise Requirements:
l In an exercise, there should be ships of both IMT 992 and Offshore Rescue Vessel types. At least one
of them should be an own ship depending on the exercise purpose;
l If you are also planning to lower and hoist lifeboat on the relevant target ships, they should be entered
in the exercise as 6-DoF mathematical models.
Setting Rescue Boat on Carrier Ship

After the Offshore Rescue Vessel has been set in their initial positions on the chart, the instructor can
move the Offshore Rescue Vessel on board IMT 992.
1. Call the Offshore Rescue Vessel context menu and select Attach to davit item.
2. Click to the IMT 992 on a chart. The Offshore Rescue Vessel will be moved on board IMT 992.
370
3. If it is necessary to return to the autonomous sailing, use Release from davit command from the
Offshore Rescue Vessel context menu.
Instructor on the Davit page can adjust break force value for ropes and maximum force of boat collision
with a board of IMT 992 ship as well.
For both ships, their own routes can be plotted regardless of whether the Offshore Rescue Vessel is on
board IMT 992 or on the water.
Note: The rescue boat can currently be lowered and hoisted on the IMT 992 portside only.
Loading and Running Exercise on Bridges

The instructor procedures for loading and running the exercise on the bridges are in no way different from
the standard procedures.
Own IMT 992 ship is loaded on the main bridge, whereas the Offshore Rescue Vessel – on the rescue boat
bridge in accordance with the joint sailing scenario.
If the exercise conditions are that the rescue boat is on board the carrier ship, the trainees on the rescue
boat bridge will see themselves in the rescue boat, but on deck of IMT 992 carrier ship.
Main recommendations for organising this type of simulator training:

l If the rescue boat is on board the carrier ship in the exercise, after the exercise start, the crew of the
Offshore Rescue Vessel should be engaged in the VHF exchange with the crew on IMT 992 bridge,
awaiting lowering on the water;
371
l On the main bridge, there is a dedicated visual channel for observing the davit. The captain on this
bridge gives commands to lower (or hoist) the rescue boat by using the intercom. However, these
commands are fulfilled by the Instructor;
l If in the course of the exercise, it is necessary to hoist the Offshore Rescue Vessel on board IMT 992,
its crew advises the IMT 992 crew, on the VHF, about the readiness to fasten bow and stern tackle.
These commands are also executed by the Instructor.
Lowering Rescue Boat on Water

After receiving “Prepare and lower the portside rescue boat on the water” command from the main bridge
via the Intercom, the Instructor uses the follow operations:
1. Open the IMT 992 properties panel and select Davit tab.
Note: As the rescue boat is on board this ship, and tackle on the rescue boat is fastened, Fasten button is
lighted.
2. Move Slip handle down in order to shift the rescue boat to the side of IMT 992 ship.
3. Move Tip handle down to tip the davit over the side of IMT 992 ship.
4. Finally, move down both Winch handles together (the mouse cursor should be in the middle between
the two handles).
5. As the bottom of the rescue boat touches the water surface, the Instructor should, especially if there
are waves, apply brakes differently to the bow winch (the mouse cursor should be positioned on the
Bow winch handle) and to the stern winch (the mouse cursor should be positioned on the Stern winch
handle).
Note: The winch control should be done at commands given from the main bridge.
6. At the moment when the captain of the first bridge as agreed with the captain on the rescue boat bridge,
finds it safe, the Instructor lets go the bow and stern tackle by turning off Fasten button.
7. For the automatic lowering of a life boat on the water, use the Deploy Auto button; to release the
lifeboat in the process, press the Fasten button.
Note: The Instructor can monitor the fulfilment of these operations on the visualization monitor, setting the
video camera next to the davit. Dangerous letting go and dangerous bump of rescue boat are automatically
recorded by the instructor program in the Events table.
372
Hoisting Rescue Boat on Carrier Ship

Before the rescue boat approaches the side of IMT 992, the davit should be tipped and bow tackle should
be lowered so as to be half a meter above the water surface if this was not done before.
The simulator automatically checks the distance of the rescue boat bow and stern approach to the tackle,
and will not allow the Fasten button to be activated if the distance is large (more than 1 metre). As the
command to fasten the tackle is given from the main bridge (after an appropriate VHF request from the
rescue boat bridge), the ill-timed Fasten command is recorded by the instructor program in the Events
table.
If the tackle fastening is successful, the Instructor will be able to use other davit controls:
l Winch handles are moved up. The tackle is heaved and the rescue boat is hoisted. As the tackle is
heaved to its proper position, the winch handles will automatically take the middle position;
l Tip handle is moved up. The davit is topped to the stowed position. As this position is reached, Tip
handle automatically returns to the middle position;
l Slip handle is moved up. The davit is shifted to the stowed position. As this position is reached, Slip
handles automatically returns to the middle position.
To hoist the rescue boat automatically on the carrier ship:
1. Press the Deploy Auto button to lower the davit.
2. Press the Fasten button.
3. Press the Load Auto button.
After the end of all the operations, the simulator session can be stopped by the Instructor with the exercise
stop button.
373
OPERATIONS WITH HELICOPTERS AND AIRCRAFTS

Operations with Helicopter Objects
To set a Helicopter object initial parameters, use the following procedure:
1. Open the list of object categories, select the helicopter type in Helicopter category and press Next
button.
2. Set the helicopter’s initial parameters:

o Course ;
o Maximum speed;
o Default speed;
o Altitude .

4. Position the cursor in the required chart point and press the left mouse button. The object with its name
tag will be fixed on the chart.
Note: If there is shooting at the helicopter from the coastal objects, by checking Respawn checkbox, you
will have the helicopter recovered approximately 1 minute after it was hit.
374
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Operations with Helicopters and Aircrafts
To plot the helicopter route and set the properties of waypoint and route segments, use the following
procedure:
1. Open the object context menu and select New route item.
2. Plot the route for the helicopter marking waypoints with the left mouse button clicks.
3. Fix the last point of the route by pressing the right mouse button. The screen will display the helicopter
route line with numbered waypoints:
4. Open the helicopter’s properties panel and open General page.

5. Set actions in the end waypoint (At route):
o Stay – to stay in the end waypoint;
o Jump to first – to jump to the first waypoint;
o Go to first – to return to the first waypoint by the shortest route;
o Go back – to go back along the same route.
7. Position the cursor on the first waypoint of the route and press the right mouse button.
8. In the context menu of the first WP, select Properties item. A window with Point page will appear.
375
9. The Altitude box will specify the default helicopter altitude over the first waypoint. The altitude value
can be corrected by un checking By default checkbox and setting a new value in the Altitude field.
10. You can use Delay box for setting the helicopter delay time in this waypoint.
11. After the end, press Apply button.
Note: Use identical procedure to set the properties of other waypoints on the helicopter route.
1. Position the cursor on the first segment of the route and press the right mouse button.
2. In the context menu of the first segment, select Properties item. A window with Segment page will
appear.
3. To specify the helicopter speed on the first route segment, deselect By default checkbox and set a new
value in Speed field.
Note: Use identical procedure to set the properties of other segments of the helicopter route.
Operations with Aircraft Objects

To enter the Aircraft object initial parameters, use the following procedure:
1. Open the list of object categories, select the aircraft type in Aircraft category and press Next button.
The screen will display General dialogue window for the input of the initial object parameters:
376
2. Set the aircraft’s initial parameters:

o Course ;
o Default speed;
o Altitude .

4. Position the cursor in the required chart point and press the left mouse button. The object with its name
tag will be fixed on the chart:
The airplane route is plotted and the waypoint properties and route segments are set in much the same
way as in the work with helicopters (see "Operations with Helicopter Objects" on page 374).
Deck Helicopters
The take-off, landing, and flight of deck helicopters are simulated in NTPRO.
This functionality provides additional simulator training capabilities along the following lines:
l Conduct of search and rescue operations;
l Taking/dropping the pilot on board/from a large tonnage ship in adverse weather conditions;
l Naval operations.
The exercise objects are Helicopter category objects (CH-149 Cormorant, Ka-27, Ka-52, Lynx, Mi-24, Mi-
8, Sea King, and Sea King (SAR)).
For deck helicopters, it is possible to:

l Select one of the following initial conditions: airborne, on deck helicopter ships, or on the helipad of
offshore drilling platforms;
l To plot a route with a change of: courses, flight speed, and altitude,
and also with a helicopter capability to hover in any of the waypoints;
l To set the helicopter behaviour in the route end point: to remain, to start from the beginning, to move to
the start, or to move back;
l To set static data for the helicopter UAIS transponder.
377
Deck Helicopter Control Panel

The helicopter is controlled from Helicopters panel of the instructor workplace (View\Panels\Helicopters…
menu, or toolbar button).
In the left top part of the panel, one of the helicopters set in the exercise is selected from Choose helicopter
drop-down list.
The helicopter flight mode (Control type) is selected below:

l By Predefined Route – the helicopter leaves automatically for the closest point of the route plotted by
the Instructor and then follows this route. Possible from any previous mode;
l Automated Flight – the following stages are modelled:
o Take-off (starting the engine, connecting rotor to the engine, removing lashings, climb with speed
equalising and leaving to the left of the ship);
o Landing (approach to the helipad on an offshore drilling platform of a ship (moving or anchored);
o Motion to any on-chart point set by the Instructor.
l Manual Control – implemented by the Instructor by entering numeric values of flight course, speed, and
altitude, or by connection Logitech Extreme 3D Pro type joystick via USB Human Interface Device.
In Automated Flight mode, Go to point and Prepare to land buttons located to the right, are activated:
l Go to point command allows indicating an on-chart where the helicopter will be proceeding. By default,
the flight altitude is taken to be the maximum speed, and the altitude – the current altitude;
l Prepare to land command allows preparation for landing to be started, a helipad to be reserved.
The Cancel action button is sued for cancelling the operation.
Below, provided the Manual Control mode is selected, the Instructor can set the flight altitude, speed, and
course or exercise control with a joystick having checked the Use Joystick checkbox.
Located to the left are buttons for setting commands corresponding to each mode. Commands are enabled
in certain helicopter conditions. The helicopter status is shown in the line under these buttons.
378
Take-off and landing commands:

l Start – to start the engine;
l Engage – to connect the rotor to the engine;
l Remove Lashings – to remove lashings;
l Launch – to take off;
l Land On – to approach for landing;
l Lash Down – to fasten lashings;
l Disengage – to disconnect the rotor;
l Shut Down – to stop the engine.
Take-off and landing are performed in accordance with the set procedure which is selected in the left
bottom corner of the panel (Landing scheme).
Note: Available in this version is only one take-off/landing procedure which is loaded by default.
The right-hand part of the panel shows the current helicopter status and the helicopter attitude relative to
the horizon line.
1 – Horizon line.
2 – Slip Ball.
3 – Turn Rate.
4 – Roll (scale division is 5 degrees).
5 – Pitch (scale division is 5 degrees).
6 – Digital Airspeed, Airspeed Tape.
7 – Digital Altitude, Altitude Tape.
8 – Magnetic Heading.
9 – Time on board.
379
Displayed below is navigational information containing the following current helicopter values: LAT, LON,
COG, SOG, HDG, LOG.
Landing platform conditions are shown to the left:

l Wind – wind speed;
l Pitch – platform pitch angle relative to the transverse axis;
l Roll – platform roll angle;
l Yaw – platform deviation from the course;
l Accel – platform acceleration.
Note: As of today, input of parameters for a platform fitted out with a helipad is not implemented.
Helicopter Control during Take-off and Landing

Helicopter Landing
For the helicopter to land on the helipad, perform the following procedure:
1. Choose View\Panels\Helicopters menu item.
2. From Choose helicopter list, select a helicopter which will make the landing.
3. Select Automated Flight control mode. The Go to Point and Prepare to land buttons will become active.
4. Press the Prepare to land button. The helicopter will start preparing for landing – “Waiting for command”
status.
5. From the Choose scheme list, select the landing procedure and indicate a platform with a vacant
helipad with the cursor. The helicopter starts on the landing approach and is situated in the first point of
the landing procedure description relative to the object – “Ready to land” status.
6. Press the Land on button. The helicopter will land and assume the “Ready to launch” status (conditions
permitting).
7. Press the Lash down button. Set the lashings which fasten the helicopter to the deck. The helicopter
will switch to “Engaged” status.
8. Press the Disengaged button. The rotor will be disconnected, the helicopter will switch to “Started”
status.
9. Press the Shut down button. The engine will be fully stopped, the helicopter will switch to “On Deck”
status.
Note: Before the simulator session start, you can land the helicopter on the ship with a helipad. To do this,
call the helicopter context menu and select the Landed on... item.
380
Helicopter Taking Off

For the helicopter to take off from the helipad, perform the following procedure:
1. On Helicopters panel, press the Start button. The engine will be started. The helicopter “On Deck”
status will switch to “Started”.
2. Press the Engage button. The engine builds up the operating rpm – “Engaged” status.
3. Press the Remove Lashings button. The lashings will be removed. The helicopter is ready for the take-
off (environmental conditions permitting) – “Ready to launch” status.
4. From the Choose scheme list, select a take-off procedure and press the Launch button. The helicopter
will take off from the helipad and switch to “Waiting for command” status.
Note: In “Waiting for command” status, the Go to point command is enabled. The Cancel Action command
cancels the in-flight maneuvre and switches the helicopter to “Waiting for command” command; in this
case, it “hovers” to the current point.
381
UNDERWAY REPLENISHMENT OPERATIONS

Underway replenishment operations can be performed with the use of two ship model types: delivery ships
and receiving ships.
Participating in the exercise can be both own ships and target ships (6-DoF mathematical models). If the
former is the case, a joint sailing scenario is used for loading an exercise on the bridge.
Setting Underway Replenishment Criteria

To set the global criteria for fuel transfer underway, perform the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Settings… main menu item.
2. Select the UNREP Criteria tab.
3. Set the parameters of refuelling underway.

4. Cancel the local settings as required (check the Disable local settings checkbox).
5. Press OK button.
In the left-hand part of the page, you can set the following parameters:
l Course – admissible course deviation of the receiving ship (1 degree by default);
l Speed – admissible speed deviation of the receiving ship (1 knot by default);
l P&D line angle – admissible deviation of the P&D line from the normal to the plane parallel to the
centreline plane of the receiving ship and passing through the P&D line fastening point on the receiving
ship (25 degrees by default).
Note: The P&D line (phone and distance line) is a rope for checking distance between the ships fitted out
with telephone cable, and also between daytime and night time signal markers apart from each other at a
certain distance.
In the right-hand part of the page, you can set the following parameters:
l P&D line length – maximum length of the P&D line (90 m by default);
l Span wire break force – maximum break force of the span wire
(50 tons by default).
Note: Span wire is a carrier line which the fuel feeding hose is passed on.
382
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Underway Replenishment Operations
l P&D line (ATP16) – visual presentation of daytime and night time markers of distance between the
ships fixed on the P&D line (if the parameter is checked,
the European marking system is used, if not – then the American system is used).
For the delivery ships, on the object properties page you can set local parameters of fuel transfer underway
(UNREP Criteria page). The list of set criteria is similar to the global list on the Settings panel.
Underway Replenishment Control Panel

The process of fuel transfer underway can be controlled from the UNREP panel (View\Panels\UNREP… menu
item, or toolbar button).
In the top part of the panel, there are lists for selecting the ships engaged in the fuel transfer underway:
Receiving ship (Port), Delivery ship, Receiving ship (Stbd). The list of ships is formed automatically as per
the ships set in the exercise.
Two ships can participate simultaneously in the fuel transfer underway: on the starboard and on the
portside of the delivery ship.
If the receiving ship is selected from on the lists, e.g., from the Receiving ship (Port) list, it becomes
unavailable on the Receiving ship (Stbd) list.
The Delivery ship list is always available to ensure the capability to select another group of ships engaged
in the process of transferring fuel underway.
The groups of ships engaged in the fuel transfer underway can be formed both, at the exercise preparation
stage and in the course of its fulfillment.
The following parameters will be shown below on the panel:

l Current course (Course) and speed (Speed) for each ship;
l Current distance between the ships (Length);
l Deviations from the set criteria (Deviations):
o Course;
o Speed;
o P&D angle.
383
l Lists for selecting the line fastening points. Selection of the fastening point will affect the P&D angle
parameter;
l Tension of the span wire with the fuel feeding hose attached to it (Tension);
l Time in the P&D line rendering/heaving remaining to the end of the operation and the current operation
status (rendering/heaving);
l Time in the span wire rendering/heaving remaining to the end of the operation and the current operation
status (rendering/heaving).
If any of the set parameters is exceeded, or when 90% of the parameter value is reached, the panel
provides colour indicator (red).
Before the start of the operation it is possible to choose type of operation from the Operation type drop-
down list: Fuil – fuel transfer, or Packages –dry cargo transfer.
The EMCY button is used for the emergency heaving of all the lines (P&D line and span wire).
P&D Line and Span Wire Rendering/Heaving

To render and heave P&D line and span wire, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\UNREP… menu item, or press the toolbar button. The screen will display
the UNREP panel with a schematic presentation of the delivery ship and two fuel receiving ships.
2. Select the ships which will participate in the fuel transfer operations from the drop-down lists.
384
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Underway Replenishment Operations
Deviation parameters will appear next to the schematic presentation of ships.
Red will be used for showing that the deviation set by the parameter is exceeded. The line rendering
process cannot be resumed until these parameters assume permitted values.
3. Select possible line fastening points for each ship from the list: front, middle, rear.
4. Check the P&D line checkbox to pass the P&D line from the fuel receiving ship.
A dashed line connecting the receiving ship with the delivery ship will appear on the panel (in 5 seconds
the dashed line is substituted for the solid one, it means that P&D line has been rendered). The
distance between the ships in metres will be shown above the line.
After the P&D line has been rendered the EMCY button is enabled, and a little later, Takeover gear field
next to the picture of the delivery ship is also activated.
5. Check the Takeover gear checkbox to render the span wire.
385
Notes:
1. If the distance between the ships is larger than the set value, it is impossible to render the P&D line or
span wire;
2. If the distance between the ships is smaller than or equal to the set value, the P&D line can be rendered,
but the span wire cannot be rendered until the P&D line is put out;
3. When the set P&D line angle parameter is exceeded, the P&D line breaks.
6. To heave the lines, use the reverse process: first clear the Takeover gear checkbox, and after the span
wire has been removed, clear P&D Line checkbox.
Notes:
1. All the P&D line and span wire handling operations are recorded to a log file;
2. Rendering/heaving of the P&D line and span wire, emergency heaving of all the lines, cases of
exceeding the set maximum parameters are recorded on Events panel.
386
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Joint Ship Maneuvering in Formations
JOINT SHIP MANEUVERING IN FORMATIONS

Creating Fleet Formation
To create a fleet formation before the exercise start, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the Edit\Create Fleet Formation… menu item or press the toolbar button. The screen will
display the Create Fleet Formation dialogue box.
Note: In the top part of the box, you can set the fleet formation properties, in the bottom part – properties
of an individual ship in the formation.
2. Enter the fleet formation name in the Name field.

3. In the Q-ty of units field set the number of ships in the formation (up to 9 objects can be set all in all).
4. Select type of fleet formation from the Formation type drop-down list:
o Column in normal order;
o Column in reverse order;
o Line abreast to starboard;
o Line abreast to port;
o Line of bearing;
o Column open order;
o Diamond.
5. If the Line of bearing type formation is selected, set the relative bearing in the Rel. bearing field.
6. To set maneuvering parameters:
a. In the Create Fleet Formation window, press the Maneuvering parameters button. The screen will
display the Maneuvering parameters dialogue box.
387
b. Select units of measurement for the distance between the ships in the formation: Yards or Cables.
c. In the Standard distance field set distance between the ships in the formation.
d. In the Tactical diameter group box set the tactical diameter for the turning circle of the formation:
Standard, Reduced.
e. In the Position keeping alarm field set accuracy of keeping the ship position.
f. In the table with data on the ship acceleration and deceleration, you can change ship
characteristics in the execution of a manoeuvre. To add or delete rows in the table, press the Add
or Delete button respectively.
g. After setting all the parameters, press the OK button. The Maneuvering parameters window will
close down.
7. In the Create Fleet Formation window select the ship number in the Unit No field.
8. To appoint a ship as that of the Officer in Tactical Command (OTC), press the Set as OTC’s ship
button.
9. Enter the ship name.
10. Select the ship model or category, as required:
a. Press the Change… button.
b. Select the ship model and category from the window.
388
c. Press the OK button.

11. If necessary, create a tactical image of the ship on the chart:
a. Press the Editor… button in the Create Fleet Formation window.
b. In the Image Editor window, draw the desired tactical image.
c. Save the drawing under some name and close the Image Editor window.
d. From the Tactical image list, select the saved drawing.
e. From the Color list, select the colour of the drawing.
12. Set the properties for other ships in the formation (see steps 7–11).
13. If necessary to create a fleet formation template, press Save as template… button.
14. After making all the settings in the Create Fleet Formation window, press the OK button. The Create
Fleet Formation window will close down. The screen will display the General dialogue box for setting of
formation properties:
15. Set speed and orientation of the formation.

16. If necessary to edit maneuvering parameters of the fleet formation, press Maneuvering parameters
button (see above step № 6).
18. Point the cursor on the chart, and click the left mouse button.
389
To place the template of the ship formation on the chart:

1. Choose the Edit\Insert Template… menu item.
2. Select the ship formation name from the list of templates.
3. Enter the name which will be added to the name of each object in the formation.
5. Set the ship formation properties in the General window and press the Finish button.
6. Point the cursor on the chart and click the left mouse button.
Note: You can open the fleet formation properties panel before the exercise start from the Objects pane.
Control of Fleet Formation

After starting the exercise, the Instructor can control the ship formations from the Fleet management panel.
1. Choose the View\Panels\Fleet management... menu item, or press the button in the toolbar. The
screen will display the Fleet management panel:
2. Select the fleet formation from the Fleet formation drop-down list. The table contains the following data:
o Unit – ship number in the formation;
o OTC’s – the ship which commands are given from;

o Name – ship name;
390
o Course – ship course;

o Speed – ship speed;
o Status – ship status;

o Order execution – status of flag signals (No signal, Close up, At the dip).
3. To close up the flag signal:
a. Select a flag combination from the list.
b. Set the signal acknowledgement time (delay) in the Acknowledgment lag field.
c. Press the Close up button. The signal will be closed up in the following stages:
— On the OTC’s, the signal will be hoisted to the top, the signal status will be "Close up".
— On the intermediate ships, in a successive order, the acknowledgement signal will be hoisted
to ¾ of the height , the signal status will be "At the dip".
— On the farthest from the OTC’s ship, the acknowledgement signal will be hoisted to the top, the
signal status will be"Close up".
— In the reverse order, on the intermediate ships the signal will be hoisted to the top, the signal
status will be "Close up".
— The status of flag signals in the formation will be "Close up".
4. To lower the flag signal, press the Execute button.
5. To set a maneuver of the formation:
a. Select the Change course option button.
b. In the Course field set a course of formation.
c. Select a maneuvre type from the Maneuver drop-down list: Wheeling, Turn-together, Search turn.
Note: Maneuvre selection depends on the formation type. Some maneuvres cannot be set for certain
formation types.
6. Select a tactical diameter of formation from the Tactical diameter drop-down list: Standard, Reduced.
7. Press the Execute button.
8. To change the speed of the formation:
a. Select the Change speed option button.
b. Set the speed for the entire ship formation.
c. Press the Execute button.
391
PASSING OF LOCKS
These exercises can be conducted in any area where there are some locks. The control of locks is
exercised by the NTPRO Instructor and consists in:
l control of water level in the chamber;
l control of gate opening/closing;
l control of lights.
Setting Lock Initial Properties

To set lock properties before the exercise start, use the following procedure:
1. Position the cursor on the lock border on the chart and press the right mouse button. The object context
menu will appear on the screen.
2. Choose the General properties item. The screen will display a panel with properties of the whole lock
system in the area. The Lock page will contain information on the status of lock gates and chambers.
3. Set the lock initial properties:

o Select the lock name from the table: Lock A (B, С...).
o In the Gate1 (2, 3,…) row, select the gate status: “Closed”, “Open”.
o If the gate is closed (“Closed” status), then in the Chamber 1 (2, 3) row select the chamber status:
“Drained” – draining to a certain level or “Filled” – filling to a certain level.
392
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Passing of Locks
Note: The maximum level of water in the chamber during the filling and draining is determined
automatically on the basis of the water level in the area channel and current tide height.
5. As the cursor is position on the lock border, a pop-up prompt with the set lock properties will appear.
Control of Lock
Control of locks after the exercise start is exercised from the lock chamber properties panel:
To open the lock chamber properties panel:

1. Move the cursor to the lock border on the chart and press the right mouse button. The object context
menu will appear on the screen.
2. Choose the General properties item. The screen will display the lock chamber properties panel.
393
The panel contains three groups of controls:

l Lower gate – control of the lower gate and lights of the tail bay;
l Chamber – control of the water level in the chamber;

l Upper gate – control of the upper gate and lights on the headrace.
The Lower gate and Upper gate groups contain the following controls and indicators:
l Water level – indicator of water level in the tail bay (lower gate backwater) and water level in the
headrace (upper gate head);
l Buttons for the control of the lock’s upper and lower gates:
o Open – to open the gate;
o Close – to close the gate;

o Stop – to stop the process of opening/closing the gate.
Note: The lock gates can be opened or closed only if the water level is the same on both sides of the gate
(the head is equal to backwater). The gate opening/closing time is 100 seconds.
l Gate opening/closing progress bar;

l Gate status bar: “Open”, “Opening”, “Closed”; “Closing”, “Stopped”;
l Buttons for the control of the headrace and tail bay lights:
o Far – to turn on/off the far lights;
o Near – to turn on/off the near lights;
o Gate – to turn on/off the chamber entrance (exit) lights.
Note: The green trail bay light is turned on only if the gates are opened.
l The Go down, Go up buttons are used in the multi-chamber locks for the successive switching of
control from one lock chamber to another.
The Chamber group box contains the following controls and indicators:
l Water level – indicator of water level in the chamber (lower gate backwater);
l Buttons for the control of water level in the chamber:
o Low – to make water level in the chamber equal to the tail bay level;
o High – to make water level in the chamber equal to the headrace level;
o Stop – to stop the chamber draining/filling process.
394
Note: The chamber can be filled if its level is below the upper gate head, and the other way round: it can be
drained if the level is above the lower gate backwater. Chamber draining/filling time is 600 seconds.
l Chamber status bar: “Drained”, “Draining”, “Filled”, “Filling”, and “Stopped”.

l Graphic indicator of the current water level in the chamber.
The following hydrological effects are modelled in the course of chamber filling/draining:
l in the chamber filling – 0.5 knot stream in the headrace in the direction of the chamber upper gate;
l in the chamber draining – current of 0.5 knot in the tail bay directed
to the chamber lower gate;
l in the filling and draining – irregular waves within the chamber with the wave height of 0.2 m (most
significant height).
Example
Let us consider the lock control using an example with the following initial conditions:
l the ship is proceeding from the headrace to the tail bay.
l the upper and lower gates are closed (the “Closed” status), the lock chamber is drained (the
“Drained” status).
Use the following procedure:
1. Run the exercise and call the lock chamber properties panel.
2. For the ship to be able to enter the lock, set the water level in the chamber equal to the level in the
headrace. To do this, press the High button.
3. After the chamber has been filled, open the upper gate by pressing the Open button.
395
4. After the ship has entered the lock chamber, close the upper gate by pressing the Close button.
5. To enable the ship exit from the lock, set the water level in the chamber equal to the level in the tail bay.
To do this, press the Low button.
6. After the chamber has been drained, open the lower gate by pressing the Open button.
7. During the passage through the locks, use the buttons for the control of the far (Far), near (Near) and
entrance (Gate) lights of the headrace and tail bay:
o green light – all-clear signal;
396
o red light– restrictive signal.
Note: Green light of the chamber's entrance lights cannot be switched on unless the gate is open.
Monitoring Fulfilment of Exercise with Locks

The following violations of lock passing rules are recorded automatically to enable monitoring and
assessment of the exercise fulfilment:
l crossing of the far lights line with the restrictive signal on;
l crossing of the near lights line with the restrictive signal on;
l crossing of the stop sign line in the tail bay or headrace with the restrictive signal of intermediate lights
on;
l crossing of the stop sign line in the lock chamber with the restrictive signal of exit lights on;
l ship touching the gate.
Information on violations is displayed on the Events panel.
397
CONTROL OF SEMAPHORES
These exercises can be performed in any area where semaphores are available. The semaphores are
controlled by Instructor NTPRO.
To move a semaphore to the selected position, use the following procedure:

1. Position the cursor on the semaphore object on the chart and press the right mouse button. The object
context menu will appear on the screen:
2. Select the Move item.

3. Select the required position on the chart and press the left mouse button.
To set up the exact position coordinates for the semaphore, use the following procedure:
2. Select the General Properties item. The screen will display a panel with properties of the object:
3. Set up the orientation and coordinates of the semaphore object and press Apply button.
To return the semaphore to the initial position, use the following procedure:
398
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Control of Semaphores
2. Select the Return to initial position item.

To set up semaphore control signals, use the following procedure:
2. Select the General properties item.

3. Select the Traffic Signals page. The screen will display a panel with traffic signals properties:
4. From the Traffic signal drop-down list, select the required signal and press the Apply button.
399
RO-RO OPERATIONS
Involved in ro-ro operations are the ramp located on the berth (Scene ramp) and own Ro-Ro type ship.
The instructor controls ramps on the berth and on the ship, opening and closing of the bow and stern gates.
The motor vehicles move along the lines. The number of lines is from 1 to 5 (depends on the ship model
and ramp on the berth). The loading/unloading of motor vehicles is controlled with semaphores. The
number of motor vehicles which can be loaded/unloaded is unlimited.
To load/unload the motor vehicles, use the following procedure:

1. Before starting the exercise, open the berth ramp properties panel and set the following criteria:
o Dangerous bump – maximum permitted speed of mechanical interaction with walls;
o Max. ramp angle – permissible angular deviation between the berth ramp and the ship.
400
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Ro-Ro Operations
2. Run the exercise on the bridge.

3. To set the berth ramp tilt on the properties panel:
a. In the Angle spinbox, set the ramp tilt angle (positive value to raise the ramp, negative value to
lower the ramp, 0 by default).
b. Press the Tilt button. If it is necessary to suspend the operation, press the Stop button. The
progress bar will show the performance of the operation. The current operation status bar will
display: Tilting – ramp tilting operation, Stopped – operation suspended, In position – the ramp is in
the set position.
Note: The Instructor may not set the berth ramp tilt since the ship-and-ramp docking process will be
automatic.
4. To start the hydraulic pumps:

a. Open the Hydraulic pumps tab of the ship properties panel.
b. Press the F/deck indicator button to start the hydraulic system.

c. Press the Start indicator buttons to start hydraulic pumps 1, 2 on the ship bow and/or stern (in the
Standby mode, Start buttons are disabled).
Note: The Gate and Ramp indicators show that the gate is closed and the ship ramp is in the vertical
position (Closed is lighted).
401
d. If it is necessary to switch the hydraulic system to the Standby mode, press the Stby indicator
button. If it is necessary to stop the hydraulic pumps, press the Stop indicator buttons. For the
emergency stop of the hydraulic system, press the Emergency Stop button.
5. To open the gate:
a. Open the Ferry gates tab on the ship properties panel.
b. Select the gate which should be open (bow or stern) by pressing the Bow or Stern button.
c. In the Gate group box, press the Open button to open the gate.
d. If it is necessary to stop the gate opening process, press the Stop button; to close the gate, press
the Close button.
6. For the ship docking with the berth ramp:
a. Set the ship speed which does not exceed the Dangerous bump criterion value.
b. Moor the ship with its bow or stern.
7. On the Ferry gates page of the ship properties panel, in the Driving ramp group box press the Open
button, to lower the ship ramp. If it is required to stop the operation, press the Stop button. To raise the
ship ramp, press the Close button.
402
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Ro-Ro Operations
8. To load the cars to the ship:

a. Open the berth ramp properties panel.
b. In the Lines group box, select one or several lines for the cars motion and turn on the semaphore
green light.
c. To stop the loading, turn on the semaphore red light.

9. To unload the cars from the ship:
a. Open the ship properties panel.
b. In the Lines group box of the Ferry gates page, select one or several lines for the cars motion and
turn on the semaphore green light.
c. To stop the unloading, turn on the semaphore red light.
Note: The motor vehicles loading and unloading may be performed simultaneously on the condition that
lines should not intersect.
403
ECDIS TRAINING
The following tasks could be started for ECDIS training:
l Chart server task.
l two Navi-Sailor 4000 tasks on one bridge.
l Navi-Planner 4000 task.
To perform an exercise, select the Ficticious Area in the Navi-Trainer instructor application.
Ordering Charts, Chart Update and Weather Forecasts

To order charts, chart updates and weather forecasts, use the “Transas Navi-Planner 4000” program.
To make an order, the Trainee needs to generate a respective request.
Note: The steps for generating requests for ordering charts, chart updates and weather forecasts are
described under Navi-Planner 4000 (Version 2.00.320) User Manual.
The generated request is sent automatically or by using the email emulator.
404
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • ECDIS Training
To send a request by using the email emulator:

1. Open the Navi-Planner mail window.
2. Click on the New mail message line. The New mail window will appear. The address is entered in the
To field by default.
3. In the Subject field enter the request name; in the Attachment field right-click to add the generated
request.
4. Press the Send button. The New mail window will close.
5. In the Navi-Planner mail window select the Outbox line. The name of the sent request will appear.
After the Instructor processes the request in “Navi-Planner”, the following message appears.
405
To receive a response to the request:

1. Open the Navi-Planner mail window.
2. Select the Inbox line.
3. Click on the Attachment field. The Save Attachment message will appear.
4. Select a folder to save the ordered charts or the weather forecast and press Save.
5. Click on the button.

6. Select the folder where you saved the ordered charts or the weather forecast.
7. Press the Go button.

8. Press the Install button to set the selected charts or weather forecasts.
406
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • ECDIS Training
Order Processing
The request are received to the Instructor’s Workplace and displayed on the Ecdis Training panel:
The Ecdis Training panel contains:

l The Orders group box is used for the display of current information for all orders:
o Date – request intake date.
o Bridge – a bridge form which an automatic request or an Email has been received.
o Format – order format:
WEATHER – weather forecast order, SENC CORR – chart update order,
SENC CAT – chart catalogue order.
o Status – order status: Processed – order processed, Unprocessed – order unprocessed.
o Comment – a comment on the order.
l The Order information group box is used for the display of information for the order selected in the
Orders group box.
l The Faults group box is used for setting up faults:
o Bridge – bridge number;
o Master Fault – fault of Master Navi-Sailor;
o VDR Failure – voyage date recorder (VDR) failure.
l Buttons:
o Processorder – order process start;
o Cancel processing – order process cancel;
o Revert order – deletion of an order selected in the Orders group box.
o Revert all orders & clear history – deletion of all orders selected in the Orders group box.
407
o The Weather group box contains optional buttons for selecting the weather type. None, Faire, Fresh,
Bad.
To process an order, perform the following:
1. In the Orders group box, select an order with the “Unprocessed” status.
2. If the order is in the WEATHER format, select the necessary weather type in the Weather group box.
o Bad – stormy weather;
o Fresh – fresh weather;
o Fair – fair weather.
3. Press the Process button. The order status will change to “Processed”.
To set up faults:
1. To set up a fault Master Navi-Sailor, check the Master Fault check box on the Ecdis Training panel and
press Apply. Master Navi-Sailor will stop working. Slave Navi-Sailor will become Master. To turn off
the Navi-Sailor fault, clear the Master Fault check box and press Apply. The turned-off Navi-Sailor will
start working and become Slave.
2. To set up a voyage date recorder failure, check the VDR Failure check box and press Apply. The VDR
Alarm will light up in Master Navi-Sailor and Slave. To turn off the alarm, clear the VDR Failure check
box and press Apply.
408
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Operations with Submarine
OPERATIONS WITH SUBMARINE

The simulator provides the submarine control feature. For this, use the Submarine Control panel.
To open the panel select View\Panels\Submarine Control… menu item or press the toolbar button.
Note: This panel is only active for some Submarine types. The panel can be used after assigning the
exercise on the bridge and starting session.
The upper part of the panel shows a drop-down list for selecting a ship.
The panel is divided into several functional groups.
The Control group box is used for the control of submarine motion and contains the speed control buttons,
corresponding to discrete positions of the engine telegraph:
The RPM control group box contains two buttons with arrows to set the speed of propeller shaft and a
digital indicator of the current RPM value.
409
The Autopilot group box is used for the control of submarine autopilot, contains the following controls and
indicators:
l The Auto button to switch the autopilot on. When the button is pressed, set the course in the Course
set field. The Course digital indicator shows the current course value.
l The Follow button to switch on the tracking mode of the submarine motion which provides the
submarine steering by means of steering controls;
l The Non Follow button to switch on the Non-Follow Up mode.
The Depth group box is used for the control of submarine immersion depth, contains the following controls
and indicators:
l A digital indicator of the current immersion depth of the submarine;
l The buttons to set fixed depth:
o Waterline depth button is used for the emersion of the submarine at the waterline depth;
o Safe button is used for the immersion of the submarine at a depth which is safe enough to avoid a
collision with surface ships.
o Periscope button is used for the immersion of the submarine at a periscope depth;
l Depth field is used for setting the immersion depth from 0 to 100 m. To set the depth, use the ;"+" and "-
" buttons and press the Set button.
Note: The immersion depth of the submarine is measured from the keel to the sea surface.
The Foldable equipment group box is dedicated for the control of foldable equipment of the submarine (if
the submarine model has foldable equipment) and contains:
l The list of foldable equipment of the submarine with status of each device ("Fold/"Unfold").
l The Fold and Unfold buttons to fold and unfold the selected device.
The lower part of the panel contains the rudder control unit:
410
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Pirates Attacks Control
PIRATES ATTACKS CONTROL

To control the pirates attacks, use the following procedure on the Instructor workstation:
1. Open the exercise.
2. Add the pirate ships to the exercise (the pirate ships are the ship-target objects with shooting
functionality).
3. Start the exercise.
4. Choose the View\Panels\Pirates... menu item, or press the toolbar button. The Pirates attacks
control panel appears. The panel contains the list of the all pirate ships (the Attacker column).
5. For each pirate ship select the target from the Target drop-down list. The target can be any own ship,
tug, ship-target, tug-target.
Note: There will be no shooting, if the “none” target is selected.
6. From the Weapon drop-down list select the type of weapon available on the pirate ship.
Note: The pirate ship will shoot from all weapons, if the “all weapons” option is selected.
7. Set the shooting duration (sec) in the Duration column.

8. To start the shooting, press the Start button.
9. To stop the shooting, press the Stop button.
411
CONTROL OF MOTION PLATFORM

The motion platform of the NTPRO 5000 navigation simulator is controlled with the aid of the special
Motion Platform Interface (MPI) application.
Note: Motion Platform Interface task must be included into NTPRO configuration by Configuration editor
and placed on computer where UHI module is connected.
Simple platform control can be performed from the instructor workplace.
To control of motion platform, use the following procedure:

1. To open Motion Platform control panel, choose View\Panels\Motion Platform… menu item, or press the
toolbar button. The screen will display Motion Platform window.
2. To start platform operation, press Activate button.

Immediately after button Activate is pressed, the MPI application will initialize “Unparking” mode,
during which the platform will smoothly increase the pitch and roll motion. If the platform is calibrated,
the Calibrated is checked.
During platform activation, the Activated is checked and the state indicator will display “Unparking in
progress”. On completion of activation, the state indicator will display “Operating”.
412
Chapter 5. Special Exercises • Control of Motion Platform
3. To stop platform operation, press Deactivate button.

Immediately after button Deactivate is pressed, the MPI application will initialize “Parking” mode,
during which the platform will smoothly decrease the pitch and roll motion. The state indicator will
display “Parking in progress”. On completion of deactivation, the platform state indicator will display
“Parked”.
Note: The “Unparking” mode is initialised automatically after the Instructor presses the Start button or
releases the Pause button, and also after the ship is dragged in the course of the exercise. The “Parking”
mode is initialised automatically after the Instructor presses the Stop and Pause button, and also in the
case of a collision, grounding or model overloading.
413
CHAPTER 6.
SHIP COMMUNICATION AIDS
Intercom 417
Telephone Communication with Subscribers 417
VHF Communication 420
Radio Traffic Monitoring 420
Keeping of Listening Watch 421
415
Chapter 6. Ship Communication Aids • Intercom
INTERCOM
The simulator allows imitation of the shipboard telephone communications with a single ships.
The telephone communication is controlled and monitored by the instructor after the simulator session
start on the Intercom panel (the View\Panels\Intercom... menu item, or toolbar button).
The Intercom panel contains two group boxes:

l Stations group box – to select and set up the communication with the subscriber;
l Debriefing options group box – to control the playback of communications during playing the log-file.
The Stations group box contains the following items:

l The list of all telephone communication subscribers and the status of each user’s telephone line:
o Busy – the line is busy;
o Free – the line is free;
o Incoming call.
o Talk as – field with a list for selecting a subscriber on whose behalf the instructor will be conducting
the telephone communications session;
l The PTT button for calling and communicating with a subscriber.
The Debriefing options group box serves for the control of listening in for the traffic during the log file
playback.
Telephone Communication with Subscribers

In the course of an exercise, the instructor can establish telephone communication with any subscriber on
the bridge, and receive a call from the subscriber.
To establish connection and conduct the telephone communication session with a subscriber, use the
1. Choose the View\Panels\Intercom... menu item, or press the toolbar button.

2. From the Talk as list, select a subscriber on whose behalf the Instructor will conduct the Intercom
session.
417
3. Check whether the line of the required subscriber on the bridge is free.
4. Select the line with the subscriber name.
5. Press the PTT button. The line with the subscriber name will be highlighted, and a ring tone will be
produced. After the subscriber has received the call, the tone will disappear. The telephone connection
will be established.
6. After the end of the talk, press the PTT button.
Note: No telephone connection can be established with a subscriber whose telephone line is busy.
If the Instructor workstation receives a call, in the State column, opposite the subscriber’s name, the
status of the subscriber’s telephone line is changed to Incoming call. It is also applicable when the
Instructor has a communication session with another subscriber.
To answer the subscriber call, use the following procedure:

1. Select the line with the calling subscriber name.
2. Press the PTT button. The line with the subscriber name will be highlighted. The telephone connection
will be established:
3. After the end of the talk, press the PTT button.

All the trainee and instructor actions (subscriber call and exchange) are logged on the Events panel.
418
Chapter 6. Ship Communication Aids • Intercom
Playback of Radiotelephone Communications

In the course of an exercise, all the telephone exchange is recorded. During the log file playback, the
instructor selects a playback mode (the feature is not available in the current version of NTPRO):
l Do not filter – playback of all the subscriber traffic;
l Filter by bridge – selective playback by bridges.
To playback the traffic on a certain bridge, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Intercom... menu item, or press the toolbar button. The Intercom window
will appear:
2. Check the Filter by bridge checkbox and select the bridge name from the drop-down list.
419
VHF COMMUNICATION
The simulator allows imitation of VHF communications both, between the ships and between the ships,
and coastal stations. On behalf of the coastal station, the radio telephone traffic is maintained by the
instructor.
The VHF communication is controlled and monitored by the instructor after the simulator session start on
the VHF panel (the View\Panels\VHF... menu item, or toolbar button):
The VHF panel consists of the Ether monitoring group box and the Watchkeeping group box.
The On Air button is used for transferring voice messages by the Instructor on the selected channel.
Radio Traffic Monitoring

The instructor monitors the trainee radio telephone traffic with the aid of the Ether monitoring group box on
the VHF panel:
The Ether monitoring group box contains:

l Bridge – a list of bridges on which the VHF communication panel is run;
l Channel – the channel number with the current frequency of the transceiver which operates in the
receive-transfer mode;
l Send ACK – button for sending the distress signal acknowledgement on behalf of the coastal station.
420
Chapter 6. Ship Communication Aids • VHF Communication
When a trainee at his/her workplace turns on the VHF station, the Channel line displays the current
channel number. If the trainee VHF station is in the transmit mode, the Тх index will appear after the
channel number, and Rх in the reception mode. If the trainee VHF station operates in the US channels
mode, the US index will appear in the Channel line after the channel number. If a trainee sends a distress
signal, the Channel line will contain the words “In distress”.
For the radio telephone traffic monitoring, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\VHF... menu item, or press the toolbar button.

2. To listen to the radio telephone traffic of a certain bridge, select a line with the required bridge name in
the Ether monitoring window.
3. To interfere in the radio telephone exchange of the trainee workstation, press the On Air button. The
radio telephone exchange on the instructor workplace is performed on the channel of the selected
trainee workstation.
4. To end the radio telephone exchange with the bridge, release the On Air button.
To acknowledge the receipt of the distress signal on behalf of the coastal station:
1. Select the line with the name of the bridge in distress.
2. Press the Send ACK button.
Keeping of Listening Watch

For the keeping of listening watch, the instructor uses the Watchkeeping group box on the VHF panel.
The Watchkeeping group box contains:

l List of channels;
421
l The Add, Edit and Remove buttons for editing the list of channels.
Note: The Ch 16 and Listen to all the channels in session lines cannot be deleted or edited.
To keep of listening watch, open the VHF panel (the View\Panels\VHF... menu). By default, the Listen to all
the channels in session line is checked, which enables listening to all the channels regardless of the radio
waves propagation.
To add new channel to the list of listening channels, use the following procedure:
1. Press the Add button. The Select channel window will appear:
2. Select the channel mode:

o International – international;
o US – american channels.
3. Select the required channel number.
422
Chapter 6. Ship Communication Aids • VHF Communication
4. Press the ОK button. In the Watchkeeping group box, the list of channels shows a line with the number
of the selected channel; the watchkeeping checkbox is checked opposite the line.
5. Clear the checkbox next to Listen to all the channels in session line.

To enable listening on several channels, repeat the channel addition procedure the necessary number of
times. The clearing of the checkbox stops the listening watch on the channel.
To delete a channel from the list, select a line with this channel name and press the Remove button. The
line with the channel name will disappear from the list of monitored channels. The listening watch will be
stopped on this channel.
To edit a list of monitored channels, use the following procedure:

1. Select a line with the name of the appropriate channel for editing.
2. Press the Edit button.
3. Select the mode and name of the necessary new channel.
All the trainee actions (channel number selection, engaging in the radio traffic, sending of distress signals,
sending of distress signal receipt acknowledgement) are logged on the Events panel.
423
Playback of Radiotelephone Communications

In the course of an exercise, all the radio telephone traffic is recorded. During the playback, the instructor
selects the playback mode (the feature is not available in the current version of NTPRO):
l Simultaneous playback of all the traffic on all the channels;
l Selective playback by bridges and channels.
424
CHAPTER 7.
JOINT OPERATION OF NTPRO WITH OTHER
SIMULATORS
Joint Exercises on NTPRO and VTMS Simulator 427

Creating NTPRO Exercise 427
Creating VTMS Configuration 431
Joint Exercises on NTPRO and ERS/TechSim Simulators 447
Preparation of Joint Exercises 447
Establishing Connection with ERS/TechSim Simulator 450
Joint Exercises on NTPRO and TGS Simulators 453
Establishing Connection with TGS Simulator 453
425
Chapter 7. Joint Operation of NTPRO with Other Simulators • Joint Exercises on NTPRO and VTMS Simulator
JOINT EXERCISES ON NTPRO AND VTMS SIMULATOR

For the joint training on the navigation simulator and VTMS simulator, it is necessary to prepare an NTPRO
exercise containing VTMS station and VTMS remote site type objects and to create an appropriate VTMS
configuration. VTMS remote site object is used for marking the position of the VTMS radar. VTMS station
object is used for marking the UAIS base station. The VTMS configuration is created at the VTMS
Operator Display Unit (ODU). The VTMS configuration is required to be in agreement with the NTPRO
exercise, i.e., it should be in the same geographic area and have the same position and parameters of the
radar surveillance stations.
Creating NTPRO Exercise

The NTPRO exercise should contain one VTMS station type object served for UAIS base station and
VTMS remote site type objects used for marking the position of VTMS radars. If VTMS remote site object
is not entered into the exercise, the VTMS radar should be set in VTMS station coordinates.
Setting VTMS Station

To set VTMS station object, perform the following procedure:
1. Create a new exercise in NTI application (menu File\New…).
2. Open the window with the list of object categories (menu Edit\New Object…), select VTMS station
object in VTS category and enter the name (for example, “RADAR DOME”).
3. Press Next button. The screen will display General window for entering the main object parameters.
4. Enter the object angle orientation and press Finish button.
5. Position the cursor in the required point on the chart and press the left mouse button.
6. If the exercise does not contain VTMS remote site objects, the VTMS station coordinates will
determine the VTMS radar. In this case:
a. Open the VTMS station object properties panel and open General page.
b. Enter the object coordinates.
427

7. Open the UAIS page.
a. Enter UAIS base station parameters.
b. To turn the transponder on, press the Power button.
Setting VTMS Remote Site

To set VTMS remote site:
1. Open the list of object categories, select a VTMS remote site object in the VTS category and click
the Finish button. Or open the VTMS station object properties panel and select the Remote sites tab
and click the New site… button.
2. Position the cursor in the required point on the chart and click the left mouse button.
3. Open the VTMS remote site object properties panel and open the General page.
428
4. Enter the object coordinates (same as at VTMS-radar) and click the Apply button.
5. Check the checkbox, related to the base station name, and click the Apply button. (The check is ticked
by default if input of the VTMS remote site is entered into exercise using the properties panel of the
base station). Radar data will be transmitted to the selected VTMS station.
6. Set the index of the VTMS remote site in the Index field , and click the Apply button.
Note: The VTMS remote site objects related to the same base station should have different indexes.
7. If necessary, determine VHF antenna parameters:

a. Open the COMMS page.
b. Check the Use COMMS checkbox.
c. Enter the height of the VHF antenna in the Antenna height field.
d. Enter comma-separated numbers of antenna channels in the Channels field.
e. Click the Apply button.

8. To set radar parameters:
a. Open the Radar page.
b. Check the Use Radar checkbox.
c. Enter the height of the radar antenna in the Antenna height field, m.
429
d. Click the Apply button.

9. To set radio direction finder parameter:
a. Open the RDF page.
b. Check the Radio direction finder checkbox.
c. Enter the height of the antenna in the Antenna height field, m.

10. To set UAIS transponder parameters:
a. Open the UAIS page.
b. Check the UAIS transponder checkbox.
c. If it is required, enter new MMSI code in the MMSI field.
430
Creating VTMS Configuration

Running Navi Harbour ODU in Standby mode
To create a new VTMS configuration, run Navi Harbour ODU in Standby mode. To do this, select
Supervisor\Standby menu item.
Loading Charts
Before loading electronic charts of the VTMS area, specify the path to the electronic chart folder. To do
this, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Chart directories… menu item. The screen will display Chart Directories dialogue box.
2. Press Add directory… button. The screen will display Chart Directory Properties dialogue box.
3. In the Path filed, enter the path to the navigational charts of the area where the VTMS is being created.
431
4. Press OK button.
To load charts of the area, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Chart\Chart list… menu item. The screen will display Chart List dialogue box.
2. In the Available charts list, select the chart of the area and press <<Add button.
3. To display the loaded chart in the window, press the Focus button.
432
Radar Setting
To set the radar, use the following procedure:
1. Turn on VTMS chart editing mode by selecting Supervisor/Enable VTS chart editing menu item.
2. Choose Edit\New object menu item. The screen will display New Object’s Chart & Class dialogue box.
3. Open the list of objects belonging to VTS Chart category.

4. Select Radars object in the list.

6. Set the parameters of object:
o Name field – object name;
o Elevation field – antenna elevation;
o ID number field – object ID number;

o RP ID number – RP ID number (if there is more, than one radar, the ID numbers must not be the
same).
433

8. Select the Manual option, to set the object on the chart with the cursor.

10. Set the object on the chart and click the left mouse button.
11. For accurate setting of the object coordinates:
a. Select an object on the chart and open the object properties panel (Chart\Object properties).
b. Enter the object coordinates and other properties (the coordinates of the Navi Harbour radar must
be the same as the coordinates of the NTPRO radar).
c. Press the OK button.
434
ORS-3 Sensor Creation

To create ORS-3 sensor, use the following procedure:
1. Choose Supervisor\Sensor configuration... menu item. The screen displays Sensor Configuration
dialogue box.
2. In the Radar Processors category, select Transas ORS-3 sensor type and press Add… button.
3. Set parameters of the radar which the sensor you are creating will be connected to:
o Sensor mode – Master;
o Radar ID – radar ID number;
o Radar Name – radar name entered at the time when the object was set on the VTMS chart;
o ORS configuration – Single;
o IP Address – address of the computer on which the task imitating ORS-2 operation (VTS Radar
overlay) is simulated;
o IP Port – port number.
435
ORS-3 Chart Creation

ORS-3 chart objects include areas within which no targets are tracking (No Tracking Areas) and areas
within which no radar signal is displayed (Video Masking Areas).
To create Video Masking Areas, use the following procedure:

1. Turn on the mode of editing sensor chart by selecting Supervisor\Enable sensors charts editing menu
item.
2. Choose the Edit\New object menu item.

3. In the New Object’s Chart & Class dialog box, open the list of objects belong to Radar Processors…
(ORS3 Chart) category.
4. Select a Video masking areas object (an area where no radar signal is displayed).
436

6. In the New Object’s General Properties dialog box do not change the settings and press the Next
button.
7. In the Coordinates setup dialog box select the Manual option, to set the object on the chart with the
cursor. Press Finish button.
8. On the chart, draw a zone where no radar signal is displayed.
To create No tracking areas, use the following procedure:

1. Turn on the mode of editing sensor chart by selecting Supervisor\Enable sensors charts editing menu
item.
2. ChooseEdit\New object menu item.
3. In the New Object’s Chart & Class dialogue box, open the list of objects belong to Radar Processors…
(ORS3 Chart) category
4. Select No tracking areas object (an area within which no targets are tracked).
437

6. In the New Object’s General Propertiesdialogue box do not change the settings and press the Next
button.
7. In the Coordinates setup dialogue box select the Manual option, to set the object on the chart with the
cursor. Press Finish button.
8. On the chart, draw a zone within which no targets are tracked.
AIS Sensor Creation

To create AIS sensor, use the following procedure:
1. In Sensor Configuration dialogue box, in AIS Data Sources category select AIS type sensor and press
Add… button.
2. In the General dialogue box, press Add… button to add an AIS station.
3. Enter the base station unique identification number and name.
438

5. In the Network Address dialogue box enter the IP Address and IP Socket of the computer on which
UAISSERV.exe program is run.
6. Press the Finish button. The General dialogue box appears.
7. Press Next button. The AIS Services dialogue box appears.
8. Press the Finish button. AIS sensor will be created.
439
Individual AIS Chart Creation

To create individual AIS chart (an area, the messages from which are processed by AIS), use the following
procedure:
1. Turn on VTMS chart editing mode by selecting Supervisor\Enable sensors chart editing menu item.
2. Choose Edit\New object menu item.
3. In the list of AIS (AIS Network chart) category objects, select AIS Base station zone borders object.

5. In the Coordinates setup dialogue box select the Manual option, to set the object on the chart with the
cursor.
440

7. On the chart, draw a zone, the messages from which are processed by AIS.
VTMS Chart Creation

VTMS chart objects include Auto acquisition zone borders and Buoy guarding marks. To create an Auto
acquisition zone, use the following procedure:
1. Turn on chart editing mode by selecting Supervisor\Enable VTS chart editing menu item.
2. Choose Edit\New object menu item.

3. In the list of VTS Chart category objects, select Auto acquisition zone borders object.


7. On the chart, draw the auto acquisition zone.
441
To create Buoy guarding marks type object, use the following procedure:
1. In the list of VTS Chart category objects, select Buoy guarding marks object.

3. In New Object’s General Properties dialogue box, enter the zone name, unique ID number, and radius.
Check Generate alarm checkbox.


7. Set buoy guarding mark on the selected buoy.
442
VTMS Route Creation

The route is a set of route lines starting and ending in a waypoint. Before creating a route, therefore, it is
necessary to form individual route lines. Route lines cannot be combined in unless they have one common
waypoint (WP). To create route lines, perform the following procedure:
1. In the list of VTS Chart category objects, select Route lines object.

3. Select the direction of moving along the route line.
4. Check AutoRoute enabled checkbox for automatically assigning the target to the route.

6. Set the parameters of the target motion on the route line.
443
8. Set special properties of a route line: to permit/prohibit the meeting of targets on the route line: None,
Meeting recommended, Meeting prohibited.


12. Draw a route line consisting of a necessary number of segments.
13. Repeat the above operations for drawing the next route line.
444
Note: Route lines are required to have one common WP.
To combine route lines to form a route, use the following procedure:

1. Choose Edit\Routes… menu item. The screen will display a list of routes.
2. Press the New button. The screen will display a list of available WP’s.
3. In Available continuation point list, select the initial WP and press the Add to route button.
4. Select point will move to Route points list, whereas the points only which can be connected to the
selected point will remain Available continuation point list:
5. Repeat the procedure for other WP’s.

6. Enter the route name.
445
7. Press OK button. The chart will display route lines added to the route.
The above procedure can be used for creating, e.g. an inverse route.
446
Chapter 7. Joint Operation of NTPRO with Other Simulators • Joint Exercises on NTPRO and ERS/TechSim Simulators
JOINT EXERCISES ON NTPRO AND ERS/TECHSIM

SIMULATORS
The simulator allows conducting joint training with ERS/TechSim simulator. In this case, imitation of the
propulsion plant is made in ERS/TechSim simulator, whereas control of the propulsion plant is exercised
from the bridge (of NTPRO 5000 simulator). The purpose of joint exercises is to develop interaction skills
of the navigational bridge and engine room teams.
Preparation of Joint Exercises

In creating exercises for the joint operation of NTPRO and ERS/TechSim simulators, you should fulfil the
following conditions:
l The exercise should contain one of the vessels available for the joint mode (see Table 17 or see Table
18);
l Before the exercise start, the propulsion plant control systems should be coordinated in initial settings.
In the rest, any NTPRO simulator exercises can be used for a joint exercise.
It should be noted that ERS/TechSim simulator incorporates a set of ready exercises which can be used
for the joint operation.
Table 17. Vessel models available for the joint operation with ERS and NTPRO
ERS 5000 v.7.3 Model NTPRO 5000 v. 5.35 Model General Name
Tanker LCC Oil tanker Tanker:
(Dis. 77100t)
Ro-Ro Ship Fishery training ship 1 Fishery ship:
(Dis. 3300t)
General Cargo Car carrier 3 Car Carrier:
(Dis. 23190t) bl.
Container Ship Container ship 3 Container ship:
(Dis. 83105t)
447
Table 17. Vessel models available for the joint operation with ERS and NTPRO (continued)
ERS 5000 v.7.3 Model NTPRO 5000 v. 5.35 Model General Name
Trawler Trawler Fishery ship:
(Dis. 286t)
General Cargo-2 Car carrier 2 Car Carrier:
(Dis. 19587t) bl.
Tanker LNG LNG 2 Tanker LNG:
(Dis. 89634t)
ASD Tug Z-drive tug 1 Tug:
(bp 53t)
Table 18. Vessel models available for the joint operation with TechSim and NTPRO
ERS 5000 TechSim NTPRO 5000 v. 5.35 Model General Name
v.8.x Model
ANZAC Frigate Frigate 7 OPV:
(Dis. 3600t)
Offshore Patrol Vessel OPV 1 Frigate:
(Dis. 1706t)
448
Table 18. Vessel models available for the joint operation with TechSim and NTPRO (continued)
ERS 5000 TechSim NTPRO 5000 v. 5.35 Model General Name
v.8.x Model
MAN B&W 8L32/40 Ro-Ro passenger ferry13 Ro-Pax Ferry:

Twin Medium Speed
Engine + CPP Ro-Pax
Ferry”
MAN B&W 6S50 MC-C Chemical tanker 7 Product Tanker:

Diesel Engine –
Product Tanker
MAN B&W 6S60 MC-C Crude oil tanker Crude Oil Tanker:
Diesel Engine –Tanker
LCC (AFRAMAX)
Azipod Diesel-Electric Cruise ship ABB azipod; Azipod Cruise Ship:

Cruise Ship
Passenger cruise ship 10
Patrol Vessel PV3000 Coast guard ship 1 Patrol Vessel PV3000:

– 4 x MTU 20V 1163
TB93 and 2 x PTI
Propulsion Electric
Motor Ship Model
Steam Turbine LNG LNG 16 Steam Turbine LNG Carrier:

Carrier
449
Establishing Connection with ERS/TechSim Simulator

Before the start of a joint exercise, it is necessary to establish a connection with the computer on which
ERS/TechSim simulator is run. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. To establish the connection, press toolbar button or select File\External connections… menu item.
2. Check Enable external connections checkbox.

3. Enter the port number (777).
4. Press Apply button. The screen will display External connections window with IP address of the ERS
Router PC and connection status (Connected/Disconnected).
450
Running Joint Exercises

With the loading of an NTPRO exercise intended for the joint simulator operation, ERS exercise is loaded
and started automatically. As this is done, automatically selected are those ERS exercises which are in
agreement with regard to the model type and initial settings of the propulsion plant.
1. Press Assign toolbar button . The screen will display Bridges assignment dialogue box.
2. In Bridge list, choose the name of the bridge, and the ship name from Object list. If the own ship model
is coordinated with the ERS/TechSim model (see Table 17 or see Table 18), the list of coordinated ERS
exercises will become active.
3. From the ERS drop-down list, select one of coordinated exercises.
451
4. Enter the trainee name (as required).

5. Press Add button. The exercise assignment line will display the name of the bridge, own ship name,
and ERS exercise name.
6. Press OK button.
Note: If there are multiple bridges the procedure is repeated for each bridge. NTPRO and ERS bridges
should have identical names.
Loading of an ERS exercise may take some time whereupon the exercise start button on the toolbar will be
activated.
452
Chapter 7. Joint Operation of NTPRO with Other Simulators • Joint Exercises on NTPRO and TGS Simulators
JOINT EXERCISES ON NTPRO AND TGS SIMULATORS

The NTPRO simulator allows conducting joint exercises with the TGS simulator. The information on own
ships and target ships is transmitted to the TGS simulator from NTPRO; the radiotelephony exchange is
performed on TGS. The purpose of joint exercises is simulating the ship-to-ship and ship-to-shore
communication.
Establishing Connection with TGS Simulator

Before the start of a joint exercise, it is necessary to establish a connection with the computer on which
TGS simulator is run. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. To establish the connection, press toolbar button or select File/External connections… menu item.
2. Check Enable external connections checkbox.

3. Enter the port number (777).
4. Press Apply button. The screen will display External connections window with IP address of the TGS
Router PC and connection status (Connected/Disconnected):
453
Running Joint Exercises

With the loading of an NTPRO exercise intended for the joint simulator operation, TGS scenario is loaded
and started automatically.
The Instructor of the TGS Simulator can perform the radiotelephony exchange on behalf of target ships and
target tugs entered in the NTPRO exercise. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. Choose the View\Panels\Radio Aether... menu item, or press the toolbar button. The Radio Aether
window will appear:
2. From the Signal source list, select the name of a target ship (target tug) on behalf of which the
Instructor performs the radio communication.
3. From the Channel drop-down list, select the number of the channel.
454
CHAPTER 8.
TRANSAS EVALUATION AND ASSESSMENT
SYSTEM
General 457
System Overview 457
Principles of Instructor Work with TEAS 458
Rule Editor 459
Competency Assessment Scenario 459
Description of Operations, Parameters, and Constants 460
Rule Editor's Toolbar Buttons 470
Rule Editor's Context Menu 471
Formation of Assessment Rules 472
Grading Panel 482
Training Report 483
Trainee Registration 483
Log Playback and Data Export to Training Report 484
Proficiency Growth Assessment 485
455
Chapter 8. Transas Evaluation and Assessment System • General
GENERAL
The Transas Evaluation and Assessment System (TEAS) allows assessing objectively the correctness of
an exercise fulfilment by a trainee on NTPRO 5000 navigation simulator.
The assessment is based on the check of the exercise fulfilment correctness with regard to the selected
set of criteria.
The by-criterion check consists in comparing the exercise assessment parameters to the set limit values
according to the set rule.
In the by-criterion check, at each moment of time a relative error is recorded (relative deviation of the
assessment parameter from the limit values), and penalty points are calculated as a function of the relative
error and the “error weight”.
The overall sum of penalty points in the observation interval is calculated as a sum of penalties at each
moment of time by each assessment parameter.
By-criterion check may be unconditional (i.e., it is performed throughout the exercise) or conditional
(performed when the set logical condition is fulfilled).
The logical condition for the use of a criterion may be: the ship turning up in the spatial zone, the ship
turning up in the time window, or occurrence of another event in the exercise.
The trainee competency is assessed in points (Score %) starting from 100% minus penalty score.
Competency assessment can be obtained both in the process of the exercise and after its end.
For the final assessment of the trainee competency, the passing score can be entered.
System Overview
Program files of the competency assessment system are installed as an addition to the main Instructor
program from NTPRO 5000 distribution disk provided “EVALUATION AND ASSESSMENT
FUNCTIONALITY MODULE – ENABLED” licensed option is available in the license.
The TEAS is comprised of three components:

l Rule Editor – the panel which is used for creation and editing assessment rules;
l Grading Panel – the panel which is used for displaying assessment process during exercise;
l Training Report – the report on any violations that will be generated after the completion of exercise.
The first two components are combined on a single panel called from View\Panels\TEAS… menu. The
Training Report is called from View\Panels\Reports… menu.
During the exercise, information on violations and instructor prompts are displayed to the trainee on his/her
Conning Display (CAS page), an on top of the central visual channel if the channel has an appropriate
parameter in the simulator configuration.
457
Principles of Instructor Work with TEAS

The instructor procedure for handling the TEAS is shown in the diagram below:
458
Chapter 8. Transas Evaluation and Assessment System • Rule Editor
RULE EDITOR
The Assessment Rules Editor is intended for creating, editing and saving a Competency Assessment
Scenario as a set of rules for the assessment of exercises on NTPRO 5000 Navigational Simulator. Each
rule is described by logical expression built on principles of Boolean algebra.
Competency Assessment Scenario

Competency Assessment Scenario is created together with the NTPRO 5000 exercise scenario and is
saved in the exercise file. An exercise for Open Sea area containing a tentative TEAS scenario is installed
together with the simulator software.
When plotting own ship routes in the exercise, the instructor forms another Competency Assessment
Scenario rule taking into account navigational situation, weather conditions and target ship traffic in the
gaming area.
The instructor formed rule includes:

l text description of the rule;
l tracked parameter;
l logical expression formalising the rule;
l penalty point amount charged for the violation of the rule;
l penalty point weight.
The list of tracked parameters is provided to the user ready made (this list may be extended from one
version to another). The list currently contains more than 60 assessment parameters divided into Penalty
categories:
l Voyage planning;
l Watchkeeping;
l Navigation;
l COLREG;
l Traffic regulations;
l Shiphandling;
l Maneuvering.
The user forms logical expressions formalising the Violation rule user has described, with the help of the
user interface placed at his/her disposal. The expression operands are the simulator data and events,
various types of constants. Operations performed for determining the expressions values use standard
logical operators (“and”, “or”, “equal”, “not equal”, “more or equal”, etc.).
An essential component of a rule is a time interval during which the expression formalising the rule
condition retains “True” value.
The instructor forms an assessment criterion for each assessment parameter as value of top and bottom
limits of the sample value.
Note: Recommendations on and examples of work with the rules are provided in Annex 2 (see on page
497).
459
Description of Operations, Parameters, and Constants

Operations, parameters (variables) and constants are used for creating competency assessment rules.
Operations may be of two types: logical and numerical.
Logical Operations
The uppermost node of the rule to be created always contains the logical operations (see Table 19).
Table 19. Description of logical operations
Logical Operation Description Example

Operation
Awaiting Three parameters are always used

change (…!) (two logical and one temporal
parameter):
l the first parameter sets the timer

(second parameter) run The rule will be fulfilled if within 3 minutes of the own
conditions; ship collision with any other ship, not even once the
l the second parameter (timer) sets lifeboat alarm was sounded
the time interval within which the
change of the third parameter is
checked;
l the third parameter (penalty
conditions) sets the rule actuation
conditions
Delayed Three parameters are always used

check (…?) (two logical and one temporal
parameter):
l the first parameter sets the timer

(second parameter) run
The rule will be fulfilled if one minute after the own
conditions;
ship grounding no general ship alarm is sounded
l the second parameter (timer) sets
the time interval whereupon the
third parameter is checked;
l the third parameter (penalty
conditions) sets the rule actuation
conditions
Equal (= ) Two parameters are always used.

Used for comparing two numerical or
enumerable values
The rule will be fulfilled if the own ship course on the

autopilot is set at 230 degrees
460
Table 19. Description of logical operations (continued)

Operation
Greater or Two parameters are always used.

equal (>=) Used for comparing two numerical
values
The rule will be fulfilled if the own ship engine
telegraph setter is at 80% or more
Greater (>) Two parameters are always used.

Used for comparing two numerical
values
The rule will be fulfilled if the own ship speed over

the ground is more than 15 knots
Inside zone Checking the object’s being

in some spatial zone
The rule will be fulfilled if the own ship enters the

monitored zone
Less or equal Two parameters are always used.

(<=) Used for comparing two numerical
values
The rule will be fulfilled if the own ship’s true course

is less than or equal to 225 degrees
Less (<) Two parameters are always used.

Used for comparing two numerical
values
The rule will be fulfilled if the own ship’s depth under

the keel is less than 1 metre
Logical AND At least two parameters

are always used. Used for comparing
logical values
The rule will be fulfilled if the own ship anchor is on

the ground, whereas the anchor lights and deck
lighting are not turned on
461
Table 19. Description of logical operations (continued)

Operation
Logical NOT Only one parameter is always used.

Used for changing
the logical value magnitude
to the converse
The rule will be fulfilled if the own ship exits from the
monitored zone
Logical OR At least two parameters

are always used. Used for comparing
logical values
The rule will be fulfilled in the case of any event

involving the own ship: dangerous bump, grounding
or collision
Not equal (!=) Two parameters are always used.

Used for comparing two numerical or
enumerable values
The rule will be fulfilled if the own ship course over

the ground is not coincident with the bearing line
CPA/TCPA Always contains three parameters.

Used for simultaneous control of
distance and TCPA (time to closest
point of approach) of the pre-
determined ship with all ships in the The rule is fulfilled provided that the following two
exercise conditions are fulfilled simultaneously:
l Closest point of approach (CPA) between the

own ship and any other ship is 0.5 nm or less;
l Time to closest point of approach (TCPA)
between the own ship and any other ship is 5
min or less
462
Numerical Operations
Depending on the selected logical operation type, available in the subsequent sub-nodes may be either
logical operations or numerical operations. Numerical operations are available if the following logical
operation types were selected in the topmost node: Equal (=), Greater or equal (>=), Greater (>), Less or
equal (<=), Less (<), Not equal (see Table 20).
Table 20. Description of numerical operations
Numerical Operation Description Example

Operation
Bearing Two parameters are always used.
Used for taking a true bearing

from one object (the first
parameter) to the second object
(the second parameter)
The rule will be fulfilled if the true bearing from the own
ship to the reference point is more than 335 degrees
CPA Two parameters are always used.
Used for monitoring the distance

to the closest point of approach
between the ships
The rule will be fulfilled if the distance of the closest point

of approach between the specified ships is less than or
equal to 5 cables
Distance Two parameters are always used.
Used for monitoring distance

between two objects
The rule will be fulfilled if the distance between the own

ship and the reference point is more than 5 cables
Minimum One parameter is always used.

CPA
Used for monitoring the own ship
minimum distance of the closest
approach to all the ships in the
The rule will be fulfilled if the closest approach distance
exercise
between the own ship and any other ship in the exercise
is less than or equal to 5 cables
463
Table 20. Description of numerical operations (continued)
Numerical Operation Description Example

Operation
Minimum One parameter is always used.

TCPA
Used for monitoring the own ship
minimum time of closest approach
to all the ships in the exercise
The rule will be fulfilled if the time of closest approach
between the own ship and any other ship in the exercise
is less than or equal to 5 minutes
TCPA Two parameters are always used.
Used for monitoring time of

closest approach between the
ships
The rule will be fulfilled if the time of closest approach

between the specified ships is less than or equal to 5
minutes
464
Monitored Parameters
The type of logical operations sets the pertinent types of parameters which can be used in making up a
rule. The following parameter types are currently used:
l Logical – parameter setting a certain event (state);
l Numerical – parameter which has a numerical value;
l Enumerable – parameter which has a pre-determined set of states;
l Zone – parameter setting a space within which, as a rule, other parameter types are monitored;
l Temporal (timer) – auxiliary parameter setting the time interval within which other parameter types are
monitored.
Table 21. Description of monitored parameters
Parameter Description
Logical
Anchor in water Anchor is in water
Anchor on board Anchor is on board
Anchor on ground Anchor is on ground
“At anchor” lights off Anchor lights and deck lighting are switched off
“At anchor” lights on Anchor lights and deck lighting are switched on
Automatic fog sound off Automatic fog sound is switched off
Automatic fog sound on Automatic fog sound is switched on
Autopilot off Autopilot is switched off
Autopilot on Autopilot is switched on
Bell sound off Bell sound is switched off
Bell sound on Bell sound is switched on
Bow SPHERE shape NOT Bow sphere shape is not exhibited

exhibited
Bow SPHERE shape Bow sphere shape is exhibited

exhibited
Collision There has been a collision
Dangerous bump There has been a dangerous bump (bump against the berth or impact on
the ice)
Fire alarm off Fire alarm is switched off
465
Table 21. Description of monitored parameters (continued)
Fire alarm on Fire alarm is switched on
Fire detection alarm off Fire detection alarm is switched off
Fire detection alarm on Fire detection alarm is switched on
Fire doors closed Fire doors are closed. Control of opening/closing fire doors is exercised from
the DHW only (Fire Alarm Panel)
Fire doors opened Fire doors are opened. Control of opening/closing fire doors is exercised
from the DHW only (Fire Alarm Panel)
General alarm off General alarm is switched off
General alarm on General alarm is switched on
Gong sound off Gong sound is switched off
Gong sound on Gong sound is switched on
Grounding The ship has grounded
Life boat alarm off Life boat alarm is switched off
Life boat alarm on Life boat alarm is switched on
Man overboard alarm off Man overboard alarm is switched off
Man overboard alarm on Man overboard alarm is switched on
Mooring rope break The mooring or tow line has broken
Navlights off Navigation lights are switched off
Navlights on Navigation lights are switched on
Tyfon sound off Tyfon sound is switched off
Tyfon sound on Tyfon sound is switched on
Vent fans off Ventilation is off. Ventilation on/off control is exercised from the DHW only
(Fire Alarm Panel)
Vent fans on Ventilation is on. Ventilation on/off control is exercised from the DHW only
(Fire Alarm Panel)
Numerical
Autopilot course Current autopilot course
466
Bearing line Current bearing line direction. Direct or reverse bearing line direction can be
used
Bow thruster order Current bow thruster setter. To port – negative value, to starboard – positive
value
COG Current course over the ground
Current route segment Current route segment
Current way point Current way point
DBK Current depth below the keel
Engine revolutions Current engine RPM setter
Heading Current true heading
LOG Current log speed
Off course value Current off course value
Reference point Reference point. A stationary point or a point placed on (attached to) an
object can be used
ROT Current ship’s rate of the turn
Set autopilot course Autopilot course set by the trainee on the bridge
Set rudder angle Current rudder angle setter. To port – negative value, to starboard – positive
value
SOG Current speed over the ground
Stern thruster order Current stern thruster setter. To port – negative value, to starboard – positive
value
Telegraph order Current telegraph setter. Ahead – positive value, astern – negative value
XTE value Current cross track error
Enumerable
Distress signal Current distress signal
Zone
Geo zone Geographic zone. A composite condition zone and an alarm zone can be
use
467
Temporal
Relative time Current timer. This parameter is a timer run at the exercise start, and
contains time elapsed since the exercise start
Constants
The type of monitored parameters sets the pertinent types of constants which can be used in making up a
rule (see Table 22).
Table 22. Description of constants
Constant Parameter
Logical
True Can be used with any logical parameter
False
Numerical
Angle Can be used with the following numerical parameters:
l Autopilot course;
l Bearing line;
l COG;
l Heading;
l Off course value;
l Reference point;
l Set autopilot course;
l Set rudder angle
Depth Used with numerical DBK parameter
Direction Can be used with the following numerical parameters:
l Autopilot course;
l Bearing line;
l COG;
l Heading;
l Reference point;
l Set autopilot course
468
Table 22. Description of constants (continued)
Constant Parameter
Distance Can be used with the following numerical parameters:
l Reference point;
l XTE value
Index Can be used with the following numerical parameters:
l Bow thruster order (from -100% to +100%);

l Current route segment;
l Current way point;
l Engine revolutions (RPM);
l Stern thruster order (from -100% to +100%);
l Telegraph order (from -100% to +100%)
Rate of turn Used with numeric ROT parameter
Speed Can be used with the following numerical parameters:
l LOG;
l SOG
Enumerable
Buoyant smoke Used with enumerable Distress signal parameter
Double green rocket
Double red rocket
Double white rocket
No signal
Parachute red flare rocket
Parachute white flare rocket
Single green rocket
Single red rocket
Single white rocket
Triple green rocket
Triple red rocket
Triple white rocket
Temporal
469
Table 22. Description of constants (continued)
Constant Parameter
Time interval Timer. Used for setting a time interval between some events. Can be
used with any parameter types
Rule Editor's Toolbar Buttons

The Rule Editor panel has a toolbar (for more information, see Table 23).
Table 23. Description of Rule Editor toolbar buttons
Purpose Button view
To switch to Rules Editor
To switch to Grading panel
To save the latest changes in a rule
To cancel the latest step (Undo)
To add a rule
To delete a rule
To replace by function
To replace by parameter
To replace by constant
To move tree node one level up
To move tree node one level down
To move tree branch up, within one level
To move tree branch down, within one level
To move data from the right-hand part of the panel to the left-
hand part
Prompt (to load a TEAS help file)
470
Rule Editor's Context Menu

The Rule Editor has various commands for editing the already recreated rules and those which are being
created. All these commands are contained in context menus which change their appearance depending
on which tree node or which branch of the rule is selected.
Table 24. Description of Rule Editor context menu
Menu item Purpose
Replace by function l To replace parameter (Var) by function (Fx);

l To replace constant (Ct) by function (Fx)
Replace by parameter l To replace function (Fx) by parameter (Var), delete sub-tree;

l To replace constant (Ct) by parameter (Var)
Replace by constant l To replace function (Fx) by constant (Ct), delete sub-tree;

l To replace parameter (Var) by constant (Ct)
Edit To edit the text/value in the input field
Add argument To add a parameter (third, fourth, etc.) for AND and OR type logical condition
(this menu item appears when Logical AND, OR node is selected)
Delete To delete an additional parameter (third, fourth, etc.) for AND and OR type
logical condition
Reset To make the input field empty if an incorrect constant or parameter value
is entered
Move\One level up (delete When this menu item is used on the tree node, the node is deleted,
parent)
and the branches are moved one level up
Move\One level down To move the selected branch one level down
Move\Up/Down To move the selected branch up or down within one level
Add rule To add a new rule regardless of the selected tree element
Make rule copy To make rule copy and add it to the rule tree
471
Table 24. Description of Rule Editor context menu (continued)
Menu item Purpose
Delete rule To delete the rule which the cursor is positioned on (the cursor can be
positioned on any element of the tree in question)
Expand To expand all the tree levels lying below (no need to press on “+”)
Collapse To collapse all the tree levels lying below (no need to press on “-”)
Expand all To expand all the levels of all the scenario rules
Collapse all To collapse all the levels of all the scenario rules
Sort rules To sort rules:
l By Name;
l By Bridge;
l By Weight;
l By Penalty;
l By Category
Formation of Assessment Rules

TEAS category objects are intended for drawing monitoring points and tracing areas on the chart:
l Alarm zone – zone where the violations are traced;
l Bearing line – straight line segment with a set direction (linked to a Reference point);
l Reference point (it may be fixed – stationary point with concrete coordinates,
or moving with any ship from the exercise).
To consider work with the Rules Editor, we will use two examples.
472
Example 1
In this example, OS 1 is approaching the turn to the south of which there is an anchorage area with three
target ships at anchor. To form a future rule, the instructor has created ALARM ZONE 2 (AZ2) which
includes this area.
To create the first rule in this scenario, use the following procedure:
1. Open the Rule Editor panel. To do this choose the View\Panels\TEAS… menu item, or click toolbar
button.
2. Right click on the Rules line, to display a drop-down menu.
3. Choose Add rule item. As a result, the tree with rule components filled in with default values will
appear. The main branch of the rule has warning message. This heading is automatically fulfilled in
with correct values as correct values are entered in the rule’s additional branches.
4. Form the following rule initial data:

o Name – rule name which will be used for rule identification during exercise monitoring and generation
of assessment report. To set the parameter, click the button, enter any identifier and click
<Enter> key.
473
o Bridge – the identifier of the training bridge where the scenario with rules will be loaded. To set the
parameter, select it with the mouse and choose an own ship from the list of own ships in the right-
hand part of the panel by using a mouse double click. The list contains as many ships as created in
the given exercise.
Note: Instead of a double click you can use button on the toolbar. This is refer to any transfer of data
from the list in the right-hand panel to the left part of the panel.
o Error message – a message which will be displayed during the exercise on TEAS Grading Panel,
central visualization channel and Conning Display (CAS page) in case of rule violation. Also a
message will be entered in the Training Report. To set the parameter, click on the button, enter
“You are in anchorage area”, for example, and click <Enter> key.
o Advice – a message which will be displayed to the trainee (CAS page) during the exercise in the way
of an advice as to what should be taken note of. To set the parameter, click on the button, enter
“Remember about Traffic Regulations” and click <Enter> key.
o Audio commentary filename – an audio comment which will be played back on the trainee console
when a TEAS rule is actuated. Audio comment file should first be saved in the simulator
...NTi\Sounds directory and have *.wav extension. To set the parameter, click on the button
and select necessary audio comment file name from the list box, and click <Enter> key.
o Penalty category – penalty category which will be used for rule identification during exercise
monitoring and generation of assessment reports. To set the parameter, click on the button and
select penalty category from the ready-made list and click <Enter> key
o Penalty – penalty charged for the violation. To set the parameter, click on on the button and enter
a new value, for example 20%; click <Enter> key.
o Weight – weight of the previously entered penalty. The penalty charge will be calculated as a penalty
multiplied by this weight. The procedure to change the weight is identical to that used for the Penalty
input;
o Display interval – display
time interval. In case of rule violation, the Display interval determines the
time of Error message and Advice message displaying on visualization.
o Stop exercise – stop exercise in case of rule violation. To activate the parameter, click on the
button and select True value from the ready-made list; click <Enter> key.
474
5. Form the rule penalty condition:

a. Click on line . A list of logical operations will appear in the right-hand part of the
panel.
b. Double click, to select Inside zone operation. The operation will automatically appear in the left-
hand part of the editor in the place of <none>.
c. Click on line . A list of zone built in the exercise will display in the right-hand part
of the panel.
d. Double click, to select alarm zone AZ 2. The parameter will automatically appear in the left-hand
part of the panel.
475
e. Click on line . The list of the ships will appear in the right-hand part of the
panel;
f. Double click, to select OS 1. The parameter will automatically appear in the left-hand part of the
panel.
6. If it is required, set the parameters in the Settings branch:

o Passing score – passing score in % (in this example enter 60%).
o CPA/TCPA triggering period – a time period during which the rule with CPA/TCPA parameters is not
being checked after the CPA/TCPA rule was once triggered.
476
7. To apply changes in the scenario, press toolbar button.
Example 2
It is now necessary to make the scenario more complicated by adding a rule with an internal logical
operation.
Let us assume that the Instructor wishes to monitor OS 1 ship exceeding the speed limit within alarm zone
AZ2.
To create the second rule in the scenario, use the following procedure:
1. Repeat the steps 1–4, as in Example 1 (see "Example 1" on page 473).
2. Click on line . The right-hand part of the editor will display a list of logical operations.
3. Double click, to select Logical AND operation from this list; the operation will appear in the left-hand
part of the editor in the place of none.
Note: “Logical AND” operation means that the rule will consists of two logical conditions of the penalty. The
program will further check the correctness of the Penalty condition formation and will display the current
error in the heading.
477
4. To add the new logical condition, replace the first Var node by function Fx. To do this: call the context
menu on the first Var node by using a right mouse button and select Replace by function menu item; or
press toolbar button.
5. Fill logical condition by the same procedure described in Example 1 (see step № 5).
478
6. To add the secondary logical condition, replace the last Var node by function Fx (press the button
on the toolbar). Select Greater or equal (> =) in the right-hand part of the panel.
7. For the first Var node select SOG parameter from the OS 1 list at the right-hand part of the panel.
479
8. Replace the second Var node with a constant Ct by using the context menu or press the toolbar
button. Select the constant type in the right-hand part of the panel (Speed in the example).
9. To enter the constant value, double click on the line or select the Edit command from context menu (in
this example the limit speed is 5 knots).
480
Note: Remember that measurement units are set on Unit settings panel: Edit\Unit settings….
10. Save the scenario made up of two rules, use button.

The rule has been formed, and has been formed correctly, as the red notation in its start heading has
become filled in with correct values.
481
GRADING PANEL
The Grading panel is used for displaying results of the violation monitoring at the course of exercise and
debriefing.
To open the Grading panel, select View\Panels\TEAS… menu item and press the toolbar button on the
Rule Editor panel.
The assessment parameters are automatically checked by the “criterion” and the current assessment of
the exercise fulfillment correctness is calculated as 100% minus a sum of penalty points currently
obtained for all the assessment parameters.
If the current value of the final grade is below the Passing Score threshold value, “Failed” message is
displayed in red in the last Result column rather than “OK”.
Note: If the instructor has introduced some long messages in the scenario, the width of the data displaying
columns should be adjusted by using the mouse cursor (position it on the edges of the column headings).
In the course of an exercise, all the assessment parameters are recorded in the exercise log regardless of
whether they are used in the current Competency Assessment Scenario or not.
482
Chapter 8. Transas Evaluation and Assessment System • Training Report
TRAINING REPORT
Trainee Registration
For the Training Report to be formed after, before loading an exercise containing a TEAS scenario, the
instructor have to enter the trainee name in the Trainee field of Bridge assignment dialogue box (see
"Distribution of Tasks" on page 183).
Note: The trainee names and personal data are entered with commas separating them, as at a later stage
the Training Report can be converted to Excel format.
483
Log Playback and Data Export to Training Report

The correctness of the exercise fulfilment can be assessed after the end of the exercise during the
playback of the exercise log.
The Training Report is created automatically at the moment when the log file is loaded in the instructor
program.
To open a report, select View\Panels\Reports... menu item, or press the toolbar button. Select Training
report type from the drop-down list.
After the report window has been displayed on the screen, you can:
l select, from the left-hand drop-down menu, another own ship which the report will be re-drawn for;
l use the button, to select a dialogue box for adjusting the number of report lines displayed on each
page (Table layout tab);
l change a weight for any rule making up the scenario (Rule weight tab).
As a result, the final score will be re-calculated after Apply button is pressed. The modified Final Score
value will appear in the Report heading;
l leaf through the report by using arrow buttons ;
l open Print Preview and print out the Report by pressing the button;
l save the report in Excel format by pressing the button.
Note: NO databases on the trainees and their results are maintained in the simulator. But if you save the
reports in Excel format, you will be able to use Microsoft Excel for maintaining these databases and
applying statistics research to the training results of different trainee groups.
484
Chapter 8. Transas Evaluation and Assessment System • Proficiency Growth Assessment
PROFICIENCY GROWTH ASSESSMENT

The trainee’s proficiency growth can be assessed by comparing the results achieved by the trainee on one
and the same exercise in different training periods.
The comparison uses a standard competency assessment procedure, except that for the “assessment
values” obtained during the previous training session (from the exercise log) serve as “sample” values.
Similarly, the competency assessment can be performed by comparing results gained by the trainee with
the “ideal” results.
For the “ideal” result, the log of the exercise completed by an expert (instructor) can be used.
485
ANNEX 1
487
Annex 1 • Navi-Trainer Instructor Menu Description
NAVI-TRAINER INSTRUCTOR MENU DESCRIPTION

Table 25 . Description of menu commands
Menu Purpose Hot keys Button
File Handling exercise files <Alt>+<F>
New To create a new exercise <Ctrl>+<N>
Open… To select and load an existing exercise file (route, <Ctrl>+<O>

log file, log scenario)
Close To close an exercise
Save To save an exercise <Ctrl>+<S>
Save As… To save an exercise under another name
Control\Assign… To distribute tasks among the bridges <Ctrl>+<1>
Control\Start To start an exercise (log file) <Ctrl>+<2>
Control\Pause To suspend\continue exercise (log file) playback <Ctrl>+<3>
Control\Stop To stop an exercise <Ctrl>+<4>
Configuration\Open… To select and load an existing configuration
Configuration\Save To save a configuration
Configuration\Save To save a configuration under another name

As…
Configuration\Set To set a current configuration as default

as Default
Configuration\Auto To save configuration automatically

Save Configuration
External To show an external connection status To set of

Connections… parameters and establish an external connections
Page Setup… To call the print setup window
Print Preview To preview a page before printing
Print… To print out active exercise window <Ctrl>+<P>
Print Screen To print out the screenshot with the current printout
settings
489
Table 25. Description of menu commands (continued)
Recent Files To load recently used exercise files
Online shop To access the Transas online shop
Exit To exit from the program
Edit Creating and editing exercises <Alt>+<E>
Comments… To display a window for comments entering
Environment To display a panel for entering the exercise start

Settings… date, time and hydrometeorological conditions for
the entire scene
Unit Settings... To display a panel for setting measurement units
Object Properties… To show the object properties window
New object… To add a new exercise object <Ctrl>+<Shift>+<Ins>
Cut Object To copy the object data to the clipboard and delete <Ctrl>+<X>
it from the exercise
Copy Object To copy the selected object <Ctrl>+<C>
Paste Object To paste the object from the clipboard to the <Ctrl>+<V>
exercise
Delete Object To delete an object from the exercise <Ctrl>+<Shift>+<Del>
Append Point To add a route WP or zone node <Ctrl>+<Ins>
Delete Point To delete a route WP or zone node <Ctrl>+<Del>
Readonly Mode To switch on/off the Readonly mode for such

objects as zones, routes, lines, points
Set Radar Position To set the Instructor’s Radar on the chart
Add\Remove Camera To set/delete the Instructor’s camera
Create Template To create template for moving groups of objects to

any other place on the chart or to another sailing
area
490
Insert Template... To insert the template in the selected place <Ctrl>+<Shift>+<T>
Create Fleet To open the the window for fleet formation creating
Formation…
Import Route… To open the window for loading the available route <Ctrl>+<Shift>+<R>
file
Import Current To open the window for loading the available

Database… current database file
Chart Handling charts <Alt>+<C>
Centre To centre the chart in the cursor position <Ctrl>+<C>
Reference Point To set a Reference point <Ctrl>+<Shift>+<C>
Zoom Area To zoom a rectangular chart fragment <Ctrl>+<Z>
Load Chart To display a chart/put it on top <Ctrl>+<L>
Unload Chart To delete a chart/put it down <Ctrl>+<Shift>+<L>
ERBL To call an electronic range and bearing line <Ctrl>+<E>
Chart Info To obtain general information on any chart <Ctrl>+<I>

fragment
Increase Scale To increase the chart display scale <Ctrl>+<Up> or <+>
Decrease Scale To reduce the chart display scale <Ctrl>+<Dn> or <–>
Undo Area To cancel changes made in the chart display <Ctrl>+<BackSpace>
Overlays\Borders To show/hide chart boundaries
Overlays\Grid To show/hide geographic grid
Overlays\Rings To show/hide range rings
Overlays\TX–97 To turn on/off the display of TX-97 format chart

elements
491
Overlays\DCW To turn on/off the display of DCW converted format

converted chart elements
Overlays\S57 v3 To display the depth contours on the S-57 format

charts
Overlays\User Info To show/hide user objects on the chart
View Setting the instructor console elements for the <Alt>+<V>

display
Panels\Audio To show/hide control panel of audio logger

logger…
Panels\Auxiliary To show/hide panel for auxiliary machinery control

machinery…
Panels\Camera To show/hide panel for the instructor visualization

control… control
Panels\CPA/TCPA… To show/hide dangerous targets panel
Panels\Depth To show/hide depth section panel

Section…
Panels\DP System... To show/hideDP system control panel
Panels\E-Tutor... To show/hide "e-Tutor" Scenario Editor
Panels\E-Tutor To show/hide the panel for monitoring the trainee

Performance performance in "e-Tutor"
Monitor...
Panels\Ecdis To show/hide panel for processing of orders of

Training… electronic charts
Panels\Events… To show/hide panel of events
Panels\Fault To show/hide panel for faults scenarios creating

scenarios…
Panels\Faults and To show/hide panel for setting machinery faults

Alarms... and monitoring alarms generated by this faults
Panels\Flags… To show/hide flag panel
Panels\Flash Light To show/hide panel for flash light signalling
492
Panels\Fleet To show/hide panel for fleet formation control

management…
Panels\GPS To show/hide panel for adjustment of

Synchronization… synchronization with an external source of GPS
data
Panels\Helicopters… To show/hide panel for deck helicopter control
Panels\Intercom… To show/hide panel for Intercom communication

control
Panels\LogScript … To show/hide panel for recording the log script of

exercise
Panels\Magnetic To show/hide panel for setting magnetic deviation

deviation values
Panels\Model faults... To show/hide panel for setting faults and alarms
Panels\Motion To show/hide panel for motion platform control

Platform…
Panels\Navigational To show/hide panel for navigational signal control

Signals…
Panels\Navtex… To show/hide panel for transmitting NAVTEX

messages
Panels\Objects… To show/hide panel with list of all exercise objects
Panels\Pirates To show/hide panel for pirate attacks control
Panels\Procedural To show/hide panel for setting procedural alarms

alarms…
Panels\Radio To show/hide panel for radiotelephone exchange

Aether… at joint operation with TGS simulator
Panels\Remote To show/hide panel for remote sensors control

sensors
Panels\Reports… To show/hide exercise report table
Panels\Route To show/hide a panel for setting and editing routes

planning… in a tabular form
493
Panels\Screenshot… To show/hide panel for visualization screen shot

creating
Panels\Ship info… To show/hide the panel of general information on

the ships
Panels\Spectrum To show/hide the panel for editing spectrums of

Editor user-defined wind wave
Panels\Submarine To show/hide panel for submarine control

control…
Panels\TEAS… To show/hide Rule Editor and Grading panels
Panels\Time To show/hide the current exercise time display

Display… panel
Panels\UNREP… To show/hide panel for underway replenishment

control
Panels\VHF To show/hide panel for play back prerecorded

Playback… *.wav files on the trainee bridge
Panels\VHF To show/hide panel for VHF-communication

control
Panels\Video To show/hide control panel of video logger

logger…
Panels\Visual To show/hide a panel for selecting a visual profile

Profiles… file and loading it on the bridge
Panels\Visual To show/hide a panel for visual settings adjustment

Settings
Panels\Wind To show/hide a panel for wind turbine control

Turbines control…
Palettes\Day To set “Day” color palette
Palettes\Twilight To set “Twilight” color palette
Palettes\Dusk To set “Dusk” color palette
Palettes\Night To set “Night” color palette
494
Regimes\TM ‘Follow To select True Motion mode <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<F>

Up’
Regimes\RM ‘Nord To select relative motion mode with North Up <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<N>

Up’ orientation
Regimes\RM ‘Head To select relative motion mode and Head Up <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<H>

Up’ orientation
Regimes\RM ‘Fixed To select relative motion mode with fixed heading <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<X>
Heading’
Vectors\Absolute To turn on/off absolute motion vector on the <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<A>

exercise chart
Vectors\Relative To turn on/off relative motion vector on the exercise <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<R>

chart
Offshore panel To open control panel for offshore operations
Settings… To open the window with general display settings <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<S>
Customize… To open the panel for customising menu bar and

toolbar
Window Handling windows <Alt>+<W>
New Window To create a new window for an active exercise
Cascade To arrange windows in a cascade
Tile Horizontally To range windows horizontally
Tile Vertically To range windows vertically
The list of windows To display windows are opened before
Help Help <Alt>+<H>
Contents... To call context help
Area… To obtain information on the sailing area
Ships… To obtain information on ships
About… To obtain information on the developers
495
ANNEX 2
497
Annex 2 • Parameters Monitored for Detecting Violations
PARAMETERS MONITORED FOR DETECTING VIOLATIONS

The annex describes examples of rules of such penalty categories as:
l Navigation penalty category (see Table 26);
l Traffic regulations penalty category (see Table 27);
l Manoeuvring penalty category (see Table 28);
l COLREG penalty category (see Table 29);
l Watchkeeping penalty category (see Table 30);
l Shiphandling penalty category (see Table 31);
l Voyage planning penalty category (see Table 32).
The tools which can be required for creating of rules:
l Timer – set interval of the relative exercise time.
l Route segment – route segment which tracing parameters like XTE and Off Course are linked to.
l Reference point (fixed) – stationary point (with concrete coordinates).
l Reference point (carried) – moving point.
l Tracing Zone – closed polygon – this is a zone where the violations are traced.
l Bearing line – straight line segment with a set direction (linked to a Reference point).
l Passing of Way Point – algorithm for determining the ship’s passing of the way point.
Penalty Category – Navigation

Table 26 . Rules of Navigation penalty category
Monitored Monitoring Penalty logical condition Required Rule description

parameter condition tool
Wrong The Fixed The rule will be fulfilled if the

Distance parameter is Reference distance between the own
between traced when Point ship and the Reference Point
OS and the own ship is less than the set value
Reference is passing
Point the
Reference
Point
499
Table 26. Rules of Navigation penalty category (continued)

Wrong The Alarm The rule will be fulfilled if the

Reference parameter is Zone Own Ship is within ALARM
Point traced when ZONE AZ2, and the Bearing to
Fixed
Bearing the own ship the Reference Point is larger
Referenc
is within the than the set value
Point
Tracing
Zone and
passes the
Reference
Point
Dangerous Exercise Timer The rule will be fulfilled if 10

Depth time interval minutes after the exercise start
below Keel (Timer) set the depth under the keel is
(DBK) by the smaller than the set value
instructor for
the
parameter
tracing
Dangerous Exercise Timer The rule will be fulfilled if 10

Depth time interval minutes after the exercise start
below Keel (Timer) set the depth under the keel is
(DBK) by the smaller than the set value
instructor for
the
parameter
tracing
Off Course The Route This rule will be fulfilled if in

parameter is segment the third route segment
traced while deviation from the course
the own ship exceeds the set values
is passing
route
segment
500
Table 26. Rules of Navigation penalty category (continued)

Wrong The Route This rule will be fulfilled if in

Course To parameter is segment the third route segment the
Steer traced while CTS is larger or smaller than
(CTS) the own ship the set values
is passing
route
segment
Wrong The Bearing The rule will be fulfilled if

Course parameter is Line the COG is not coincident with
Over traced while the back bearing line
Ground the own ship
is sailing
along the
clearing line
Grounding None Timer The rule will be fulfilled if the

“Grounding” event occurs. The
timer is started automatically
when the exercise is run
Penalty Category – Traffic regulations

Table 27 . Rules of Traffic regulations penalty category

Prohibited The parameter is Alarm The rule will be

Area traced while the Zone fulfilled if the own
Own Ship is ship enters ALARM
within the Tracing ZONE 2
Zone
Wrong OS The parameter is Route The rule will be

Speed traced while the segment fulfilled if the own
own ship is ship speed on the
passing route third route segment
segment is larger or smaller
than the set values
501
Penalty Category – Manoeuvring

Table 28 . Rules of Manoeuvring penalty category
Monitored Monitoring Penalty logical condition Required tool Rule

parameter condition description
The Route The rule will be The

parameter is segment fulfilled on the third parameter
traced while route segment only if is traced
Reference
the own ship the distance while the
Point
is passing between the own own ship is
carried by
route ship and the passing
Reference
segment reference point set route
Ship
on the reference segment
ship is smaller than
the set value
None Reference The rule will be None

Point
fulfilled if the true
carried by
Reference bearing from the
Ship own ship to the
target ship which the
reference point is
placed on, is larger
or smaller than the
set values
502
Penalty Category – COLREG

Table 29 . Rules of COLREG penalty category

Dangerous СРА None Timer The rule will be fulfilled if

and ТСРА two conditions are met
between the own simultaneously:
ship and target l The distance of the
ship closest point of
approach between
the own ship and the
target ship is less
than or equal to the
set value;
l Time to the closest
point of approach
between the own ship
and target ship is less
than or equal to the
set value
Dangerous CPA None Timer The rule will be fulfilled if

and TCPA two conditions are met
between the own simultaneously:
ship and any other l The distance of the
ship closest point of
approach between
the own ship and any
other ship is less than
or equal to the set
value;
l Time to the closest
point of approach
and the other ship is
less than or equal to
the set value
Collision with None Timer The rule will be fulfilled if

Target there is a collision
Internal
timer is
and any other ship
always on
throughout
the
exercise
503
Penalty Category – Watchkeeping

Table 30 . Rules of Watchkeeping penalty category

Wrong The Alarm The rule will be fulfilled

Steering parameter is Zone if the autopilot is turned
Mode traced while on while the ship is
the Own Ship entering or staying
is within the within ALARM ZONE 2
Tracing Zone
Navigation The Alarm The rule will be fulfilled

Lights Off parameter is Zone if the navigational
traced while lights are not turned on
the Own Ship while the own ship is
is within the entering or staying
Tracing Zone within ALARM ZONE 2
Anchor The Timer The rule will be fulfilled

Signal Off parameter is if one minute after the
traced while anchor lies down on
Anchor
the Own Ship the ground no anchor
shape is
anchor is on shapes are exhibited
not
the ground
exhibited
Auto Fog The Alarm The rule will be fulfilled

Sounds Off parameter is Zone if the automatic sound
traced while fog signals are not
Automatic
the Own Ship turned on while the
fog signals
is within the own ship is entering or
is not
Tracing Zone staying within ALARM
switched
ZONE 2
on
Absence The Timer The rule will be fulfilled

of action parameters if after the “Fire
Fire
category are traced detection alarm on”
detection
Events after event is initiated by the
alarm
Instructor instructtor, the trainee
event
initiates does not sound the fire
initiated
event alarm, does not close
by the
the fire doors and does
Instructor
not turn off the
ventilation within
3 minutes
504
Penalty Category – Shiphandling

Table 31 . Rules of Shiphandling penalty category

Wrong The parameter Alarm The rule will be fulfilled

Rudder is traced while Zone if while the own ship is
Order the own ship engaged in
is within the manoeuvring within
Tracing Zone Alarm zone AZ2, its
located near course is larger or
the berth smaller than the set
value, and it is not using
the bow thrusters or
engines in the process

Thruster is traced while Zone if while the own ship is
Order the own ship engaged in
Tracing Zone Alarm zone AZ2, its rate
located near of turn is larger than the
the berth set value; and as this
occurs, the rudder
angles are the same
and do not exceed 5
degrees starboard, and
both engines are
operating
synchronously

Engine is traced while Zone if while the own ship is
Order the Own Ship engaged in
Tracing Zone Alarm zone AZ2, its
located near engine telegraph setter
the berth is larger than the set
values for the ahead
and astern speeds
505
Table 31. Rules of Shiphandling penalty category (continued)

Dangerous The parameter Alarm The rule will be fulfilled

bump is traced while Zone if while the own ship is
the own ship engaged in
Tracing Zone Alarm zone AZ2 close
located near to the berth, it bumps
the berth against the mooring
wall
Penalty Category – Voyage planning

Table 32 . Rules of Voyage planning penalty category
Monitored Monitoring Penalty logical condition Required tool Rule description
parameter condition
Wrong ETA The Timer The rule will be fulfilled if

parameter the own ship’s time of
Route
is traced arrival in the second
upon the The “Time waypoint is larger than the
ship’s interval” set one
arrival parameter is a
in the set timer run at the
waypoint exercise start,

and contains
time elapsed
since the
exercise start
506
Navi-Trainer Professional 5000
(Version 5.35)
Instructor Manual
Transas MIP LTD
phone: +46 31 769 56 00
e-mail: info@transas.com
web: www.transas.com

NT 5000-5-35 Instructor Manual Eng - MPDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NT 5000-5-35 Instructor Manual Eng - MPDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NAVI-TRAINER PROFESSIONAL 5000

Issue date: October, 2014

Template of Procedural Alarms 145

Setting Lights 198

Chapter 4. Debriefing 257

Search and Rescue Operations 354

Principles of Instructor Work with TEAS 458

PRINTING HOUSE CONVENTIONS

Setup.exe Messages, commands, files, folders and other Windows OS info

<Enter> Keyboard key names

Menu Menu items

Note, Warning, Caution Notes, warnings, cautions

Document Document names

NTPRO_5000\Exercise Path to a file, folder

Page 1 Cross reference

An “exercise scene” or a “scene” is understood as a model or actual geographic area.

The scene is an aggregate of:

Exercise objects include:

The exercise scenario creation procedure implies:

This chapter contains:

Starting Navi-Trainer Instructor 19

STARTING NAVI-TRAINER INSTRUCTOR

However, application (nti.exe) can be started from command line:

nti.exe – SERVER: name – LANG: language,

DESCRIPTION OF MAIN WINDOW

The main window contains:

l Control – exercise control functions;

l Bridge select – selecting the active bridge;

l Editor – main functions of exercise editor:

l External connections – setting of parameters and status of an external connections;

l Loading ECDIS data;

l Main – main exercise handling tools;

l Panels – to call information and control panels;

l Plotting – control of on-chart object display settings;

l Reference point – to set a reference point on the chart;

l Viewpoint – to control the visualisation camera and the radar.

Customising Menu Bar and Toolbars

The Customize panel contains the following pages:

Changing Contents of Toolbars and Menu Bar

4. To add the tool or command to the selected toolbar/menu bar:

b. Click the button.

b. Click the button.

Showing and Hiding the Toolbars

Creating Custom Toolbars

3. Type the new toolbar name and click the ОK button.

Changing Interface Appearance

3. Click the Сolor button.

4. Click the ОK button.

l depth in the chart point where the mouse cursor is placed;

INSTRUCTOR WORKPLACE CONFIGURATION

Saving Workplace Configuration

2. Type configuration name in Name field and click OK button.

To save changes in the current configuration, use the following procedure:

To do this, use the following procedure:

This chapter contains:

Selection of Training Area 39

Creating Procedural Alarms 143

SELECTION OF TRAINING AREA

INFORMATION ON TRAINING AREA

Zooming Chart Fragment

Changing Chart Scale

Table 2. Ways to increase or decrease the scale of the chart

Increase scale Decrease scale